Address Manager Bam Api Guide 8.3.0
User Manual: Pdf
Open the PDF directly: View PDF 
.
Page Count: 261
| Download | |
| Open PDF In Browser | View PDF |
Address Manager
8.3.0 API Guide
November 2017 Update
CONFIDENTIAL - For customer's internal use only.
This document may not be reproduced or distributed without the written consent of BlueCat.
©
2017 BlueCat Networks (USA) Inc. and its affiliates.
Legal Notices
READ THIS BEFORE INSTALLING OR USING THE PRODUCT
This Documentation is subject to the applicable BlueCat License Agreement previously entered into
between BlueCat and your company, or if none, then to BlueCat’s standard terms and conditions which
you can view and download from https://www.bluecatnetworks.com/services-support/support/licenseagreements/. BlueCat reserves the right to revise this Documentation at any time without notice.
Company names and/or data used in screens and sample output are fictitious, unless otherwise stated.
Copyright
©2001—2017
BlueCat Networks (USA) Inc. and its affiliates (collectively ‘BlueCat’). All rights reserved.
This document contains confidential and proprietary information and is intended only for the person(s)
to whom it is transmitted. Any reproduction of this document, in whole or in part, without the prior written
consent of BlueCat is prohibited.
Trademarks
Proteus, Adonis, BlueCat DNS/DHCP Server, BlueCat Address Manager, BlueCat DNS Edge, BlueCat
Device Registration Portal, BlueCat DNS Integrity, BlueCat DNS Integrity Gateway, BlueCat Mobile
Security, BlueCat Address Manager for Windows Server, and BlueCat Threat Protection are trademarks of
BlueCat.
iDRAC is a registered trademark of Dell Inc. Windows is a registered trademark of Microsoft Corporation.
UNIX is a registered trademark of The Open Group. Linux is a registered trademark of Linus Torvalds.
QRadar is a registered trademark of IBM. ArcSight is a registered trademark of Hewlett Packard. Ubuntu is
a registered trademark of Canonical Ltd. CentOS is a trademark of the CentOS Project. All other product
and company names are registered trademarks or trademarks of their respective holders.
3
Contents
Contents
Preface: About this guide..........................................................................xi
Who should read this guide?............................................................................................................. xi
How is this book organized?.............................................................................................................. xi
Typographic Conventions................................................................................................................... xi
References......................................................................................................................................... xii
How do I contact BlueCat Customer Care?...................................................................................... xii
Chapter 1: What's New............................................................................. 13
New API Methods............................................................................................................................. 14
New Constants.................................................................................................................................. 14
Changes in 8.3.0 API........................................................................................................................14
Chapter 2: Overview..................................................................................17
Manipulating Address Manager Objects........................................................................................... 18
Implementation.................................................................................................................................. 18
Finding Objects..................................................................................................................................18
Address Manager Object Hierarchy.................................................................................................. 18
Logging In and Out of Address Manager......................................................................................... 20
Session Management........................................................................................................................ 21
Security.............................................................................................................................................. 21
Enabling SSL in Perl Clients.................................................................................................. 21
Enabling SSL in Java Clients.................................................................................................21
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API.....................................................23
Web Services API............................................................................................................................. 24
SOAP Binding Address.......................................................................................................... 24
SOAP Ports............................................................................................................................ 24
Maintaining state with cookies............................................................................................... 24
API Objects........................................................................................................................................24
APIEntity Class....................................................................................................................... 25
APIAccessRight Class............................................................................................................ 25
APIDeploymentRole Class......................................................................................................25
APIDeploymentOption Class.................................................................................................. 26
APIUserDefinedField Class.................................................................................................... 26
ResponsePolicySearchResult Class.......................................................................................27
API Sessions..................................................................................................................................... 27
Log in and Log out.................................................................................................................27
System Information................................................................................................................. 27
Working with Java API...................................................................................................................... 28
Connecting to Address Manager............................................................................................28
Logging in and out................................................................................................................. 29
Getting Objects....................................................................................................................... 30
Adding Objects....................................................................................................................... 31
Deleting Objects..................................................................................................................... 31
Sequence of Calls in the Client............................................................................................. 32
Changed API methods for Java users................................................................................... 32
Version 8.3.0 | 5
Contents
Available Java Classes...........................................................................................................33
Working with Perl API....................................................................................................................... 33
Connecting to Address Manager............................................................................................34
Logging in and out................................................................................................................. 34
Getting, Adding, Deleting, and Updating Objects...................................................................35
REST API.......................................................................................................................................... 35
REST vs SOAP...................................................................................................................... 36
Authentication and authorization............................................................................................ 36
REST API Examples.............................................................................................................. 37
Limitations............................................................................................................................... 41
REST API troubleshooting......................................................................................................41
Chapter 4: API Object Methods............................................................... 43
Generic Methods............................................................................................................................... 44
Getting Objects....................................................................................................................... 44
Searching and Retrieving Entities.......................................................................................... 45
Updating Objects.................................................................................................................... 50
Deleting Objects..................................................................................................................... 52
Linked Entities........................................................................................................................ 53
Changing Locale.....................................................................................................................55
User-defined Fields........................................................................................................................... 56
Setting UDF values when adding or updating....................................................................... 56
Getting User-defined Fields....................................................................................................57
IPAM.................................................................................................................................................. 58
IPv4 Blocks............................................................................................................................. 58
IPv4 Networks.........................................................................................................................61
IPv4 Network Templates........................................................................................................ 67
IPv4 addresses....................................................................................................................... 71
Additional IP Addresses......................................................................................................... 76
IPv4 Group..............................................................................................................................77
IPv4 Objects........................................................................................................................... 78
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation......................................................................................... 80
IPv6 Objects........................................................................................................................... 85
Provision Devices................................................................................................................... 91
DHCP................................................................................................................................................. 93
IPv4 DHCP Ranges................................................................................................................93
IPv6 DHCP Ranges................................................................................................................96
DHCP Client Options..............................................................................................................99
DHCP6 Client Options..........................................................................................................100
DHCP Custom Options.........................................................................................................102
DHCP Service Options......................................................................................................... 103
DHCP6 Service Options....................................................................................................... 105
DHCP Vendor Profiles and Options..................................................................................... 106
DHCP Match Classes...........................................................................................................110
DHCP Raw Options..............................................................................................................112
Shared Networks.................................................................................................................. 112
DNS................................................................................................................................................. 114
DNS Views............................................................................................................................114
DNS Zones........................................................................................................................... 115
DNS Zone Templates........................................................................................................... 118
ENUM Zones........................................................................................................................ 120
ENUM Numbers....................................................................................................................121
DNS Resource Records....................................................................................................... 121
DNS Options.........................................................................................................................136
DNS Raw Option.................................................................................................................. 139
6 | Address Manager API Guide
Contents
DNS Response Policies....................................................................................................... 140
Reverse zone name format..................................................................................................142
Deployment options......................................................................................................................... 143
Getting deployment options..................................................................................................143
Raw deployment option........................................................................................................ 144
TFTP................................................................................................................................................ 145
TFTP Groups........................................................................................................................ 145
TFTP Folders........................................................................................................................146
TFTP Files............................................................................................................................ 146
Servers and Deployment.................................................................................................................147
Servers.................................................................................................................................. 147
Server Group........................................................................................................................ 153
DNS and DHCP Deployment Roles..................................................................................... 154
DHCP Deployment Roles..................................................................................................... 156
DNS Deployment Roles........................................................................................................157
TFTP Deployment Roles...................................................................................................... 160
Crossover High Availability (xHA)................................................................................................... 160
Requirements for creating an xHA pair................................................................................161
Creating an xHA................................................................................................................... 161
Breaking an xHA.................................................................................................................. 164
xHA Failover......................................................................................................................... 165
Address Manager Objects...............................................................................................................165
Configurations....................................................................................................................... 165
Groups and Users................................................................................................................ 167
Authenticators....................................................................................................................... 169
Access Rights....................................................................................................................... 170
Object Tag Groups............................................................................................................... 173
Object Tags.......................................................................................................................... 174
Locations............................................................................................................................... 175
Database Management.........................................................................................................176
Devices................................................................................................................................. 178
MAC Pools............................................................................................................................179
MAC Addresses.................................................................................................................... 181
Workflow Change Requests................................................................................................. 182
Migration.......................................................................................................................................... 183
Migrate a File........................................................................................................................183
Migration Status.................................................................................................................... 183
Collecting Data................................................................................................................................ 184
Start Probe............................................................................................................................184
Get Probe Status..................................................................................................................184
Get Probe Data.................................................................................................................... 184
Chapter 5: API Constants....................................................................... 187
Access Right Values....................................................................................................................... 189
Additional IP Service Type..............................................................................................................189
Configuration Setting....................................................................................................................... 189
Deployment Services.......................................................................................................................189
Deployment Status.......................................................................................................................... 189
Device Properties............................................................................................................................ 190
DHCP Class Match Criteria............................................................................................................ 191
DHCP Client Options...................................................................................................................... 191
DHCP6 Client Options.....................................................................................................................194
DHCP Custom Option Types.......................................................................................................... 194
DHCP Deployment Role Types...................................................................................................... 195
DHCP Service Options....................................................................................................................195
Version 8.3.0 | 7
Contents
DHCPServiceOptionConstants........................................................................................................ 196
DHCP6 Service Options..................................................................................................................196
DNS Deployment Role Type...........................................................................................................197
DNS Options....................................................................................................................................197
DNS Option Values......................................................................................................................... 198
DNSSEC Key Format......................................................................................................................199
DNS Zones Deployment Validation Check..................................................................................... 199
Entity Categories............................................................................................................................. 199
ENUM Services............................................................................................................................... 200
IP Assignment Action Values..........................................................................................................201
IP Discovery Type........................................................................................................................... 201
Object Properties............................................................................................................................. 201
Object Types................................................................................................................................... 209
Option Types................................................................................................................................... 211
PositionRangeBy............................................................................................................................. 212
Response Policy Type.................................................................................................................... 212
Response Policy Search Scopes.................................................................................................... 212
Reverse Zone Format Type............................................................................................................ 212
Server Capability Profiles................................................................................................................ 213
Service Types..................................................................................................................................213
SNMP Version................................................................................................................................. 213
SNMP Security Levels.....................................................................................................................214
SNMP Authentication Type............................................................................................................. 214
SNMP Privacy Type........................................................................................................................ 214
Traversal Methodology.................................................................................................................... 214
User Access Type........................................................................................................................... 215
User-defined Field Type.................................................................................................................. 215
User-defined Field Validator Properties.......................................................................................... 215
User History Privileges.................................................................................................................... 215
User Security Privileges.................................................................................................................. 216
User Type........................................................................................................................................ 216
Vendor Profile Option Types...........................................................................................................216
Workflow Levels.............................................................................................................................. 217
Defined Probe Values..................................................................................................................... 217
Probe Status Values....................................................................................................................... 217
Chapter 6: API Method Reference......................................................... 219
API Sessions................................................................................................................................... 220
Generic Methods............................................................................................................................. 220
Linked Entities...................................................................................................................... 220
Changing Locale................................................................................................................... 221
User-defined Fields......................................................................................................................... 221
IPAM................................................................................................................................................ 221
IPv4 Blocks........................................................................................................................... 221
IPv4 Networks.......................................................................................................................222
IPv4 Network Templates...................................................................................................... 223
IPv4 Addresses.....................................................................................................................223
IPv4 Objects......................................................................................................................... 223
IPv4 Group............................................................................................................................224
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation....................................................................................... 224
IPv6 Objects......................................................................................................................... 224
Provision Devices................................................................................................................. 225
DHCP............................................................................................................................................... 225
IPv4 DHCP Ranges..............................................................................................................225
IPv6 DHCP Ranges..............................................................................................................226
8 | Address Manager API Guide
Contents
DHCP Client Options............................................................................................................226
DHCP6 Client Options..........................................................................................................226
DHCP Custom Options.........................................................................................................227
DHCP Service Options......................................................................................................... 227
DHCP6 Service Options....................................................................................................... 227
DHCP Vendor Options......................................................................................................... 227
DHCP Match Classes...........................................................................................................228
Shared Networks.................................................................................................................. 228
DNS................................................................................................................................................. 228
DNS Views............................................................................................................................228
DNS Zones........................................................................................................................... 229
DNS Zone Templates........................................................................................................... 229
ENUM Zones........................................................................................................................ 229
ENUM Numbers....................................................................................................................229
Generic Resource Records.................................................................................................. 230
NAPTR Records................................................................................................................... 230
External Host Records..........................................................................................................230
Host Records........................................................................................................................ 230
Alias Records........................................................................................................................231
Text Records........................................................................................................................ 231
HINFO Records.................................................................................................................... 231
MX Records.......................................................................................................................... 231
SRV Records........................................................................................................................ 232
Start of Authority Records.................................................................................................... 232
Generic Records................................................................................................................... 232
DNS Options.........................................................................................................................232
DNS Response Policies....................................................................................................... 233
Reverse Zone Name Format................................................................................................233
Deployment Options........................................................................................................................ 233
TFTP................................................................................................................................................ 233
TFTP Groups........................................................................................................................ 233
TFTP Folders........................................................................................................................234
TFTP Files............................................................................................................................ 234
Servers and Deployment.................................................................................................................234
Servers.................................................................................................................................. 234
Server Group........................................................................................................................ 235
DNS and DHCP Deployment Roles..................................................................................... 235
DHCP Deployment Roles..................................................................................................... 235
DNS Deployment Roles........................................................................................................236
TFTP Deployment Roles...................................................................................................... 236
Crossover High Availability (XHA)...................................................................................................236
Address Manager Objects...............................................................................................................236
Configurations....................................................................................................................... 236
Groups and Users................................................................................................................ 237
Authenticators....................................................................................................................... 237
Access Rights....................................................................................................................... 237
Devices................................................................................................................................. 238
Object Tag Groups............................................................................................................... 238
Object Tags.......................................................................................................................... 238
Locations............................................................................................................................... 238
Database Management.........................................................................................................239
MAC Pools............................................................................................................................239
MAC Addresses.................................................................................................................... 239
Workflow Change Requests................................................................................................. 239
Migration............................................................................................................................... 240
Collecting Data..................................................................................................................... 240
Version 8.3.0 | 9
Contents
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference................................................241
Property Options..............................................................................................................................242
Configuration......................................................................................................................... 242
Views and Zones..................................................................................................................242
Resource Records................................................................................................................ 242
Admin.................................................................................................................................... 244
Tags...................................................................................................................................... 244
Vendor Profiles..................................................................................................................... 244
DNSSEC............................................................................................................................... 245
TFTP Objects........................................................................................................................245
MAC Pool Objects................................................................................................................ 245
Device................................................................................................................................... 245
Location.................................................................................................................................246
Kerberos Realms.................................................................................................................. 247
Server....................................................................................................................................247
IPv4Objects........................................................................................................................... 248
IPv6Objects........................................................................................................................... 251
DeploymentRoles.................................................................................................................. 252
Access right.......................................................................................................................... 252
IP Address States........................................................................................................................... 252
IPv4....................................................................................................................................... 252
IPv6....................................................................................................................................... 253
10 | Address Manager API Guide
Preface
About this guide
The Address Manager API Guide describes the Application Programming Interface (API) for controlling
Address Manager IP Address Management (IPAM) appliances and virtual machines and offers instructions
on its implementation and usage. IP Address Management includes management of DNS (Domain Name
Services), DHCP (Dynamic Host Control Protocol), and IP inventories.
Who should read this guide?
This book is intended for a highly technical audience. This audience may include developers, IT planners,
and IPAM, DNS, and DHCP administrators.
How is this book organized?
Procedural information is organized in numbered points to help in rapid implementation. Examples that are
longer than a couple of lines are separated from other information, and are clearly marked with an Example
heading. All examples are in pseudocode unless otherwise indicated.
Overview—describes the general functionality of the Address Manager API. This chapter describes the
common sequences of operations and lists the available objects and methods.
The Address Manager API—describes the SOAP, Java, Perl, and REST API implementations.
API Object Methods—describes the methods available for the Address Manager object types.
API Constants—lists the constants used by the Address Manager API methods.
API Method Reference—lists methods by Address Manager object type.
Property Options Reference—lists available properties and IP address states.
Typographic Conventions
This guide uses the following conventions:
Bold
Command line options, button names, fields, tabs, and icons in the user
interface.
New terms being defined.
Dialog box, window, and screen names.
Blue italic
Cross references and hypertext links within the document.
Hypertext links to external URLs.
Monospace
Source code examples and terminal output.
Monospace italic
Variables in code examples.
Normal italic
Emphasis within a concept description.
!
Attention:
This icon appears alongside an Attention. Attentions usually appear with
critical information or with actions that might result in unexpected behavior.
xi
About this guide
!
Caution:
This icon appears alongside a Caution. Cautions usually appear where
performing an action may be dangerous to the user or to the equipment, or
where data may be corrupted or incomplete if the caution is not observed.
Note:
This icon appears alongside a Note. Notes give additional details on the
expected behavior about the material presented in concepts and procedures.
Tip:
This icon appears alongside a Tip. Tips are similar to Notes and suggest
alternative ways to accomplish a task or provide ideas for using the product in
the most effective way.
Warning:
This icon appears alongside a Warning. Warnings are more severe than
Cautions in that they alert you to actions that could result in potential data loss
or a service outage.
!
References
Working with an IPAM system requires in-depth knowledge of many subject areas, including DNS, DHCP,
IP Inventory Management and General Networking.
The following references are provided for readers who require more background knowledge before working
with Address Manager.
•
•
•
The DHCP Handbook by Ralph Droms and Ted Lemon, SAMS Publishing, ISBN 0-672-32327-3
Pro DNS and BIND by Ron Aitchison, Apress, ISBN 1-59059-494-0
The Internet System Consortium website (www.isc.org). This site also hosts the BIND FAQ at
www.isc.org/sw/bind and the DHCP FAQ at www.isc.org/software/dhcp.
How do I contact BlueCat Customer Care?
For 24/7/365 support, visit the BlueCat Customer CARE Portal at https://care.bluecatnetworks.com.
xii | Address Manager API Guide
Chapter 1
What's New
Topics:
•
•
•
This chapter provides brief lists of new methods and updates to the
existing API methods.
New API Methods
New Constants
Changes in 8.3.0 API
13
Chapter 1: What's New
New API Methods
The Address Manager API includes the following new methods:
Add DHCPv6 Range by Size
Use addDHCP6RangeBySize to add a new IPv6 DHCP range by size. For more information, refer to
Add IPv6 DHCP Range By Size on page 97.
Update User Password
Use updateUserPassword to update Address Manager user password. For more informaiton, refer
to Update User Password on page 169.
Update Address Manager System Password
Use void updateBAMSystemUserPassword to update Address Manager system user password.
For more information, refer to 8966.
Update DNS/DHCP Server System Password
Use void updateBDDSSystemUserPassword to update Address Manager system user password.
For more information, refer to 8966.
New Constants
The Address Manager API includes the following new constants:
New Constants in v8.3.0
•
New constant SLAVE_ZONE_NOTIFICATIONS has been added to the DNS deployment option when
using the following methods:
•
•
•
•
•
getDeploymentOptions
addDNSDeploymentOption
getDNSDeploymentOption
updateDNSDeploymentOption
deleteDNSDeploymentOption
The following rules apply when using the new SLAVE_ZONE_NOTIFICATIONS DNS option:
•
•
•
•
This option can only be added at Configuration, DNS view and DNS zone levels.
You must associate this option with a single server. This option cannot be associated with a server
group object.
This option can only be associated with one server under the same level.
The value of the option can be either enable or disable.
Changes in 8.3.0 API
Includes the following changes in behavior:
Added support for CAA resource records
The addGenericRecord API method has been updated to support the Certificate Authority Authorization
(CAA) generic resource record type.
14 | Address Manager API Guide
Changes in 8.3.0 API
Resolved issues
An error related to the same FQDN in multiple resource records has been resolved.
Issue—Previously, when using the following API methods, if there is same FQDN assigned to a normal
resource record and an external host record, an error was tiggered:
•
•
•
•
addAliasRecord()
addSRVRecord()
addMXRecord()
addResourceRecord() for CNAME, SRV and MX
Resolved—In Address Manager v8.3.0, when there are normal resource records such as Host and
CNAME and external host records using the same FQDN, the normal resource records will take
precedence over external host records and will be used to create link records such as CNAME, SRV
and MX.
Note: When there are multiple normal resource records with the same FQDN an error will be
triggered.
Version 8.3.0 | 15
Chapter 2
Overview
Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manipulating Address Manager
Objects
Implementation
Finding Objects
Address Manager Object
Hierarchy
Logging In and Out of Address
Manager
Session Management
Security
The Address Manager API (Application Programming Interface) is a
web service that make Address Manager accessible to any system
that has standard network or Internet access.
Use SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) or REST
(Representational state transfer) to access this web service. The web
service has a WSDL (Web Service Description Language) file that can
be viewed in a browser. Use the WSDL file to generate client artifacts,
such as methods and serialized classes. Implementers can use this
service directly. Java and Perl API implementations are also provided.
17
Chapter 2: Overview
Manipulating Address Manager Objects
Remotely manipulates objects through the Address Manager API, using a combination of generic and typespecific methods.
This manipulation involves adding objects, getting objects by name, updating them, adding new child
objects, access rights or object tags to them, and deleting them. The Address Manager API also includes
various query functions, such as a check to see if an IP address is allocated. To access the Address
Manager API, the script or application must log in to Address Manager as an API user.
Implementation
Sessions in the Address Manager API are implemented as Perl or Java programs, or accessed directly
through the web service.
Generally, these sessions log in, perform a function, and then log out again. Provided the script is
successful, the next script then logs in, performs its function, and then logs out.
1. Connect to the Address Manager server.
2. Log in.
3. Get the initial configuration, user, group or tag group object and proceed to step 4, or retrieve a specific
object by name or ID using getEntity() and proceed to step 7.
4. Use getEntities() to find the children of the initial object.
5. Use getEntity() or a less generic method to select a single entity.
6. Add a child object or affect the current object.
7. Log out.
Variations on this pattern are possible, provided the API implementation can provide sufficient information
to retrieve the required objects.
Finding Objects
These search functions provide quick access to Address Manager objects. In most cases this will eliminate
the need to search through the entire Address Manager object tree.
•
•
•
searchByCategory() returns an array of entities by searching keywords associated with objects of a
specified object category. For more information, refer to Search by Category on page 48.
searchByObjectTypes() returns an array of entities by searching keywords associated with objects
of a specified object type. You can search for multiple object types with a single method call. For more
information, refer to Search by Object Types on page 48.
searchResponsePolicyItems returns an array of entities by searching keywords associated with
objects of a specified policy item. For more information, refer to Search Response Policies on page
141.
Address Manager Object Hierarchy
The web services API is designed to facilitate various types of development, and can be implemented
in many different ways. Ultimately, client-side implementations can model the way that data is stored in
Address Manager in order to persist objects temporarily. Keeping this structure in mind will help you create
caching or reference data structures within client implementations.
18 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Object Hierarchy
Version 8.3.0 | 19
Chapter 2: Overview
Logging In and Out of Address Manager
To access the Address Manager API, the script or application must log in to Address Manager using an
API user account.
All API implementations must first connect to the Address Manager API service, and then log in to start
a session. None of the Address Manager API functionality described in the following subsections is
accessible unless an API user logs on to the system. Address Manager API users have a specific access
type (API) and cannot log in to Address Manager through the GUI (Graphical User Interface). Similarly,
non-API users cannot connect to Address Manager through the API interface.
To connect to the service, you need the IP address for the Address Manager server. Logging in creates a
session for that user with a timeout limit corresponding to that set for all users. API users must also log out
after the required operations have been completed.
For more information about API access, refer to the Address Manager Administration Guide or the online
Help.
1. Using the Address Manager web interface, log in to Address Manager as an administrator.
2. On the Administration page, click Users and Groups. The Users and Groups page appears.
3. In the Users section, click New . The Add User page appears.
4. In the User section, type a name in the Username field.
5. In the Authentication section, type and confirm the API user password in the Password and Confirm
Password fields. If external authenticators are available, an Other checkbox and a list of authenticators
appears in the Authentication section. To use an external authenticator for the API user, click the Other
checkbox, and then select an authenticator from the list.
6. In the Extra Information section, set the following parameters:
E-mail Address
Type an email address for the API user. This information is required.
Phone number
Type a phone number for the API user. This information is optional.
7. In the User Access section you define the user type, security and history privileges, and access type:
Type of User
Select the type of user, either Non-Administrator or Administrator. Non-Administrator users
have access only to DNS and IPAM management functions. Administrator users have unlimited
access to all Address Manager functions.
Security Privilege
select a security privilege type from the drop-down list. This field is available only for NonAdministrator users with GUI, API, or GUI and API access.
History Privilege
select a history privilege type from the drop-down list. This field is available only for NonAdministrator users with GUI, or GUI and API access.
Access Type
select the type of access; GUI, API, or GUI and API . GUI (Graphical User Interface) users can
access Address Manager only through the Address Manager web interface. API (Application
Programming Interface) users can access Address Manager only through the API. GUI and API
users can access Address Manager either through the Address Manager web interface or the API.
8. In the Assign to Group section, you can assign the user to one or more existing user groups. In the
text field, type the name of a user group. As you type, a list of user groups matching your text appears.
Select a name from the list, and then click Add to the right of the text field.
20 | Address Manager API Guide
Session Management
9. In the Change Control section, add comments to describe the changes. This step is optional but may
be set to be required.
10.Click Add at the bottom of the page.
Session Management
Web services do not define a standard for session management. Address Manager maintains a session
ID to associate it with the Address Manager database session obtained from the initial log in attempt. This
accounts for the stateless nature of the HTTP protocol.
Address Manager uses cookies to maintain state. When using WSDL-generated classes, be sure to enable
cookies on your system.
Security
The web service endpoint can be made secure by enabling SSL support using the Address Manager
Administration Console.
This enables SSL for all Address Manager services, including the web interface. For instructions on
enabling SSL on Address Manager, refer to HTTPS in the Address Manager Administration Guide.
Enabling SSL in Perl Clients
To enable SSL in Perl scripts, you need to install the Crypt-SSLeay package.
You can download the package from http://search.cpan.org/dist/Crypt-SSLeay/.
Perl scripts can use SSL in their web service calls by using https instead of http in the proxy definition.
Note: To ensure that API scripts will continue to operate under the higher security implemented in
Address Manager v3.7.1 and later, the following conditions must be met:
•
•
Perl version must be v5.12 or later.
When enabling SSL, you must access Address Manager using the same host name that is
defined by the SSL certificate, not the IP address or other canonical names. If you cannot use
that host name, you need to add the following line to the beginning of the script to avoid the API
call failure due to the difference in host name as part of request and certificate.
$ENV{'PERL_LWP_SSL_VERIFY_HOSTNAME'} = 0;
Note: This line will disable the validation of SSL certifications for the context of the
execution.
Enabling SSL in Java Clients
Steps to enable SSL for Java clients.
Follow these Before beginning, ensure that the Java Development Kit is installed on the client workstation.
1. On Address Manager, enable HTTPS support. For instructions on enabling SSL on Address Manager,
refer to HTTPS in Chapter 10: Appliance Settings in the Address Manager Administration Guide.
2. On the client workstation, create a directory to hold the keystore.
3. On Address Manager, locate the /data/server/conf/server.cert file, and then copy it to the keystore
directory on your client workstation. If SSH is enabled on Address Manager, use an SSH client to copy
the file.
4. On the client workstation, navigate to the keystore directory. Ensure that the directory contains the
server.cert file.
Version 8.3.0 | 21
Chapter 2: Overview
5. Execute the following command: javaHomePath/bin/keytool -import -trustcacerts alias ProteusAPI -file server.cert -keystore client.ks -storepass bluecat
6. Ensure that a client.ks file has been generated and appears in the keystore directory.
7. Delete the server.cert file from the keystore directory on the client workstation.
8. When connecting to service, use the following command to call the ProteusAPIUtils.connect()
method: ProteusAPIUtils.connect(IPAddress, true, pathToClientKeystore\
\client.ks); where IPAddress is the IP address of the Address Manager server, and
pathToClientKeystore is the path to the keystore directory on the client workstation.
22 | Address Manager API Guide
Chapter 3
The Address Manager API
Topics:
This section describes different types of API implementations.
•
•
•
•
•
•
For integrating into different types of network environments, Address
Manager includes the following implementations:
Web Services API
API Objects
API Sessions
Working with Java API
Working with Perl API
REST API
•
•
•
•
The most open implementation is the Address Manager serviceoriented architecture implementing SOAP web services. Any
client able to take advantage of web services can use this
implementation.
RESTful API calls to access Address Manager are supported.
A Java API implementation is provided to integrate Address
Manager into n-tier Java architectures.
A Perl API implementation is provided for environments where
scripting is preferred.
23
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
Web Services API
The Address Manager API is a SOAP web service, so it has an accessible WSDL file.
You can access this file and generate your own classes and methods to use when connecting to the
service. To view the WSDL file in a browser, go to http://AddressManagerAddress/Services/API?wsdl
address. If HTTPS is enabled on Address Manager, use the HTTPS protocol in the address.
SOAP Binding Address
The WSDL file uses the Address Manager server’s host-name as the soap:address location.
For a Address Manager appliance with the factory default host-name, the Address Manager API service
looks like this example:
To configure the soap:address location attribute to your Address Manager appliance, download a copy of
the WSDL file to your workstation. Edit the local copy of the WSDL file to change the soap:address location
to the required address. Configure your SOAP tools to load the WSDL file from your local copy of the file,
rather than from the Address Manager appliance.
SOAP Ports
To access the Address Manager API, use the following ports:
•
•
Port 80 when using HTTP
Port 443 when using HTTPS
Maintaining state with cookies
Address Manager uses cookies to maintain state.
When using WSDL-generated classes, be sure to enable cookies on your system.
API Objects
The web service defines objects representing all Address Manager object types supported in the service.
These objects can be added, retrieved, manipulated, and deleted. For a list of objects and methods, refer
to API Method Reference on page 219.
The following classes reference all objects within the web service:
•
•
•
•
•
•
APIEntity
APIAccessRight
APIDeploymentRole
APIDeploymentOption
APIUserDefinedField
ResponsePolicySearchResult
24 | Address Manager API Guide
API Objects
APIEntity Class
This class represents all entities except options, roles, and access rights. It manages all other types by
passing the values for the object as a delimited properties string of name–value pairs.
The properties for each object are listed in API Object Methods on page 43.
id
the database ID of the object in Address Manager.
name
the field name, which might be null.
type
the class name of the object. For example, a configuration object has a type equal to
Configuration. This field cannot be null. A list of types is part of the API client (Java
and Perl).
properties
a string that contains properties for the object in attribute=value format, with each
separated by a | (pipe) character. For example, a host record object may have a
properties field such as ttl=123|comments=my comment|. This field can be null.
APIAccessRight Class
This class controls Access Rights objects.
entityId
the database ID of the object to which the access right applies. This value must be
greater than 0.
userId
the database ID of the owner of the access right. This value must be greater than 0.
value
the default access right (HIDE, VIEW, ADD, CHANGE, or FULL). This field cannot be
null.
overrides
indicates the types that are to be overridden in the access right in the format
objectType=accessRightValue where objectType is the same object type used in
APIEntity and accessRightValue is one of HIDE, VIEW, ADD, CHANGE or FULL.
Multiple override elements are separated by a | (pipe) character.
properties
a string containing extra properties for the object in the format attribute=value.
APIDeploymentRole Class
Manages the deployment roles that control the services provided by Address Manager-managed servers.
These objects support the standard object functions.
id
the database ID of the deployment role in Address Manager.
type
the type of the role (NONE, MASTER, MASTER_HIDDEN, SLAVE,
SLAVE_STEALTH, FORWARDER, STUB, RECURSION, PEER, or AD_MASTER.)
This field cannot be null.
service
DNS, DHCP, or TFTP. This field cannot be null.
entityId
the database ID of entity. This value must be greater than 0.
serverInterfaceId
the database ID of the server interface. This value must be greater than 0.
properties
a string containing extra properties for the object in the format attribute=value. This
field can be null if used for forward space. A ViewId property must be provided to
assign DNS Roles to a Network or Block for a particular DNS View (reverse space).
Multiple properties are separated by a | (pipe) character.
Version 8.3.0 | 25
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
APIDeploymentOption Class
Deployment options configure both DHCP and DNS services on the network. They are available as DHCP
client and service options, as well as standard DNS options. Deployment options support the standard
object functions.
id
the database ID of the option in Address Manager.
type
the option type listed in Option Types on page 211. This field cannot be null.
name
the name of the option.
value
the single- or multiple-field value of the option; multiple values are commaseparated. This field cannot be null.
properties
a string containing additional properties. This is used for user-defined fields on
most objects, but also passes some values that do not have their own specific
parameter.
Note: When adding the DDNS hostname option, you need to specify the value in the following
format: [Type], [Position], [Data] for IP and MAC type, and [Type], [Data] for FIXED
type.
Where:
•
Type—type of DDNS hostname. The possible values are
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_IP,
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_MAC, or
•
•
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_FIXED.
Position—specify where you wish to add the data value to the IP or MAC address. The possible
values are DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_POSITION_PREPEND, or
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_POSITION_APPEND. This is only required
for IP or MAC type with Data.
Data—For IP and MAC address, this value is used to be prepended or appended to the IP
address or MAC address. For FIXED type, this value must be specified and will be used for the
DDNS hostname. This is optional for IP and MAC type.
APIUserDefinedField Class
User-defined fields can be added to each of the Address Manager object types. This class allows API
users to query and gather user-defined fields information for a specified object type.
name
the internal name of the user-defined field.
displayname
the name of the user-defined field that appears to users in the Address Manager
interface.
type
the type of the user-defined field. Types are available as constants in the
UserDefinedFieldType class. For available constants, refer to User-defined
Field Type on page 215.
defaultValue
the default value for the user-defined field.
validatorProperties
the validation properties for the user-defined field. Property names are available
as constants in the UserDefinedFieldValidatorProperties class. For available
constants, refer to User-defined Field Validator Properties on page 215.
required
the boolean value. If set to true, users must enter data in the field.
26 | Address Manager API Guide
API Sessions
hideFromSearch
the boolean value. If set to true, the user-defined field is hidden from the search.
renderAsRadioButton the boolean value. If set to true, the user-defined field is rendered as a radio
button group.
ResponsePolicySearchResult Class
Represents the Response Policy items that are configured either in local Response Policies or BlueCat
Security feed data.
name
the name of the Response Policy item.
parentIds
comma-separated values of the parent Response Policy or RP Zone object(s)
ID. If policy item is associated with a Response Policy, it is the Response Policy
object ID. If policy item is associated with BlueCat Security feed data, it is the
RP Zone object ID.
category
the name of the BlueCat Security feed category associated with the policy item.
For example, Malicious, Spam or Botnet C&C. For local response policy items,
this will be null.
policyType
the type of response policy. For example, whitelist, blacklist, redirect or
blackhole.
configId
the object ID of the parent configuration in which the Response Policy item is
configured.
API Sessions
Address Manager API session methods control the connection, log in, and log out processes. There is also
a method to return system information about the appliance.
Log in and Log out
Log in and log out of the Address Manager system.
You must use an API user account to access the Address Manager API.
To log in, use the following method, passing the API user name and password:
login( String name, String password )
To log out, use the following method:
logout();
System Information
Retrieves Address Manager system information through the API.
To retrieve system information, use String getSystemInfo(). This method returns system information
in the following format:
hostName=value|version=value|address=value|clusterRole=value|
replicationRole=value|replicationStatus=value|entityCount=value|
databaseSize=value|loggedInUsers=value
Version 8.3.0 | 27
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
Parameter:
hostName
The host name of the Address Manager server.
version
The version of the Address Manager software.
address
The IP address of the Address Manager server.
clusterRole
The role of the server in an XHA pair, either primary or secondary.
replicationRole
The role of the server in database replication, either primary or secondary.
replicationStatus
The status of the replication service on the Address Manager server.
entityCount
The number of entities within the Address Manager database.
databaseSize
The size, in megabytes, of the Address Manager database.
loggedInUsers
The number of users presently logged in to Address Manager.
Working with Java API
Implement the Address Manager API in Java.
To use the Address Manager API with Java, you may need to install the Metro implementation of SOAP.
Down package metro_2.3.1 from https://metro.java.net/2.3.1/.
To execute the Address Manager API in Java, you need the following two jar files:
•
•
api.jar
commons-logging-1.1.3.jar: Apache Commons Logging for logging
Note: Java environment support
api.jar can be used in Java 7 and Java 8 environment to communicate with Address Manager.
Connecting to Address Manager
To begin an API session, you must first connect to the Address Manager server. The following methods
are available in APILoginUtils.java to establish the connection:
HTTP session
ProteusAPI connect ( String hostIP )
Parameter
Description
hostIP
The addresses of Address Manager appliance.
HTTPS session
ProteusAPI secureConnect ( String hostIP, String trustStoreLocation,
String passphase )
Parameter
Description
hostIP
The addresses of Address Manager appliance.
trustStoreLocation
The location of the certificate on the client.
passphase
The passphase of the certificate on the client.
28 | Address Manager API Guide
Working with Java API
Output / Response
This method returns a ProteusAPI reference containing the methods for the API.
Deprecated API session method
The following method in ProteusAPIUtils.java has been deprecated.
ProteusAPI_PortType connect ( String address, boolean enableSSL,
String keystoreLocation )
BlueCat recommends using ProteusAPI connect() and ProteusAPI secureConnect() methods
instead.
Parameter
Description
address
The addresses of Address Manager appliance.
enableSSL
If security is enabled on the Address Manager
appliance, set this flag to true.
keystoreLocation
The location of the certificate on the client.
Note: If you are using HTTP, address is the only required parameter for this method.
Output/Response
This method returns a ProteusAPI_PortType reference containing the methods for the API.
Example
Connect to the service using the connect( address ) function from APILogInUtils.
Refer to the following example:
// connect to Address Manager
ProteusAPI service = APILoginUtils.connect( "HOST" );
// connect to Address Manager securely
ProteusAPI service = APILoginUtils.secureConnect( "HOST", "KEYSTORE_PATH",
"KEYSTORE_PASSPHASE" );
Deprecated ProteusAPI_PortType class
The use of the ProteusAPI_PortType class has been deprecated. Use ProteusAPI instead.
Deprecated ProteusAPI_PortType class example:
ProteusAPI_PortType service = ProteusAPIUtils.connect( "HOST" );
// connect to Address Manager securely
ProteusAPI_PortType service = ProteusAPIUtils.connect( HOST, true,
"KEYSTORE_PATH" );
Logging in and out
•
Log in as an API user. Use the login() method to log in:
// log in and establish a session
service.login( "USENAME", "PASSWARD" );
Version 8.3.0 | 29
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
•
After completing API tasks, the API user must log out.
service.logout();
Note: While a session will expire based on the Session Timeout value set on the Configure
Global Settings page of the Address Manager web interface, an explicit logout is strongly
recommended to close the API user session.
Getting Objects
Address Manager provides various methods for getting existing objects. This section provides samples
showing a few ways to fetch the objects from Address Manager.
getEntity
There are some variations of getEntity such as getEntityById and getEntities. These methods
are useful to find an object. The following examples describe fetching objects under a parent object. In
these particular examples, we are finding a configuration in Address Manager.
// Signature: getEntityByName( long parentId, String name, String type )
APIEntity existingConfiguration = service.getEntityByName(
0, // Please refer the tip at the end of this section
"configName", // The name of the configuration object to be searched
ObjectTypes.Configuration // Type of object, defined in ObjectTypes interface
);
getUserDefinedFields
Use the getUserDefinedFields() method to get the list of all user-defined fields of an Object Type. In
this example, we use IP4Block.
// Signature: getUserDefinedFields( String type, boolean
requiredFieldsOnly )
APIUserDefinedFieldArray fields =
service.getUserDefinedFields( ObjectTypes.IP4Block, true );
// Get the fields as a list
List udfs = fields.getItem();
Find objects by hint
Address Manager supports a few methods such as getZonesByHint and getIP4NetworksByHint to
find objects using a hint pattern.
// Signature: getZonesByHint( long containerId, int start, int count, String options )
// In this example, we are fetching up to 10 objects with no criteria
APIEntityArray entityArray = service.getZonesByHint( containerId, 0, 10, "" );
// Get the entities as a list
List entities = entityArray.getItem();
// Fetching 10 objects starting from the 5th element, starting with name 'example'
String options = ObjectProperties.hint + "=example";
entityArray = service.getZonesByHint( containerId, 5, 10, options );
Tip: For almost all object types, the add() and get() methods require parentID, which is the
ID of the parent object. The following objects can take 0 (zero) as the parentID: Configuration,
TagGroup, User, UserGroup, and Authenticator.
30 | Address Manager API Guide
Working with Java API
Adding Objects
There are several ways to add objects to Address Manager via the API. This section contains examples
of these methods, including a generic addEntity method as well methods for adding specific objects in
Address Manager.
Generic addEntity()
addEntity() is a generic adding method that can be used to create any object. In this example, we are
adding a IP4Block in Address Manager.
// Signature: addEntity( long parentId, APIEntity entity )
// Form the entity object with the data
APIEntity blockEntity = new APIEntity();
// Specify Name
blockEntity.setName( "blockName" );
// Specify Type
blockEntity.setType( ObjectTypes.IP4Block );
// Specify additional properties required to define object
blockEntity.setProperties( ObjectProperties.CIDR + "=192.168.0.0/16" );
// Add this entity under the defined parent
long blockId = service.addEntity( configId, blockEntity );
Specific add methods
There are other add methods that can be used to add specific different objects. In this example, we are
adding a IP4Block in Address Manager.
// Signature: addIP4BlockByCIDR( long parentId, String CIDR, String properties )
// Add the block specifying the CIDR. Name has to be specified using properties in this case
String properties = ObjectProperties.name + "=blockName2";
long blockId = service.addIP4BlockByCIDR( configId, "20.0.0/16", properties );
Deleting Objects
To delete an object, you can invoke the delete() method or one of its variants.
// Signature: delete( long objectId )
// Delete API needs object id, which can be retrieved from the fetched
object
APIEntity entity = service.getEntityByName( configId, "ip4BlockName",
ObjectTypes.IP4Block );
long objId = entity.getId();
// API call to delete the object
service.delete( objId );
Version 8.3.0 | 31
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
Sequence of Calls in the Client
This example adds a host record to an existing zone. It demonstrates a complete session using the
Address Manager API from Java. This example implements the following steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Connect to the Address Manager API service.
Log in.
Get the parent configuration object by name.
Get the parent view object by name.
Get the parent zone object by name (you can use the absolute name), and then retrieve its child. In this
case, to retrieve example.net, we retrieve the parent com to find its child object example.com.
6. Define a host record object and add it to the parent zone object.
7. Log out.
import
import
import
import
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.client.java.APILoginUtils;
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.client.java.constants.ObjectTypes;
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.client.java.proxy.APIEntity;
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.client.java.proxy.ProteusAPI;
public class ProteusAddHostRecord
{
public static void main( String[] args ) throws Exception
{
ProteusAPI service = APILoginUtils.connect( "ProteusIPAddress" );
service.login( "api_user", "password" );
APIEntity existingConfiguration = service.getEntityByName( 0,
"Existing Config", ObjectTypes.Configuration );
APIEntity existingView =
service.getEntityByName( existingConfiguration.getId(), "Existing View",
ObjectTypes.View );
long hostRecordId = service.addHostRecord( existingView.getId(),
"www.example.com", "10.0.0.6,10.0.0.8", 1, "" );
service.logout();
}
}
Changed API methods for Java users
This section lists changed API methods for Java users.
Address Manager API methods will no longer return or accept an array element such as APIEntity[] and
APIDeploymentOption[].
An array element has been replaced by an array object. Refer to the following table for the list of array
elements replaced:
Array element
Replaced array object
APIEntity[]
APIEntityArray
APIAccessRight[]
APIAccessRightArray
APIDeploymentOption[]
APIDeploymentOptionArray
APIDeploymentRole[]
APIDeploymentRoleArray
APIUserDefinedField[]
APIUserDefinedFieldArray
long[]
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.client.java.proxy.LongArray
String[]
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.client.java.proxy.StringArray
32 | Address Manager API Guide
Working with Perl API
Input type example
An array element ([]) input type has been changed to an array object. For example, long[] can be replaced
with LongArray. Refer to the following code example:
// Create array[] element containing actual values that need to be send in
request
Long[] subBlockIds = { subblock1Id, subblock2Id };
// Create new Array object
LongArray subBlocks = new LongArray();
// Add values in array element in Array object
subBlocks.getItem().addAll( Arrays.asList( subBlockIds ) );
// send Array object as part of request.
service.mergeBlocksWithParent( subBlocks );
Return type example
An array element ([]) return type has been changed to an array object. For example, APIEntity[] is
replaced with APIEntityArray. Refer to the following code example:
// Get the Array object from the response
APIEntityArray apiEntityArray = service.getEntities( configId,
ObjectTypes.IP4Block, 0, 10 );
// Get actual values in Array object as list
List apiEntities = apiEntityArray.getItem();
// Iterate through above list to get APIEntity object
for( APIEntity apiEntity : apiEntities )
{
printEntity( apiEntity );
}
Available Java Classes
The API includes a number of classes to facilitate the use of the methods (for example, generating the
properties strings).
These classes are discussed below, with the exception of UserSecurityPrivileges.java and
UserHistoryPrivileges.java.
Working with Perl API
The Address Manager API can be implemented in Perl. The module containing the full Perl API
implementation is called API.pm.
On the workstation running Perl, locate the lib directory of your Perl installation and create a new directory,
for example, bam. Copy the API.pm file to the lib/bam directory.
Note: Older versions of the SOAP:Lite module for Perl may create some warnings. If this is an
issue, upgrade to the latest module
All Address Manager methods that take arguments need to use the SOAP::Data package to convert
these argument into SOAP compatible arguments. For example, to use the login() method, the username
argument should look like this:
SOAP::Data->name ('username')->
value( $username )->
type( 'string' )->
attr({xmlns => ''})
Version 8.3.0 | 33
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
Where:
username
The name of the argument (as described by the WSDL).
value
The value to be passed.
type
The SOAP type (for example, string, int, long, or base64).
attr
Necessary to make the SOAP message compatible with the service.
Connecting to Address Manager
Connect to the service using the connect( address ) function from the BAMConnection package.
Refer to the following example:
## connect to Address Manager
$service = BAMConnection->connect( "address" => 'ipAddress' );
# use "enableSSL" flag if using SSL
# $service = BAMConnection->connect("address" => 'ipAddress', "enableSSL" =>
'true' );
Deprecated the Service package
The use of the Service package has been deprecated. Use the BAMConnection package instead.
Deprecated Service package example:
## connect to Address Manager
$service = Service->connect( "address" => 'ipAddress' );
# use "enableSSL" flag if using SSL
# $service = Service->connect("address" => 'ipAddress', "enableSSL" =>
'true' );
Logging in and out
•
Log in as an API user. Use the login() method to log in:
## log in and establish a session
$service->login(
SOAP::Data->name('username')->
value('apiUserName')->
type('string')->
attr({xmlns => ''}),
SOAP::Data->name('password')->
value('apiUserPassword')->
type('string')->
attr({xmlns => ''}) );
•
After completing API tasks, the API user must log out.
$service->logout();
Note: While a session will expire based on the Session Timeout value set on the Configure
Global Settings page of the Address Manager web interface, an explicit logout is strongly
recommended to close the API user session.
34 | Address Manager API Guide
REST API
Getting, Adding, Deleting, and Updating Objects
•
Use the get(), add(), delete(), and update() methods to manipulate Address Manager entities. This
example shows the addition of a new configuration with a shared network:
# Add a new configuration with a shared network
my $configuration = APIEntity->new( "id" => 0,
"name" => "Test Configuration",
"type" => ObjectTypes::Configuration,
"properties" =>
ObjectProperties::sharedNetwork."=".$existingSharedNetwork1->
get_id()."|" );
my $configurationId = $service->addEntity( SOAP::Data->type( 'long' )->
name( 'parentId' )->
value( 0 )->
attr({xmlns => ''}),
SOAP::Data->type( 'APIEntity' )->name( 'entity' )->
value( $configuration )->
attr({xmlns => ''}) )->
result;
print "New Configuration id = ".$configurationId.->get_id()."\n";
•
Use the getUserDefinedFields() method to find the user-defined fields with their settings and values in
Address Manager. For example:
my @udfs= $service->getUserDefinedFields( SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )>name( 'type' )->value( ObjectTypes::Device )->attr({xmlns => ''}),
SOAP::Data->type( 'boolean' )->name( 'requiredFieldsOnly' )>value( 'false' )
->attr({xmlns => ''}) )
->valueof('//getUserDefinedFieldsResponse/return/item');
print"number of fields=".@udfs."\n";
for my $eachUDF ( @udfs )
{
my $udf = BAMConnection->blessAPIUserDefinedField( "object" => $eachUDF );
print"Object----------------------\n";
print $udf->get_name()."\n";
print "Name=".$udf->get_name()."\n";
print "DisplayName=".$udf->get_displayName()."\n";
print "Type=".$udf->get_type()."\n";
print "defaultValue=".$udf->get_defaultValue()."\n";
print "Validator Properties=".$udf->get_validatorProperties()."\n";
print "PredefinedValues=".$udf->get_predefinedValues()."\n";
print "Required=".$udf->get_required()."\n";
print "Hide from search=".$udf->get_hideFromSearch()."\n";
print "Radio=".$udf->get_renderAsRadioButton()."\n";
}
For almost all object types, the add() and most get() methods require parentID, which is the ID of the
parent object. The following objects can take 0 (zero) as the parentID: Configuration, TagGroup, User,
UserGroup, and Authenticator.
REST API
Address Manager now supports REST APIs to access Address Manager along with conventional SOAP
APIs.
Version 8.3.0 | 35
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
This section describes BlueCat's RESTful API implementation such as the invoking format, how to
authenticate and authorize, and REST API samples and limitations.
•
•
BlueCat REST APIs support communication over HTTP and HTTPS.
JSON format supported for sending and receiving data.
REST API format
You can access all BlueCat REST APIs by appending known methods to the base URL http://
/Services/REST/v1/
For example, to invoke the getSystemInfo method, you need to enter:
http://192.168.1.2/Services/REST/v1/getSystemInfo
Web Application Description Language (WADL)
The Address Manager REST API has an accessible WADL. You can access the WADL file by using
http:///Services/REST/application.wadl
You can use the WADL file to check various parameters of the API such as:
•
•
•
•
API signatures
HTTP methods (GET/POST/PUT/DELETE) for specific calls
API request parameters and datatype
Response datatype and media types
REST vs SOAP
REST APIs have many similarities with the widely used SOAP-based APIs supported by Address
Manager. However, there are a few differences between REST interface and existing SOAP
implementation:
•
•
•
•
The names of API methods in REST remain the same as that of SOAP APIs.
Signatures of all methods including input and output parameters in REST are the same as in SOAP.
In REST API, various primitive request parameters such as int, long and String are expected as URL
query parameters. Whereas in SOAP, all the request parameters are communicated as part of XML
body.
Complex parameter types such as APIEntity or APIDeploymentOption need to be passed as a part of
HTTP body of the call in JSON format.
Authentication and authorization
Address Manager uses a token-based authentication and authorization. Once generated, the token must
be used when invoking every subsequent API method in Address Manager.
Generating a token
You need to generate the authentication and authorization token by invoking the login API method. You
must use an API user account to access the Address Manager API. If the credentials are invalid, it will fail
with an error. For more information about log in and log out methods, refer to Log in and Log out on page
27.
Log in format:
http:///Services/REST/v1/login?
username=&password=
36 | Address Manager API Guide
REST API
Output / Response
The body of the JSON response for the above API method will be in the "Session Token->
${ACTUAL_TOKEN} <- for User : ${USERNAME_PASSED}" and it can be used to extract the
authorization token.
The ACTUAL_TOKEN is comprised of the keyword BAMAuthToken and a dynamically generated token
hash. For example, “BAMAuthToken: 4bippMTQ1ODAzNzgwNjE0MzphcGk=”.
Authorizing API methods
The generated authorization token must be passed when invoking any API method. The token needs to be
passed as an Authorization property in the request header.
Configuring the token timeout
By default, the generated token expires after 5 minutes. You can change this behavior according to your
use case.
Note: For details on how to change the token timeout, refer to knowledge base article 7724 on
BlueCat Customer Care.
REST API Examples
This section describes how to use REST APIs with main generic method examples.
The four main generic Address Manager APIs use these HTTP RESTful methods in the following
examples:
Generic Address Manager API
RESTful HTTP method
get()
GET
update()
PUT
addEntity()
POST
delete()
DELETE
GET request example
All get related API methods use the GET method in REST API. In this example,
getDNSDeploymentOption will be used to retrieve the DNS option.
API call example:
http:///Services/REST/v1/getDNSDeploymentOption?
entityId=101041&name=allow-ddns&serverId=100907
URL path:
•
/getDNSDeploymentOption
Parameters:
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which this deployment option is assigned.
name
The name of the DNS option.
serverId
Specifies the server to which this option is assigned. To retrieve an option that
has not been assigned to a server role, set this value to 0(zero).
Version 8.3.0 | 37
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
Response
A JSON (as defined in WADL) containing details of the DNS deployment option.
{
"id": 100979,
"type": "DNS",
"name": "allow-ddns",
"value": "any",
"properties": "inherited=false|"
}
Passing String[]
String[] parameter needs to be passed as a repeated URL parameter.
API call example:
http:///Services/REST/customSearch?
filters=filter1=abc&filters=filter2=def&type=IP4Block&options=&start=0&count=10
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
HTTP Body:
•
None.
POST request example
All add operation related API methods use the POST method in REST API. In this example, addEntity will
be used to add a View object.
API call example:
http:///Services/REST/v1/addEntity?parentId=100936
URL path:
•
/addEntity
Parameters:
Parameter
Description
parentId
For configurations, always set the parentId value to 0 (zero), which is the root
element.
entity
The configuration object, including its name, sharedNetwork, and user-defined
fields (entity will be passed in HTTP Body as JSON)
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
38 | Address Manager API Guide
REST API
HTTP Body:
•
JSON containing information for adding a view.
{
"id":0,
"name":"testView",
"type":"View",
"properties":""
}
Response
Returns the character sequence representing the object ID of the new entity.
100936
Passing long[]
long[] parameter will be passed in the HTTP body in an array representation.
API call example:
void mergeBlocksWithParent ( long[] blockIDs)
http:///Services/REST/mergeBlocksWithParent
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
HTTP Body:
[
id1, id2, id3
]
e.g.: [
100922, 100923
]
Response
No response. The method has the void return type.
Passing byte[]
long[] parameter will be passed in the HTTP body.
API call example:
void uploadResponsePolicyItems(long parentId, byte[] policyItemsData)
http:///Services/REST/uploadResponsePolicyItems
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
HTTP Body:
•
Upload file for above listed API’s in REST API client.
Version 8.3.0 | 39
Chapter 3: The Address Manager API
Response
No response. The method has the void return type.
PUT request example
All update related API methods use the PUT method in REST API. In this example,
updateDNSDeploymentRole will be used to update a specified DNS deployment role.
API call example:
http:///Services/REST/updateDNSDeploymentRole
URL path:
•
PUT / updateDNSDeploymentRole
Parameters:
Parameter
Description
role
The DNS deployment role object to be updated. It will be passed in the HTTP
body.
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
HTTP Body:
•
JSON containing the update information of DNS deployment role.
{
"id": 101081,
"entityId": 101041,
"serverInterfaceId": 100908,
"type": "NONE",
"service": "DNS",
"properties": "readOnly=false|nsRecordTTL=86400|inherited=false|"
}
Response
No response. The method has the void return type.
DELETE request example
All delete related API methods use the DELETE method in REST API. In this example,
deleteDHCPClientDeploymentOption will be used to delete a specified DHCP client option.
API call example:
http:///Services/REST/v1/
deleteDHCPClientDeploymentOption?entityId=101226&name=timeoffset&serverId=101217
URL path:
•
DELETE /deleteDHCPClientDeploymentOption
Parameters:
40 | Address Manager API Guide
REST API
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity from which the deployment option will be deleted.
Name
The name of the DHCPv4 client option to be deleted(Constant listed in BAM API
guide)
serverId
The specific server to which this option is deployed. To delete an option that has
not been assigned to a server, set this value to 0 (zero).
HTTP Header:
•
•
Authorization: BAMAuthToken: UTtSjMTQ1ODAzMTgzMDUxMzphcGk=
Content-Type: application/json
Response
No response. The method has the void return type.
Limitations
The current limitations of the REST API implementation are as follows:
•
•
•
•
No API client is available for REST. BlueCat api.jar/API.pm files do not support REST APIs.
Get related APIs with no matching input will return a sparsely populated object.
REST API session timeout can be configured only through server.properties. The Address Manager
server needs to be restarted to reflect the new timeout configuration.
REST API methods that require the body for the API call should be formed correctly by a client. If the
body is formed incorrectly, the server will give you an error.
REST API troubleshooting
Invalid credentials for login
When you use invalid credentials, the login API call will fail with the error code 500 and the following
message will display: "Authentication Error: Ensure that your username and password are correct." You
need to login again with the right credentials.
Invalid or expired token
When a token is invalid or expired, API calls will fail with the error code 401 Unauthorized and the following
message will display: "UNAUTHORIZED USER". You need to generated a new token by logging in again
and use the newly generated token to make subsequent API calls.
Unrecognized field error
If the format of the JSON input request is incorrect, it results in "Unrecognized field" error. For example,
Unrecognized field "parentId" (class
com.bluecatnetworks.proteus.api.service.types.APIEntity), not marked as
ignorable (4
known properties: "type" , "id" , "properties" , "name" ])
Version 8.3.0 | 41
Chapter 4
API Object Methods
Topics:
This chapter lists the methods available in the Address Manager API.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Some of the generic methods include implementation examples in
Java and Perl: the others are either described in pseudocode or are
extended from generic methods through passing field values.
•
•
•
Generic Methods
User-defined Fields
IPAM
DHCP
DNS
Deployment options
TFTP
Servers and Deployment
Crossover High Availability
(xHA)
Address Manager Objects
Migration
Collecting Data
Note: Address Manager API does not validate the userdefined fields with a pre-defined set of values when adding an
object even though the Require Value property of the UDFs is
set.
43
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Generic Methods
Many of the object types listed below use the update(), delete(), and get() methods.
While some objects may have specific get() methods, the generic methods described here are required in
many Address Manager API scripts.
Getting Objects
Generic methods for getting entity values.
•
•
•
•
Get entities by name
Get entities by ID
Get Entities
Get Parent
Get Entity by Name
Returns objects from the database referenced by their name field.
Output / Response
Returns the requested object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByName( long parentId, String name, String type )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The ID of the target object’s parent object.
name
The name of the target object.
type
The type of object returned by the method. This string must be one of the
constants listed in Object Types on page 209.
Get Entity by ID
Returns objects from the database referenced by their database ID and with its properties fields populated.
Output / Response
Returns the requested object from the database with its properties fields populated. For more information
about the available options, refer to IPv4Objects on page 248 in the Property Options Reference section.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityById ( long id )
Parameter
Description
id
The object ID of the target object.
Get Entities
Returns an array of requested child objects for a given parentId value. Some objects returned in the
array may not have their properties field set. For those objects, you will need to call them individually using
the getEntityById() method to populate the properties field.
Note:
44 | Address Manager API Guide
Generic Methods
•
•
Using getEntities() to search users will return all users existing in Address Manager. Use
getLinkedEntities() or linkEntities() to search users under a specific user group.
Using getEntities() to query server objects in configurations containing XHA pairs might
result in a connection timeout if any of the servers in an XHA pair are not reachable.
Output / Response
Returns an array of the requested objects from the database without their properties fields populated, or
returns an empty array.
API call:
APIEntity[] getEntities( long parentId, String type, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the target object’s parent object.
type
The type of object returned. This must be one of the constants listed in Object
Types on page 209.
start
Indicates where in the list of objects to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
Indicates the maximum number of child objects to return.
Get Parent
Returns the parent entity of a given entity.
Output / Response
Returns the APIEntity for the parent entity with its properties fields populated. For more information about
the available options, refer to IPv4Objects on page 248 in the Property Options Reference section.
API call:
APIEntity getParent ( long entityId )
Parameter
Description
long entityId
The entity Id.
Searching and Retrieving Entities
Generic methods for searching and retrieving entities.
•
•
•
•
•
•
Custom Search
Search by Category
Search by Object Types
Get Entities by Name
Get Entities by Name Using Options
Get MAC Address
Supported wildcards in the search string:
You can use the following wildcards when invoking a search method. These wildcards are supported only
in the String parameter:
•
•
•
^—matches the beginning of a string. For example, ^ex matches example but not text.
$—matches the end of string. For example: ple$ matches example but not please.
*—matches zero or more characters within a string. For example: ex*t matches exit and excellent.
Version 8.3.0 | 45
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Note: You cannot use the following characters in the search string:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
, (comma)
‘ (single quotation mark)
( ) (parentheses)
[ ] (square brackets)
{ } (braces)
% (percent)
? (question mark)
+ (addition/plus sign)
Custom Search
Search for an array of entities by specifying object properties.
Output / Response
Returns an array of APIEntities matching the specified object properties or returns an empty array. The
APIEntity will at least contain Object Type, Object ID, Object Name, and Object Properties.
API call:
APIEntity[] customSearch ( String[] filters, String type, String[] options, int start, int count
)
Parameter
Description
filters
The list of properties on which the search will be based. The valid format is Field
name=value. Refer to Supported object types and fields for details.
Note: The field name is case-sensitive.
In addition to the fields that are specified in the table, any user-defined fields will
also be supported.
Note: The valid format for the Date type user-defined field value is
DD-MMM-YYYY. You can also use partial formatting. For example, 10Jan-2016, 10-Jan, Jan-2016 or 2016.
For more information on passing a String array through RESTful API calls, refer
to Passing String[] on page 38.
type
The object type that you wish to search. The type cannot be null or empty string
(""). This must be one for the following object types:
•
•
•
•
•
•
options
IP4Block
IP4Network
IP4Addr
GenericRecord
HostRecord
Any other objects with user-defined fields
The list of search options specifying the search behavior. Reserved for future
use.
For more information on passing a String array through RESTful API calls, refer
to Passing String[] on page 38.
start
46 | Address Manager API Guide
Indicates where in the list of returned objects to start returning objects. The value
must be a non-negative value and cannot be null or empty.
Generic Methods
Parameter
Description
count
The maximum number of objects to return. The value must be a positive value
between 1 and 1000. This value cannot be null or empty.
Supported object types and fields
Object type
Field name=value
IP4Block
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
inheritDNSRestrictions=Boolean
pingBeforeAssign=Boolean
reverseZoneSigned=Boolean
allowDupHost=Boolean
inheritDefaultDomains=Boolean
highwatermark=Integer
lowwatermark=Integer
IP4Network
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
inheritDNSRestrictions=Boolean
pingBeforeAssign=Boolean
reverseZoneSigned=Boolean
allowDupHost=Boolean
inheritDefaultDomains=Boolean
portInfo=Text
highwatermark=Integer
lowwatermark=Integer
IP4Addr
•
•
•
routerPortInfo=Text
portInfo=Text
vlanInfo=Text
GenericRecord
•
•
•
•
comments=Text
ttl=Long
recordType=Text
rdata=Text
HostRecord
•
•
comments=Text
ttl=Long
Java client example
•
If using ProteusAPI_PortType:
//Define filters array
String[] filters = new String[] { "udf_Int=10", "udf_Text=textudfvalue",
"udf_Date=12-Dec-2016", "udf_Boolean=true", "udf_ea=a@a.com",
"udf_url=http://a.com", "udf_long=12354" };
//customSearch API call
APIEntity[] entityArray = service.customSearch( filters,
ObjectTypes.IP4Block, new String[] {}, 0, 1000 );
Version 8.3.0 | 47
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
•
If using ProteusAPI:
//Define filters array
StringArray filters = new StringArray();
//filters.getItem().add( "udf_name=udf_value" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_Int=10" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_Text=textudfvalue" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_Date=12-Dec-2016" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_Boolean=true" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_ea=a@a.com" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_url=http://a.com" );
filters.getItem().add( "udf_long=12354" );
//customSearch API call
APIEntityArray entityArray = service.customSearch( filters,
ObjectTypes.IP4Block, new StringArray(), 0, 1000 );
Search by Category
Returns an array of entities by searching for keywords associated with objects of a specified object
category.
Output / Response
Returns an array of entities matching the keyword text and the category type, or returns an empty array.
API call:
APIEntity[] searchByCategory ( String keyword, String category, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
keyword
The search keyword string. This value cannot be null or empty.
category
The entity category to be searched. This must be one of the entity categories
listed in Entity Categories on page 199.
start
Indicates where in the list of returned objects to start returning objects. The list
begins at an index of 0. This value cannot be null or empty.
count
The maximum number of objects to return. The default value is 10. This value
cannot be null or empty.
Search by Object Types
Returns an array of entities by searching for keywords associated with objects of a specified object type.
You can search for multiple object types with a single method call.
Output / Response
Returns an array of entities matching the keyword text and the category type, or returns an empty array.
API call:
APIEntity[] searchByObjectTypes ( String keyword, String types, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
keyword
The search keyword string. This value cannot be null or empty.
types
The object types for which to search, specified in the following format:
"type1[,type2…]". The object type must be one of the types listed in
Object Types on page 209.
48 | Address Manager API Guide
Generic Methods
Parameter
Description
start
Indicates where in the list of returned objects to start returning objects. The
list begins at an index of 0. This value cannot be null or empty.
count
The maximum number of objects to return. The default value is 10. This
value cannot be null or empty.
Get Entities by Name
Returns an array of entities that match the specified parent, name, and object type.
Output / Response
Returns an array of entities. The array is empty if there are no matching entities.
API call:
APIEntity[] getEntitiesByName ( long parentId, String name, String type, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the entities to be returned.
name
The name of the entity.
types
The type of object to be returned. This value must be one of the object types
listed in Object Types on page 209.
start
Indicates where in the list of returned objects to start returning objects. The list
begins at an index of 0. This value cannot be null or empty.
count
The maximum number of objects to return. The default value is 10. This value
cannot be null or empty.
Get Entities by Name Using Options
Returns an array of entities that match the specified name and object type. Searching behavior can be
changed by using the options.
Output / Response
Returns an array of entities. The array is empty if there are no matching entities.
API call:
APIEntity[] getEntitiesByNameUsingOptions ( long parentId, String name, String type, int
start, int count, String options )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the entities to be returned.
name
The name of the entity.
types
The type of object to be returned. This value must be one of the object types listed
in Object Types on page 209.
start
Indicates where in the list of returned objects to start returning objects. The list
begins at an index of 0. This value cannot be null or empty.
count
The maximum number of objects to return. The default value is 10. This value
cannot be null or empty.
Version 8.3.0 | 49
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
options
A string containing options. Currently the only available option is
ObjectProperties.ignoreCase. By default, the value is set to false. Setting this
option to true will ignore the case-sensitivity used while searching entities by
name.
ObjectProperties.ignoreCase = [true | false]
Get MAC Address
Returns an APIEntity for a MAC address.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the MAC address. Returns an empty APIEntity if the MAC address does not exist.
The property string of the returned entity should include the MAC address:
address=nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn|
If the MAC address is in a MAC pool, the property string includes the MAC pool information:
macPool=macPoolName|
API call:
APIEntity getMACAddress ( long configurationId, String macAddress )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the MAC address is located.
macAddress
The MAC address in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
Updating Objects
Generic methods for updating an object.
Updating an object involves two steps:
1. Building the object or parameter string used to update the object.
2. Performing the update.
Update
Updates entity objects.
API call:
All entity update statements follow this format:
void update ( APIEntity entity )
Parameter
Description
entity
The actual API entity passed as an entire object that has its mutable
values updated.
Modified behavior for User-defined fields in the update() method:
50 | Address Manager API Guide
Generic Methods
•
Removing existing UDF values
Commit the update()method with empty UDF value. If the UDF parameter is set to mandatory, the
method fails as the UDF parameter cannot be empty.
•
Updating UDF values
Commit the update()method with the new UDF value. If you do not want to update the existing
value, leave the UDF parameter and its value unchanged.
•
If the UDF parameter is set to mandatory and has a default value, committing the update() method with
an empty UDF value will take the default value.
Update examples
Provides an example how the update method can be used in Java and Perl.
In this example, an existing shared network is passed to a configuration object as a parameter. After the
values in the object or properties string have been set, the update() method modifies the value in the
Address Manager database. Property values can be a string, long, or integer value. Address Manager uses
the appropriate method to process the data for that property.
Java example
This example uses Java to return a managed server as an APIEntity, get the properties for the server, add
a connected property with the value true, set the properties for the server, and then update the server.
// Get the object, here Server
APIEntity server = service.getEntityByName(config.getId(), serverName,
ObjectTypes.Server);
// Get the current properties & add a new property
EntityProperties props = new EntityProperties(server.getProperties());
props.addProperty(ObjectProperties.connected, "true");
// Set the changed properties on the object & send it to server to update
server.setProperties(props.getPropertiesString());
service.update(server);
Perl example
This example uses Perl to update an external host record.
my $externalHostRecord = $service->getEntityById( SOAP::Data>type( 'long' )->
name( 'id' )->
value( $externalHostRecordId )->
attr({xmlns => ''}) ) ->result;
$externalHostRecord = BAMConnection->blessAPIEntity( "object" =>
$externalHostRecord );
$externalHostRecord->set_name( "external2.host2.com" );
$service->update( SOAP::Data->type( 'APIEntity' )->
name( 'entity' )->
value( $externalHostRecord )-> attr({xmlns => ''}) );
Update with Options
Updates objects requiring a certain behavior that is not covered by the regular update() method. This
method is currently used for CName, MX and SRV records, and the option is only applicable to these
types.
Output / Response
Version 8.3.0 | 51
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
None.
API call:
void updateWithOptions ( APIEntity entity, String options )
Parameter
Description
entity
The actual API entity to be updated.
options
A string containing the update options. Currently, only one option is
supported: linkToExternalHost=boolean|. If true, update will search for
the external host record specified in linkedRecordName even if a host
record with the same exists under the same DNS View. If the external host
record is not present, it will throw an exception. If false, update will search
for the host record specified in linkedRecordName.
Deleting Objects
Generic methods for deleting an object.
There are two generic methods for getting entity values:
•
•
Delete
Delete with Options
Delete
Deletes an object using the generic delete() method.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
Pass the entity ID from the database identifying the object to be deleted.
void delete ( long ObjectId )
Parameter
Description
ObjectId
The ID for the object to be deleted.
Delete with Options
Deletes objects that have options associated with their removal. This method currently works only with the
deletion of dynamic records from the Address Manager database. When deleted, dynamic records present
the option of not dynamically deploying to DNS/DHCP Server.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteWithOptions ( long ObjectId, String options )
Parameter
Description
ObjectId
The ID for the object to be deleted. This must be the object ID of a resource
record.
options
A string containing the following delete options:
52 | Address Manager API Guide
Generic Methods
Parameter
Description
•
•
noServerUpdate—a Boolean value. This applies to the dynamic resource
records. Set to true to update the record only in the Address Manager web
interface. The change will not be deployed to the DNS server. The default
value is false.
deleteOrphanedIPAddresses—a Boolean value. This applies to the delete
operation on Host Records. Set to true to free IP addresses associated with
a host record if no other host records are associated with the IP address. The
default value is false.
Linked Entities
Generic methods for getting, link or unlink entities.
•
•
•
Get Linked Entities
Link Entities
Unlink Entities
Get Linked Entities
Returns an array of entities containing the entities linked to a specified entity. The array is empty if there
are no linked entities.
Output / Response
Returns an array of entities. The array is empty if there are no linked entities.
API call:
APIEntity[] getLinkedEntities ( long entityId, String type, int start, int count)
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity for which to return linked entities.
type
The type of linked entities which need to be returned. This value must be one of
the types listed in Object Types on page 209.
!
Attention:
•
•
While specifying a resource record as the entityId, if you want to find
all the records (CNAME, MX, or SRV records) having links to this
record, you can use RecordWithLink for the type parameter.
When specifying a MAC address as the entityId, this method
returns the IPv4 address associated with the MAC address. When
appropriate, leaseTimeand expiryTimeinformation also appears in
the returned properties string.
start
Indicates where in the list of returned objects to start returning objects. The list
begins at an index of 0. This value cannot be null or empty.
count
The maximum number of objects to return.
Link Entities
Establishes a link between two specified Address Manager entities.
Output / Response
None.
Version 8.3.0 | 53
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
This method works on the following types of objects and links:
Type of entity for entity1Id
Type of entity for entity2Id
Result
Any entity
Tag
Applies the tag linked to the entity.
Tag
Any entity
Applies the entities from the object
tag.
MACPool
MACAddress
Applies the MAC address from the
MAC pool.
MACAddress
MACPool
Applies the MAC pool from the MAC
address.
User
UserGroup
Applies the user group from the user.
UserGroup
User
Applies the user from the user group.
Location
IP or server object
Applies the IP or server object to a
location.
IP or server object
Location
Applies the location to an object.
Server Group
Server
Applies a server to a Server Group
object.
Server
Server Group
Applies a Server Group to a server
object.
API call:
void linkEntities ( long entity1Id, long entity2Id, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entity1Id
The object ID of the first entity in the pair of linked entities.
entity2Id
The object ID of the second entity in the pair of linked entities.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Unlink Entities
Removes the link between two specified Address Manager entities.
Output / Response
None.
This method works on the following types of objects and links:
Type of entity for entity1Id
Type of entity for entity2Id
Result
Any entity
Tag
Removes the tag linked to the entity.
Tag
Any entity
Removes the entities from the object
tag.
MACPool
MACAddress
Removes the MAC address from the
MAC pool.
MACAddress
MACPool
Removes the MAC pool from the
MAC address.
54 | Address Manager API Guide
Generic Methods
Type of entity for entity1Id
Type of entity for entity2Id
Result
User
UserGroup
Removes the user group from the
user.
UserGroup
User
Removes the user from the user
group.
Location
IP or server object
Removes the location from an object.
IP or server object
Location
Removes the location from an object.
Server Group
Server
Applies a server to a Server Group
object.
Server
Server Group
Applies a Server Group to a server
object.
Note: To obtain the object ID of the Deny MAC pool, use the getEntityByName() method.
For example:
entity = service.getEntityByName( , , "DenyMACPool" );
API call:
void unlinkEntities ( long entity1Id, long entity2Id, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entity1Id
The object ID of the first entity in the pair of linked entities.
entity2Id
The object ID of the second entity in the pair of linked entities.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Changing Locale
Address Manager v4.1.1 and greater supports Japanese language in order for API users to update and
view the UDF display name in Japanese.
Log in with Options
Log in as API user. To change the locale to Japanese, use the following method when logging in to the
Address Manager server. Changing Locale only affects the behavior of getUserDefinedFields() and
updateBulkUdf() methods.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void loginWithOptions ( String userName, String password, String options)
Parameter
Description
userName
The username for the API user created using the Address Manager user
interface.
password
The password for the API user logging into Address Manager.
options
Following option can be used:
•
locale=ja-JA
Version 8.3.0 | 55
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
User-defined Fields
Add user-defined fields to any Address Manager object type.
These fields are available on all of the object adding and editing forms. A user-defined field can include
several enforced data types and can be validated against a complex set of criteria. Any reasonable
number of user-defined fields can be added to an object type to track data according to your data schema
requirements.
Setting UDF values when adding or updating
Existing user-defined fields for objects can be set and updated through API calls.
Values for these fields can be set in the properties parameter where they are noted the same as any other
object field. If a value is set or updated for a non-existent user-defined field, an exception is thrown. These
are passed as name-value pairs, and multiple user-defined fields are separated by a |(pipe) character. For
example, to set values of two UDFs: TextUDF and IntegerUDF with values testTextValue and 1005, the
properties string should be passed as: TextUDF=testTextValue|IntegerUDF=1005.
The following examples are the code snippets to add or update zone with the above Scenario:
Java API Examples
Java clients are equipped with a wrapper class EntityPropertieswhich will help in forming the
propertiesStringby specifying various properties forming the name value.
Add in Java
long parentZoneId; //Id of the parent Zone
EntityProperties properties = new EntityProperties();
properties.addProperty("TextUDF", "testTextValue");
properties.addProperty("IntegerUDF", "1005");
String propertyString = properties.getPropertiesString();
long zoneId = service.addZone( parentZoneId, "example.abc.com",
propertyString );
Update in Java
APIEntity zone = service.getEntityById( zoneId );
EntityProperties properties = new EntityProperties(zone.getProperties()); //
Populate with the existing values and then update the only properties which
need to
be modified.
properties.addProperty("TextUDF", "testTextValue");
properties.addProperty("IntegerUDF", "1005");
zone.setProperties(properties.getPropertiesString());
service.update(zone);
Perl API Examples
Perl API example for setting UDF values when adding.
Add in Perl
my $newZoneId = $service->addZone( SOAP::Data->type( 'long' )>name( 'parentId' )->value( $newZoneId )->attr({xmlns => ''}),
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->name( 'absoluteName' )>value( "example.abc.com" )->attr({xmlns => ''}),
56 | Address Manager API Guide
User-defined Fields
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->name( 'properties' )->value(
"TextUDF=testTextValue|IntegerUDF=1005" )->attr({xmlns => ''}) )->result;
Getting User-defined Fields
Get UDFs through API calls.
Get User-defined Field
Returns the user-defined fields information.
Output / Response
Returns the user-defined fields information.
API call:
APIUserDefinedField[] getUserDefinedFields ( String type, boolean requiredFieldsOnly )
Parameter
Description
type
The type of the user-defined fields. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
requiredFieldsOnly
Specifies whether all user-defined fields of the object type will be returned
or not. If set to true, only required fields will be returned.
Update Bulk User-defined Field
Updates values of various UDFs for different objects.
Output / Response
Returns a CSV file containing the following information:
LineNumber
The respective line number in the input CSV file. This appears in the first column in the output CSV file.
FailureMessage
The reason for the failure identified by the system. This appears in the second column in the output
CSV file.
Note: An empty CSV file will be returned when all the rows in the input CSV file were processed
successfully.
API call:
byte[] updateBulkUdf ( byte[] data, String properties )
Parameter
Description
data
The file to be used to update UDFs. The file is passed to Address Manager
as a byte array that is the stream of the CSV file contents. The file must
follow the following pattern:
•
•
•
EntityId - The object ID of the entity on which the UDF needs to be
updated. This must be entered into the first column.
UDFName - The actual name of the UDF that needs to be updated. This
must be entered into the second column.
newUDFValue - The new value of the UDF which needs to be updated
on the entity. This must be entered into the third column.
Note:
Version 8.3.0 | 57
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
•
•
•
•
properties
The file format should be CSV.
The file should not contain any header.
The data should start from the first line.
To include any special characters, users need to escape the
data.
Reserved for future use.
IPAM
The IP core contains information about network structures or allocation blocks and static and dynamic
allocations.
This information is integrated with the DNS core to keep the DNS space current with the IP networks that
it represents. DHCP configuration is modeled on the allocation blocks in the Address Manager IP core and
is kept current by real-time feedback from managed servers. Dynamic DNS changes, such as address
allocations, from Active Directory and other updating systems are sent to Address Manager in real time,
showing administrators that an automated process made a configuration change.
IPv4 Blocks
An IPv4 block is a group of IPv4 addresses that is separated from a larger network by subnetting.
Addresses within a block cannot be routed until they have been allocated into a network. Blocks can be
added and returned by IP range or CIDR notation. You can specify default DNS domains for IPv4 blocks
with the defaultDomains property. To add a single default domain, specify the object ID for the required
domain. To add multiple default domains, specify the object IDs for multiple domains as a comma-delimited
list of domain object IDs.
Add IPv4 Block by CIDR
Adds a new IPv4 Block using CIDR notation.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new IPv4 block.
API call:
long addIP4BlockByCIDR ( long parentId, String CIDR, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the target object’s parent object.
CIDR
The CIDR notation defining the block (for example, 10.10/16).
properties
A string containing options. For more information about the available
options, refer to IPv4Objects on page 248 in the Property Options
Reference section.
Add IPv4 Block by Range
Adds a new IPv4 block defined by an address range.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new IPv4 block.
58 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
API call:
long addIP4BlockByRange ( long parentId, String start, String end, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the target object’s parent object.
start
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the block.
end
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the block.
properties
A string containing options. For more information about the available options,
refer to IPv4Objects on page 248 in the Property Options Reference section.
Add Parent Block
Creates an IPv4 or IPv6 block from a list of IPv4 or IPv6 blocks or networks. All blocks and networks must
have the same parent but it does not need to be contiguous.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new IPv4 or IPv6 parent block. This method does not create a name for the
new block.
API call:
void addParentBlock ( long[] blockOrNetworkIDs )
Parameter
Description
blockOrNetworkIDs
An array containing the object IDs of IPv4 or IPv6 blocks or networks.
Add Parent Block with Properties
Creates an IPv4 or IPv6 block with a name from a list of IPv4 or IPv6 blocks or networks. All blocks and
networks must have the same parent but it does not need to be contiguous.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new IPv4 or IPv6 parent block.
API call:
long addParentBlockWithProperties ( long[] blockOrNetworkIDs, String properties )
Parameter
Description
blockOrNetworkIDs
An array containing the object IDs of IPv4 or IPv6 blocks or networks.
properties
A string containing the following option:
•
name-the name of the new IPv4 or IPv6 block to be created.
Get IP Range by IP Address
Returns the IPv4 Block containing the specified IPv4 address.
Use this method to find the Configuration, IPv4 Block, IPv4 Network, or DHCP Range containing a
specified address. You can specify the type of object to be returned, or you can leave the type of object
empty to find the most direct container for the object.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the object containing the specified address. If no object is found,
returns an empty APIEntity. If ObjectTypes.IP4Block, ObjectTypes.IP4Network, or
Version 8.3.0 | 59
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
ObjectTypes.DHCP4Range is specified as the type parameter, returns an object of the specified type. If
an empty string ("") is specified as the type parameter, returns the most direct container for the IPv4
address.
API call:
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId, String type, String address )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv4 address is located. This can be
a Configuration, IPv4 Block, IPv4 Network, or DHCP Range. When you do not
know the block, network, or range in which the address is located, specify the
configuration.
type
The type of object containing the IPv4 or IPv6 address.
Specify ObjectTypes.IP4Block, ObjectTypes.IP4Network, or
ObjectTypes.DHCP4Range to find the block, network, or range containing the
IPv4 address. Specify an empty string ("") to return the most direct container
for the IPv4 address.
address
An IPv4 address.
Get IPv4 Block by CIDR
Returns an IPv4 Block object by calling the block using CIDR notation.
Output / Response
Returns the specified IPv4 block object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByCIDR ( long parentId, String cidr, String type )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the target object’s parent object.
CIDR
CIDR notation defining the block to be returned (for example, 10.10/16).
type
The type of object returned: IP4Block. This must be one of the constants listed
in Object Types on page 209.
Get IPv4 Block by Range
Returns an IPv4 Block by calling the block using its address range.
Output / Response
Returns the requested IPv4 block object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByRange ( long parentId, String address1, String address2, String type )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the target object’s parent object.
address1
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the block.
address2
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the block.
60 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
type
The type of object returned: IP4Block. This must be one of the constants listed
in Object Types on page 222.
Merge Blocks with Parent
Merges specified IPv4 blocks into a single block. The blocks must all have the same parent and must be
contiguous. Blocks whose parent object is the configuration cannot contain networks.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void mergeBlocksWithParent ( long[] blockIDs )
Parameter
Description
blockIDs
An array containing a list of IPv4 block IDs.
Merge Selected Blocks or Networks
Merges specified IPv4 blocks or IPv4 networks into a single IPv4 block or IPv4 network. The list of objects
to be merged must all be of the same type (for example, all blocks or all networks). The objects must all
have the same parent and must be contiguous.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void mergeSelectedBlocksOrNetworks ( long[] blockOrNetworkIds, long
blockOrNetworkToKeep )
Parameter
Description
blockOrNetworkIds
An array containing a list of IPv4 block or network IDs.
blockOrNetworkToKeep
The ID of the IPv4 block or IPv4 network that will retain its identity after the merge.
Update IPv4 Block
An IPv4 block’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
IPv4 Block Generic Methods
IPv4 blocks can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, see Deleting Objects on page 52.
IPv4 Networks
An IPv4 network is an object that attaches to a router interface that routes directly to individual IP
addresses.
An IPv4 network is therefore a group of IPv4 addresses that can be routed. An IPv4 network always has
a network or a block as its parent object in Address Manager. Networks can be added and returned both
by IP range and CIDR notation. The next available network can also be returned and allocated. You can
Version 8.3.0 | 61
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
specify default DNS domains for IPv4 networks with the defaultDomains property. To add a single default
domain, specify the object ID for the required domain. To add multiple default domains, specify the object
IDs for multiple domains as a comma-delimited list of domain object IDs.
Add IPv4 Network
Adds an IPv4 network using CIDR notation.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new IPv4 network.
API call:
long addIP4Network ( long blockId, String CIDR, String properties )
Parameter
Description
blockId
The object ID of the new network’s parent IPv4 block.
CIDR
The CIDR notation defining the network (for example, 10.10.10/24).
properties
A string containing options. For more information about the available options,
please refer to IPv4Objects on page 264in the Property Options Reference
section.
Get IPv4 Range by IP Address
Returns the IPv4 Network containing the specified IPv4 address.
Use this method to find the Configuration, IPv4 Block, IPv4 Network, or DHCP Range containing a
specified address. You can specify the type of object to be returned, or you can leave the type of object
empty to find the most direct container for the object.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the object containing the specified address. If no object is found, returns an
empty APIEntity. If ObjectTypes.IP4Block, ObjectTypes.IP4Network, or ObjectTypes.DHCP4Range is
specified as the type parameter, returns an object of the specified type. If an empty string is specified as
the type parameter, returns the most direct container for the IPv4 address.
API call:
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId, String type, String address )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv4 address is located. This can be
a Configuration, IPv4 Block, IPv4 Network, or DHCP Range. When you do not
know the block, network, or range in which the address is located, specify the
configuration.
type
The type of object containing the IPv4 address. Specify
ObjectTypes.IP4Block, ObjectTypes.IP4Network, or
ObjectTypes.DHCP4Range to find the block, network, or range containing the
IPv4 address. Specify an empty string to return the most direct container for
the IPv4 address.
address
An IPv4 address.
Get IPv4 Network by CIDR
Returns an IPv4 Network object from the database by calling it using CIDR notation.
62 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Output / Response
Returns the specified IPv4 network object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByCIDR ( long parentId, String cidr, String type )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the network’s parent object.
CIDR
CIDR notation defining the network (for example, 10.10.10/24).
type
The type of object returned: IP4Network. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
Get IPv4 Network by Hint
Returns an array of IPv4 networks found under a given container object. The networks can be filtered by
using ObjectProperties.hint, ObjectProperties.accessRight, and ObjectProperties.overrideType
options.
Output / Response
Returns an array of IPv4 networks based on the input argument without their properties fields populated,
or returns an empty array if containerId is invalid. If no access right option is specified, the View access
level will be used by default.
API call:
APIEntity[] getIP4NetworksByHint ( long containerId, int start, int count, String options )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID for the container object. It can be the object ID of any object in the
parent object hierarchy. The highest parent object is the configuration level
start
Indicates where in the list of objects to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
Indicates the maximum number of child objects that this method will return.
options
A string containing options. The Option names available in the ObjectProperties
are ObjectProperties.hint, ObjectProperties.accessRight, and
ObjectProperties.overrideType. Multiple options can be separated by a |
(pipe) character. For example:
hint=ab|overrideType=HostRecord|accessRight=ADD
The values for the ObjectProperties.hint option can be the prefix of the IP
address for a network or the name of a network.
•
Example 1
The following example will match networks that have the network ID starting
with 192.168. For example, 192.168.0.0/24 or 192.168.1.0/24.
String options = ObjectProperties.hint + “=198.168|”
•
Example 2
Version 8.3.0 | 63
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
The following example will match networks that have a name starting with
“abc”. For example, “abc”, “abc123” or “abcdef”.
String options = ObjectProperties.hint + “=abc|”
Note: Matching networks to a network ID (Example 1) will take
precedence over matching networks to a name (Example 2).
The values for the ObjectProperties.accessRight and
ObjectProperties.overrideType options must be one of the constants listed
in Access Right Values on page 189 and Object Types on page 209. For
example:
String options = ObjectProperties.accessRight + "=" +
AccessRightValues.AddAccess +
"|"+ ObjectProperties.overrideType + "=" +
ObjectTypes.HostRecord;
Get IPv4 Network by Range
Returns an IPv4 Network object from the database by calling it using its address range.
Output / Response
Returns the specified IPv4 network object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByRange ( long parentId, String address1, String address2, String type )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the network’s parent object.
address1
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the network.
address2
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the network.
type
The type of object returned: IP4Network. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
Get Next Available Network
returns the object ID for the next available (unused) network within a configuration or block.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the existing next available IPv4 network or, if the next available network did not
exist and autoCreate was set to true, the newly created IPv4 network.
API call:
long getNextAvailableIP4Network ( long parentId, long size, boolean isLargerAllowed,
boolean autoCreate )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the network’s parent object.
size
The size of the network, expressed as a power of 2.
64 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
isLargerAllowed
This Boolean value indicates whether to return larger networks than those
specified with the size parameter.
autoCreate
This Boolean value indicates whether the next available network should be
created if it does not exist.
Get Next Available IP Range
Returns the object ID for the next available (unused) block or network within a configuration or block.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the existing next available IPv4 range or, if the next available IP range does not
exist and autoCreate was set to true, the newly created IPv4 range.
API call:
APIEntity getNextAvailableIPRange ( long parentId, long size, String type, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object under which the next available range resides
(Configuration or Block).
size
The size of the range, expressed as a power of 2.
type
The type of the range object to be fetched. Currently IPv4 block and network are
supported.
properties
The string containing the following properties and values:
•
•
•
•
reuseExisting—True or False. This Boolean value indicates whether to
search existing empty networks to find the available IP range of specified
size.
isLargerAllowed—True or False. This Boolean value indicates whether to
return larger networks than those specified with the sizeparameter.
autoCreate—True or False. This Boolean value indicates whether the next
available IP range should be created in the parent object if it does not exist.
traversalMethod—This parameter identifies the appropriate search
algorithm to find the suitable object. The possible values are:
•
•
•
TraversalMethodology.NO_TRAVERSAL (NO_TRAVERSAL)—will
attempt to find the next range directly under the specified parent object. It
will not search through to the lower level objects.
TraversalMethodology.DEPTH_FIRST (DEPTH_FIRST)—will attempt
to find the next range under the specified object by iteratively through
its children one by one. After exploring the object recursively for its child
ranges, it will move to the next child object.
TraversalMethodology.BREADTH_FIRST (BREADTH_FIRST)—will
attempt to find the next range under the specified object by iterative
levels. It will first find the range immediately below the specified parent
object. If not found, then it will attempt to find the range under all the first
child objects.
Get Next Available IP Ranges
Returns the object IDs for the next available (unused) blocks or networks within a configuration or block.
Version 8.3.0 | 65
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Output / Response
Returns consecutive matching IPv4 range object IDs. If the next available ranges do not exist and you
have set the autoCreate property to true, new IPv4 ranges will be created and their object IDs will be
returned.
API call:
APIEntity[] getNextAvailableIPRanges ( long parentId, long size, String type, int count, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object under which the next available range resides
(Configuration or Block).
size
The size of the range, expressed as a power of 2.
type
The type of the range object to be fetched. Currently only IPv4 network is supported.
count
The number of networks to be found.
Note: If the number of networks count is greater than 1:
•
•
properties
isLargerAllowed and traversalMethod properties will not be applicable.
The DEPTH_FIRST methodology will be used to search objects.
The string containing the following properties and values:
•
•
•
•
reuseExisting—True or False. This Boolean value indicates whether to search
existing empty networks to find the available IP range of specified size.
isLargerAllowed—True or False. This Boolean value indicates whether to return
larger networks than those specified with the sizeparameter.
autoCreate—True or False. This Boolean value indicates whether the next
available IP range should be created in the parent object if it does not exist.
traversalMethod—This parameter identifies the appropriate search algorithm to
find the suitable object. The possible values are:
•
•
•
TraversalMethodology.NO_TRAVERSAL (NO_TRAVERSAL)—will attempt
to find the next range directly under the specified parent object. It will not
search through to the lower level objects.
TraversalMethodology.DEPTH_FIRST (DEPTH_FIRST)—will attempt to find
the next range under the specified object by iteratively through its children one
by one. After exploring the object recursively for its child ranges, it will move to
the next child object.
TraversalMethodology.BREADTH_FIRST (BREADTH_FIRST)—will attempt
to find the next range under the specified object by iterative levels. It will first
find the range immediately below the specified parent object. If not found, then
it will attempt to find the range under all the first child objects.
Split IPv4 Network
Splits an IPv4 network into the specified number of networks.
Output / Response
Returns an array of networks created after splitting the network.
API call:
APIEntity[] splitIP4Network ( long networkId, int numberOfParts, String options )
66 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
networkId
The database object ID of the network that is being split.
numberOfParts
The number of the networks into which the network will be split. Valid values are
2 to the power of 2 up to 1024.
options
A string containing the following options:
•
•
•
•
assignDefaultGateway—a Boolean value. If set to true, a gateway will be
created by using the default gateway value which is the first IP address in
the network. If set to false, no gateway will be created. The default value is
true.
overwriteConflicts—a Boolean value. If set to true, any conflicts within the
split IPv4 network will be removed. The default value is false.
template—a network template ID. The default value is 0 which means no
network template will be used. Specify a network template ID if you wish to
apply one.
preserveGateway—a Boolean value. If set to true, the gateway in the
original network will be preserved. The default value is true.
Update IPv4 Network
An IPv4 network’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
IPv4 Network Generic Methods
IPv4 networks can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, see Deleting Objects on page 52.
IPv4 Network Templates
IPv4 network templates allow you to create standard settings that can be applied when you create new
networks.
Whenever you change template settings, all networks based on the template are updated accordingly. Use
network templates to standardize address assignments and DHCP options.
Address Manager API v4.0 and greater includes the following changes to IPv4 network templates when
performing Add, Update and Get operations for IPv4 Network Templates through API:
•
•
The pipe (|) separator in the sub-type value has been replaced with commas (,).
If the name properties contains commas (,) or back-slashes (\), it needs to be escaped with backward
slash (\).
Add IPv4 Network Template
Add an IPv4 network template to the specified configuration.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new IPv4 network template.
API call:
long addIP4NetworkTemplate ( long configurationId, String name, String properties )
Version 8.3.0 | 67
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the IPv4 template is located.
name
The name of the IPv4 network template. This value cannot be empty or null.
properties
A string defining the IPv4 network template properties.
For example, gateway=[gateway_offset]|
reservedAddresses={type,offset,size,dirction,name}. Refer to
the Properties lists table.
Properties lists
Property
Value
gateway_offset
This is to specify which address to assign an IPv4 gateway. When there is a
negative sign in front of the gateway offset, then the gateway is at the end of the
th
range. For example, if the value of gateway offset is -n, the n IP address from
the end of range will be the gateway.
type
Can be either RESERVED_BLOCK or RESERVED_DHCP_RANGE.
offset
This is to specify from which address to start to assign IPv4 addresses.
size
The size of the network.
direction
Can be either FROM_START or FROM_END.
name
The name of the network.
Assign or Update Template
Assigns, updates, or removes DNS zone and IPv4 network templates.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void assignOrUpdateTemplate ( long entityId, long templateId, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the IPv4 network to which the network template is to be
assigned or updated, or the object ID of the zone to which the zone template is
to be assigned or updated.
templateId
The object ID of the DNS zone template or IPv4 network template. To remove a
template, set this value to 0 (zero).
properties
A string containing the following settings:
•
ObjectProperties.templateType - Specifies the type of template
on which this operation is being performed. This is mandatory. The
possible values are ObjectProperties.IP4NetworkTemplateType
(Assigning or updating IP4NetworkTemplate on an IP4Network) and
ObjectProperties.zoneTemplateType (Assigning or updating zoneTemplate
on a DNS zone).
Along with ObjectProperties.templateType, you can also specify the reapply
mode for various properties of the template.
68 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
For Network template, the following additional parameters can also be
specified:
•
•
•
•
•
ObjectProperties.gatewayReapplyMode
ObjectProperties.reservedAddressesReapplyMode
ObjectProperties.dhcpRangesReapplyMode
ObjectProperties.ipGroupsReapplyMode
ObjectProperties.optionsReapplyMode
For Zone Template, the following additional parameter can also be specified:
•
ObjectProperties.zoneTemplateReapplyMode
The possible values for re-apply mode properties are:
•
•
•
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeIgnore
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeOverwrite
If the re-apply mode is not specified in the properties, the default
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeIgnore mode is used.
Note: If you are not using Java or Perl, refer to Object Properties on
page 201 for the actual values.
Java client example
EntityProperties ntProp = new EntityProperties();
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.templateType,
ObjectProperties.IP4NetworkTemplateType );
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.gatewayReapplyMode,
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate );
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.reservedAddressesReapplyMode,
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate );
service.assignOrUpdateTemplate( ip4N20_26Id, networkTemplateId,
ntProp.getPropertiesString() );
Perl client example
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->name( 'properties' )->
value( ObjectProperties::templateType."=".ObjectProperties::
IP4NetworkTemplateType."|".
ObjectProperties:: gatewayReapplyMode."=".ObjectProperties::
templateReapplyModeUpdate."|" )
->attr({xmlns => ''}) )->result;
Re-apply Template
Reapplies IPv4 network templates. The template must already be applied to an object before you can reapply or remove it.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void reapplyTemplate ( long templateId,String properties )
Version 8.3.0 | 69
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
templateId
The object ID of the IPv4 network template or DNS zone template to be
assigned or updated.
properties
A string containing the following settings:
•
•
•
•
The properties value must include ObjectProperties.templateType
with the value of ObjectProperties.IP4NetworkTemplateType or
ObjectProperties.zoneTemplateType.
To re-apply the network gateway in a IPv4 network template, include
ObjectProperties.gatewayReapplyMode. This is optional.
If the re-apply mode is not specified in the properties, the default
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeIgnore mode is used.
The available re-apply modes include:
•
•
•
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeIgnore
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeOverwrite
Note:
•
•
•
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeOverwrite is
not applicable for Gateway and Reserved Addresses. Use
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate instead to
update.
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate is not applicable
for Reserved DHCP Ranges, IP Groups and Zone Templates. Use
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeOverwrite instead to
update.
Both ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate and
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeOverwrite are applicable
for Deployment Options.
Java client example
EntityProperties ntProp = new EntityProperties();
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.templateType,
ObjectProperties.IP4NetworkTemplateType );
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.gatewayReapplyMode,
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate );
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.reservedAddressesReapplyMode,
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate );
service.reapplyTemplate( networkTemplateId3, ntProp.getPropertiesString() );
Perl client example
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->name( 'properties' )->
value( ObjectProperties::templateType."=".ObjectProperties::
IP4NetworkTemplateType."|".
ObjectProperties:: gatewayReapplyMode."=".ObjectProperties::
templateReapplyModeUpdate."|" )
->attr({xmlns => ''}) )->result;
Update IPv4 Network Template Name
An IPv4 network template’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
70 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
IPv4 Network Template Generic Methods
IPv4 network templates use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
IPv4 addresses
An address is the actual IP address leased or assigned to a member of a network.
IPv4 addresses need to be assigned a particular allocation rather than simply be added. The address
allocation can be checked, along with any host records that are dependent on it. The next available
address can also be returned. Only addresses within an existing network can be assigned.
Assign IPv4 Address
Assigns a MAC address and other properties to an IPv4 address.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the newly assigned IPv4 address.
API call:
long assignIP4Address ( long configurationId, String ip4Address, String macAddress, String hostInfo,
String action, String properties)
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the IPv4 address is located.
ip4Address
The IPv4 address.
macAddress
The MAC address to assign to the IPv4 address. The MAC address can
be specified in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
hostInfo
A string containing host information for the address in the following format:
hostname,viewId,reverseFlag,sameAsZoneFlag[,
hostname,viewId,reverseFlag,sameAsZoneFlag,...]
Where:
•
•
•
•
hostname - The Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for the host record to
be added.
viewId - The object ID of the view under which this host should be created.
reverseFlag - The flag indicating if a reverse record should be created. The
possible values are true or false.
sameAsZoneFlag - The flag indicating if record should be created as same
as zone record. The possible values are true or false.
The comma-separated parameters may be repeated in the order shown above.
The string must not end with a comma.
action
This parameter must be set to one of the constants shown in IP Assignment
Action Values on page 201.
properties
A string containing the following property, including user-defined fields:
Version 8.3.0 | 71
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
•
ptrs—a string containing the list of unmanaged external host records to be
associated with the IPv4 address in the following format:
viewId,exHostFQDN[, viewId,exHostFQDN,...]
You can assign External Host records to an IPv4 address using the following
method:
EntityProperties props = new EntityProperties();
props.addProperty( ObjectProperties.ptrs,
"123,exHostFQDN.com,456,exHostFQDN.net" )
long addressId =
service.assignIP4Address( configurationId,
IPv4Address, macAddressStr, hostInfo,
IPAssignmentActionValues.MAKE_STATIC,
props.getPropertiesString() );
•
•
name—name of the IPv4 address.
locationCode—the hierarchical location code consists of a set of 1 to 3
alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two characters indicate
a country, followed by next three characters which indicate a city in UN/
LOCODE. New custom locations created under a UN/LOCODE city are
appended to the end of the hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates:
CA= Canada TOR=Toronto OF1=Office 1.
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER CASE letters.
The country code and child location code should be alphanumeric
strings.
Assign Next Available IPv4 Address
Assigns a MAC address and other properties to the next available and unallocated IPv4 address within a
configuration, block, or network.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the newly assigned IPv4 address.
API call:
APIEntity assignNextAvailableIP4Address ( long configurationId, long parentId, String
macAddress, String hostInfo, String action, String properties)
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the IPv4 address is located.
parentId
The object ID of the configuration, block, or network in which to look for the next
available address.
macAddress
The MAC address to assign to the IPv4 address. The MAC address can
be specified in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
hostInfo
A string containing host information for the address in the following format:
hostname,viewId,reverseFlag,sameAsZoneFlag[,
hostname,viewId,reverseFlag,sameAsZoneFlag,...]
Where:
72 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
•
•
•
•
hostname - The Fully Qualified Domain Name (FQDN) for the host record to
be added.
viewId - The object ID of the view under which this host should be created.
reverseFlag - The flag indicating if a reverse record should be created. The
possible values are true or false.
sameAsZoneFlag - The flag indicating if record should be created as same
as zone record. The possible values are true or false.
The comma-separated parameters may be repeated in the order shown above.
The string must not end with a comma.
action
This parameter must be set to one of the constants shown in IP Assignment
Action Values on page 201.
properties
A string containing the following property, including user-defined fields:
•
ptrs—a string containing the list of unmanaged external host records to be
associated with the IPv4 address in the following format:
viewId,exHostFQDN[, viewId,exHostFQDN,...]
You can assign External Host records to an IPv4 address using the following
method:
EntityProperties props = new EntityProperties();
props.addProperty( ObjectProperties.ptrs,
"123,exHostFQDN.com,456,exHostFQDN.net" )
long addressId =
service.assignIP4Address( configurationId,
IPv4Address, macAddressStr, hostInfo,
IPAssignmentActionValues.MAKE_STATIC,
props.getPropertiesString() );
•
•
name—name of the IPv4 address.
locationCode—the hierarchical location code consists of a set of 1 to 3
alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two characters indicate
a country, followed by next three characters which indicate a city in UN/
LOCODE. New custom locations created under a UN/LOCODE city are
appended to the end of the hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates
CA= Canada TOR=Toronto OF1=Office 1.
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER CASE letters.
The county code and child location code should be alphanumeric
strings.
skip—This is optional. Use to specify the IP address ranges or IP addresses
to skip. You can specify multiple IP addresses separated by comma. To
specify the range between the start and end addresses, use a hyphen (-). For
example, skip=192.0.2.128-192.0.2.222,192.0.2.223.
offset—This is optional. Use to specify from which address to start to assign
IPv4 address. For example, offset=192.0.2.100.
excludeDHCPRange—true or false. To specify whether IP addresses in
DHCP ranges should be excluded from assignment. The default value is false.
For example, offset=192.0.2.100|excludeDHCPRange=true.
•
•
•
Get IPv4 Address
Returns the details for the requested IPv4 address object.
Version 8.3.0 | 73
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Output / Response
Returns the requested IPv4 Address object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getIP4Address ( long containerId, String address)
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID for the configuration, block, network, or DHCP range in which this
address is located.
address
The IPv4 address.
Get Next IPv4 Address
Returns the next available IP addresses in octet notation under specified circumstances.
Output / Response
Returns the IPv4 address in octet notation.
API call:
String getNextIP4Address ( long parentId, String properties)
Parameter
Description
parentId
The network or configuration Id.
properties
The property string contains three properties; skip, offset and
excludeDHCPRange. The values for skip and offset must be IPv4 addresses
and must appear in dotted octet notation.
•
skip - This is optional. It is used to specify the IP address ranges or IP
addresses to skip, separated by comma. A hyphen(-), not a dash is used to
separate the start and end addresses.
Note: Do not use the skip property if the parentId is a configuration
Id. If you do, an error message appears, ‘Skip is not allowed
for configuration level’.
offset - This is optional. This is to specify from which address to start to
assign IPv4 Address.
excludeDHCPRange - This specifies whether IP addresses in DHCP ranges
should be excluded from assignment. The value is either true or false,
default value is false.
•
•
skip=10.10.10.128-10.10.11.200,10.10.11.210|
offset=10.10.10.100|excludeDHCPRange=true|
Check Allocation for IPv4 Address
Returns the allocation information for an IPv4 DHCP allocated address.
Output / Response
Returns a Boolean value indicating whether the address is allocated.
API call:
boolean isAddressAllocated ( long configurationId, String ipAddress, String macAddress )
74 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID for the configuration in which the IPv4 DHCP allocated address is
located.
ipAddress
The IPv4 DHCP allocated address.
macAddress
The MAC address associated with the IPv4 DHCP allocated address. The MAC
address can be specified in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn
or nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
Get Next Available Address
Returns the IPv4 address for the next available (unallocated) address within a configuration, block, or
network.
Output / Response
Returns the next available IPv4 address in an existing network as a string.
API call:
String getNextAvailableIP4Address ( long parentId )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID for configuration, block, or network in which to look for the next
available address.
Update IPv4 Address
An IPv4 address’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
IPv4 Address Generic Methods
IPv4 addresses can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, see Deleting Objects on page 52.
Change IPv4 Address State
Converts the state of an address from and between Reserved, DHCP Reserved, and Static, or DHCP
Allocated to DHCP Reserved.
Output / Response
Converts an IP address from its current state to a target state; statically assigned, DHCP reserved,
or logically reserved (non-DHCP). For example, this method can convert an IP address from a logical
reservation to a static assignment or vise versa.
API call:
void changeStateIP4Address ( long addressId, String targetState, String macAddress )
Parameter
Description
addressId
The database ID of the address object.
targetState
One of MAKE_STATIC, MAKE_RESERVED, MAKE_DHCP_RESERVED. All of
these constants are defined in the Java Class IPAssignmentActionValues or in
the API.pm file for Perl.
Version 8.3.0 | 75
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
macAddress
Optional and only needed, if the target requires it. (e.g.
MAKE_DHCP_RESERVED)
Additional IP Addresses
Add multiple IPv4 addresses to the Services interface or loopback address for DNS services.
Multiple DNS service addresses provide flexibility and centralized control when consolidating old DNS
servers into one single server without disrupting any configurations that might be using the old IP
addresses.
Note:
•
•
!
You can configure a maximum of 400 IP addresses per DNS/DHCP Server appliance or VM,
including IPv4, IPv6, IPv6 link-local addresses, and loopback addresses.
IP addresses that you are adding must be unique and must not conflict with other IP addresses
used by the server.
Attention: VLAN interfaces are not currently supported by the following API methods:
•
•
•
void addAdditionalIPAddresses()
void removeAdditionalIPAddresses()
String getAdditionalIPAddresses()
Add Additional IP Addresses
Adds additional IPv4 addresses and loopback addresses to the Services interface for DNS service.
Output / Response
None.
!
Attention: This method does not support VLAN interfaces.
API call:
void addAdditionalIPAddresses ( long serverId, String ipsToAdd, String properties )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The database object ID of the server to which additional services IP address will
be added.
ipsToAdd
The list of IP addresses to be added. You can specify multiple IP addresses
with a separator (|). The supported format is [IP,serviceType|
IP,serviceType]. For example, 10.0.0.10/32,loopback|11.0.0.3/24,service|
12.0.0.3,loopback.
properties
Adds object properties. Currently there is no supported properties. Reserved for
future use.
Remove Additional IP Addresses
Removes additional IPv4 addresses and loopback addresses from the Services interface.
Output / Response
None.
!
Attention: This method does not support VLAN interfaces.
76 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
API call:
void removeAdditionalIPAddresses ( long serverId, String ipsToRemove, String properties )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The database object ID of the server from which additional services IP addresses
need to be removed.
ipsToRemove
The list of IP addresses to be removed. You can specify multiple IP
addresses with a separator (|). The supported format is [IP,serviceType|
IP,serviceType]. For example, 10.0.0.10/32,loopback|11.0.0.3/24,service|
12.0.0.3,loopback.
properties
Adds object properties. Currently there is no supported properties. Reserved for
future use.
Get Additional IP Addresses
Returns IPv4 addresses and loopback addresses added to the Service interface for DNS services.
Output / Response
Returns the list of additional IP addresses configured on the server in the following format:
[IP,serviceType|IP,serviceType]. For example, 10.0.0.10/32,loopback|11.0.0.3/24,service|12.0.0.3/
32,loopback.
!
Attention: This method does not support VLAN interfaces.
API call:
String getAdditionalIPAddresses ( long adonisID, String properties )
Parameter
Description
adonisID
The database object ID of the server on which additional services IP address
have been added.
properties
The supported property is:
•
serviceType—type of service for which a list of IP addresses will be
retrieved. Available types are AdditionalIPServiceType.SERVICE and
AdditionalIPServiceType.LOOPBACK. If serviceType is not provided, all
additional IP addresses of the services interface will be returned.
IPv4 Group
IP grouping dedicates a set of IP addresses to a certain group in order to limit a user’s accessibility to
these IP addresses, depending on the user’s access rights.
IP grouping helps you better manage IP addresses and troubleshoot easily when you have issues with IP
addresses. You can define the range of IP addresses and grant access rights to a certain user or a group.
The specified user or group can only access the IP addresses defined in the IP group and manipulate
as needed. This feature is especially useful when there are multiple IP networks with large number of
addresses. You can group the IP addresses based on user, department, or tasks.
Add IPv4 IP Group by Range
Adds an IPv4 IP group by range bounds; start address and end address.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new IPv4 IP group range.
Version 8.3.0 | 77
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
API call:
long addIP4IPGroupByRange ( long parentId, String name, String start, String end, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID for the network in which this IP group is located.
name
The name of the IP group.
start
A start IP address of the IP group range.
end
An end IP address of the IP group range.
properties
Addes object properties, including the user-defined fields.
Add IPv4 IP Group by Size
Adds an IPv4 IP group by size.
Output / Response
returns the object ID for the new IPv4 IP group range.
API call:
long addIP4IPGroupBySize ( long parentId, String name, int size, String positionRangeBy, String
positionValue, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID for the network in which this IP group is located.
name
The name of the IP group.
size
The number of addresses in the IP group.
positionRangeBy
A string specifying the position of the IP group range in the parent network. The
value must be one of the constants listed in PositionRangeBy on page 225. This
is optional. If specified, positionValue must be provided.
positionValue
The offset value when using positionRangeBy.START_OFFSET or
positionRangeBy.END_OFFSET. The start address of the IP group in the
network when using positionRangeBy.START_ADDRESS. This is required only
if positionRangeBy is specified.
properties
Adds object properties, including the user-defined fields.
IPv4 Objects
IPv4 objects include blocks, networks, DHCP ranges, templates, addresses and reconciliation policy.
Move IPv4 Object (deprecated)
Moves an IPv4 block, an IPv4 network, or an IPv4 address to a new IPv4 address.
Output / Response
None.
!
Attention: This method is deprecated in favor or the more extensive Move IP Object method. Use
moveIPObject() instead.
Note: The block or network being moved must fit fully within the new parent object and must also
not overlap its sibling objects. A network object cannot be moved directly beneath a configuration
as it must be a child of a block object.
78 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
API call:
void moveIP4Object ( long objectId, String address )
Parameter
Description
objectId
The object ID of the IPv4 block, network, or IP address to be moved.
address
The new address for the IPv4 block, network, or IP address.
Move IP Object
Moves an IPv4 block, IPv4 network, IPv4 address, IPv6 block or IPv6 network to a new IPv4 or IPv6
address.
Output / Response
None.
Note: This method is a more extensive version of the Move IPv4 Object method that this method
replaces. Use this method to move various supported IP objects.
API call:
void moveIPObject ( long objectId, String address, String options )
Parameter
Description
objectId
The ID of the object to be moved. Currently IPv4 blocks, IPv4 networks, IPv4
addresses, IPv6 blocks and IPv6 networks are supported.
address
The new address for the object.
options
A string containing the noServerUpdate option.
•
noServerUpdate - A boolean value. If set to true, instant dynamic host record
changes will not be performed on DNS/DHCP Servers when moving an IPv4
address object.
Note: noServerUpdate works only for an IPv4 address object.
Resize Range
Changes the size of an IPv4 block, IPv4 network, DHCPv4 range, IPv6 block or IPv6 network.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void resizeRange ( long objectId, String range, String options )
Parameter
Description
objectId
The ID of the object to be resized. Currently IPv4 block, IPv4 network, DHCPv4
range, IPv6 Block and IPv6 Network are supported.
range
The new size for the object to be resized.
For the IPv4 block, IPv4 network or DHCPv4 range, specify the size in CIDR
notation or as an address range in the ipAddressStart-ipAddressEnd format.
For the IPv6 block or IPv6 network, specify the size in Starting address/Size
format.
Version 8.3.0 | 79
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
options
A string containing the following options:
•
ObjectProperties.convertOrphanedIPAddressesTo
Note: This option applies only to DHCPv4 range.
The possible values are:
•
•
•
STATIC
DHCP_RESERVED
UNALLOCATED
For example:
service.resizeRange( ,
<"ipAddressStart-ipAddressEnd">,
"convertOrphanedIPAddressesTo=" );
•
•
•
If the value is an empty string (""), the default is DHCP_RESERVED.
If the option value is incorrect, an exception will be thrown.
If the option name is incorrect, the option will be ignored. Therefore,
orphaned IP addresses will remain as assigned.
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation
IPv4 address discovery and reconciliation service in Address Manager discovers IPv4 addresses on your
network.
Using a specifically defined discovery engine in the policy, you can explore your network from one or
multiple routers and layer 3 switches for a host's IPv4 addresses, hardware addresses, interfaces,
VLAN and port information, and their DNS host names if DNS is available. The discovered results of a
reconciliation policy are stored in a JSON file in the Address Manager file system and then read by the
reconciliation service to compare the result with the existing IPv4 addresses in Address Manager.
After running IPv4 reconciliation policies, JSON files that contain discovered results are kept in the Address
Manager file system until the API method is run again. You can use the following API methods to access
this discovery result in the JSON files:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Get Discovered Devices on page 83
Get Discovered Device on page 83
Get Discovered Device Interfaces on page 83
Get Discovered Device Networks on page 83
Get Discovered Device Hosts on page 84
Get Discovered Device Vlans on page 84
Get Discovered Device ARP Entries on page 84
Get Discovered Device MAC Address Entries on page 85
Add IPv4 Reconciliation Policy
Adds an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Adds an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
API call:
long addIP4ReconciliationPolicy ( long parentId, string name, string properties )
80 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent network of the policy. You can create IPv4
reconciliation policies at the configuration, IPv4 block or IPv4 network levels.
name
The name of the policy.
properties
A string containing properties and values listed in List of properties and values.
List of properties and values
discoveryType
A type of discovery method to use for the network discovery
operation. This must be one of the constants listed in IP
Discovery Type on page 201.
seedRouterAddress
IPv4 address. This is not the Default Gateway Address.
snmpVersion
Constants defined in SNMP Version. This must be one of the
constants listed in SNMP Version on page 213.
snmpPortNumber
An integer greater than 0.
snmpCommunityString
Strings separated by comma (,). For example,
community10,community12,community13.
securityLevel
This must be one of the constants listed in SNMP Security
Levels on page 214.
context
A string. This is required only when snmpVersion is v3.
authenticationType
Constants defined in SNMP Authentication Type. This must
be one of the constants listed in SNMP Authentication Type
on page 214. This is required only when securityLevel is
AUTH_NOPRIV or AUTH_PRIV.
authPassphrase
A string. This is required only when securityLevel is
AUTH_NOPRIV or AUTH_PRIV.
privacyType
A string containing the privacy encryption types. This must be
one of the constants listed in SNMP Privacy Type on page
214. This is required only when securityLevel is AUTH_PRIV.
privacyPassphrase
A string containing the privacy authentication password. This is
required only when securityLevel is AUTH_PRIV.
networkBoundaries
IPv4 ranges separated by comma(,). CIDR and IPv4 range
formats are supported. For example, 10.0/8,13.0.0.1-13.0.0.126.
blackHoleVlan
VLAN ID for the black hole VLAN. This is used as a default
VLAN for all unused ports.
trunkDefaultVlan
Unused VLAN ID to be assigned to a trunk as a native/default
VLAN to protect controlled traffic from being spoofed.
skipFqdn
True or false. This is used to determine whether Address
Manager discovery engine to perform FQDN resolution and
DNS lookups against any DNS server.
dnsServers
One or more IPv4 or IPv6 address separated by comma (,). This
is used to perform FQDN and DNS reverse lookups.
enableLayer2Discovery
True or false.
Version 8.3.0 | 81
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
schedule
Schedule settings:
•
•
•
•
•
Format: hh:mma,dd MMM yyyy, frequencyType
frequency: frequencyPeriod
frequencyType: EVERY or ONCE
frequency: an integer greater than 0
frequencyPeriod: constant defined in TimeUnits which
includes [MINUTES|HOURS|DAYS]
For example, 03:37am,31 May 2011,EVERY,6,Days
activeStatus
True or false.
acceptanceCriteriaReclaim
Used to enable automated acceptance.
acceptanceCriteriaReclaim, acceptanceCriteriaUnknown,
acceptanceCriteriaMismatch and view should be used together
as a complete configuration.
•
•
•
•
Format: timeValue, timeUnit, actionType
timeValue: a integer greater than 0
timeUnit: constant defined in timeUnits which includes
[MINUTES|HOURS|DAYS]
actionType: constant defined in AcceptanceActionType
which includes [RECONCILE, NOACTION]
For example, 10,MINUTES,RECONCILE
acceptanceCriteriaUnknown
Used to enable automated acceptance.
•
•
•
•
Format: timeValue, timeUnit, actionType
timeValue: a integer greater than 0
timeUnit: constant defined in timeUnits which includes
[MINUTES|HOURS|DAYS]
actionType: constant defined in AcceptanceActionType
which includes [RECONCILE, NOACTION]
For example, 20,HOURS,NOACTION
acceptanceCriteriaMismatch
Used to enable automated acceptance.
•
•
•
•
Format: timeValue, timeUnit,actionType
timeValue: a integer greater than 0
timeUnit: constant defined in timeUnits which includes
[MINUTES|HOURS|DAYS]
actionType: constant defined in AcceptanceActionType
which includes [RECONCILE, NOACTION]
For example, 30,MINUTES,RECONCILE
view
This is used if a user wants to enable the automated acceptance
for an existing view’s name.
overrideList
IPv4 ranges separated by comma(,). CIDR and
IP4 range formats are supported. For example,
10/16,172/16,172.25.0.2-172.25.0.18.
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation Generic Methods
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation use the generic get(), update() and delete() methods for entities.
82 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
For more information, refer to Getting Objects on page 44, Updating Objects on page 50 and
Deleting Objects on page 52.
Get Discovered Devices
Returns a list of discovered Layer 2 or Layer 3 devices by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy specified.
Output / Response
Returns an array of discovered Layer 2 or Layer 3 devices.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDevices ( long policyId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Get Discovered Device
Returns the object ID of the discovered device by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the discovered device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity getDiscoveredDevice ( long policyId, long deviceId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
Get Discovered Device Interfaces
Returns all interfaces of a specific device discovered by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Returns all interfaces of a specific device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDeviceInterfaces ( long policyId, long deviceId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
Get Discovered Device Networks
Returns all networks of a specific device discovered by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Version 8.3.0 | 83
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Returns all networks of a specific device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDeviceNetworks ( long policyId, long deviceId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
Get Discovered Device Hosts
Returns all hosts of a specific device discovered by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Returns all hosts of a specific device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDeviceHosts ( long policyId, long deviceId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
Get Discovered Device Vlans
Returns all Vlans of a specific device discovered by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Returns all Vlans of a specific device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDeviceVlans ( long policyId, long deviceId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
Get Discovered Device ARP Entries
Returns all ARP entries of a specific device discovered by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Returns all ARP entries of a specific device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDeviceArpEntries ( long policyId, long deviceId )
84 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
Get Discovered Device MAC Address Entries
Returns all MAC address entries of a specific device discovered by running an IPv4 reconciliation policy.
Output / Response
Returns all MAC address entries of a specific device.
To understand the returned result, refer to the constants listed in Device Properties on page 190.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDeviceMacAddressEntries ( long policyId, long deviceId )
Parameter
Description
policyId
The object ID for the IPv4 reconciliation policy.
deviceId
The object ID of the discovered device.
IPv6 Objects
IPv6 objects include blocks, networks, DHCP ranges, addresses, DUID and reconciliation policy.
Add IPv6 Address
Adds an IPv6 address to a specified IPv6 network.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new IPv6 address..
API call:
long addIP6Address ( long containerId, String address, String type, String name, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv6 address is being added. This can
be the object ID of a Configuration, IPv6 block or IPv6 network. The parent IPv6
network object must exist before adding an IPv6 address, otherwise an error will
occur.
address
The IPv6 address to be added. This value cannot be empty. address and type
must be consistent. For example, if the type is ObjectTypes.IP6Address, the
address must be a string representing an IPv6 address.
type
The type of IPv6 address. This value must be one of the following: macAddress,
IP6Address, or InterfaceID. address and type must be consistent. For
example, if the type is ObjectTypes.IP6Address, the address must be a string
representing an IPv6 address.
name
Descriptive name for the IPv6 address. This value can be empty.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Version 8.3.0 | 85
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Add IPv6 Block by MAC Address
Adds a IPv6 block by specifying the MAC address of the server.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new IPv6 block.
API call:
long addIP6BlockByMACAddress ( long parentId, String macAddress, String name, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the new IPv6 block. The parent object must
be another IPv6 block.
macAddress
The MAC address of the server in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn
or nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
name
Descriptive name for the IPv6 block. This value can be empty.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields. This value can be empty.
Add IPv6 Block by Prefix
adds an IPv6 block be specifying the prefix for the block.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new IPv6 block.
API call:
long addIP6BlockByPrefix ( long parentId, String prefix, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the new IPv6 block. The parent object may
be a configuration or another IPv6 block.
prefix
The IPv6 prefix for the new block. This value cannot be empty.
name
Descriptive name for the IPv6 block. This value can be empty.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields. This value can be empty.
Add IPv6 Network by Prefix
adds an IPv6 network be specifying the prefix for the network.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new IPv6 network.
API call:
long addIP6NetworkByPrefix ( long parentId, String prefix, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the IPv6 block in which the new IPv6 network will be located.
prefix
The IPv6 prefix for the new network. This value cannot be empty.
name
Descriptive name for the IPv6 network. This value can be empty.
86 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields. This value can be empty.
Split IPv6 Block or Network
Splits an IPv6 block or network into the specified number of blocks or networks.
Output / Response
Returns an array of IPv6 blocks or networks created after splitting the block or network.
API call:
APIEntity[] splitIP6Range ( long rangeId, int numberOfParts, String options )
Parameter
Description
rangeId
The database object ID of the block or network that is being split.
numberOfParts
The number of the blocks or networks into which the block or network will be
split. Valid values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, 256, 512, or 1024.
options
No options available. Reserved for future use.
Get IPv6 Range by IP Address
Returns the DHCPv6 Range containing the specified IPv6 address. Use this method to find the
Configuration, IPv6 Block, IPv6 Network, or DHCPv6 Range containing a specified address. You can
specify the type of object to be returned, or you can leave the type of object empty to find the most direct
container for the object..
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the object containing the specified address. If no object is found, returns an
empty APIEntity. If ObjectTypes.IP6Block, ObjectTypes.IP6Network,or ObjectTypes.DHCP6Range is
specified as the type parameter, returns an object of the specified type. If an empty string is specified as
the type parameter, returns the most direct container for the IPv6 address.
API call:
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId, String type, String address )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv6 address is located. This can be
a Configuration, IPv6 Block, IPv6 Network, or DHCPv6 Range. When you do not
know the block, network, or range in which the address is located, specify the
configuration.
type
The type of object containing the IPv6 address. Specify ObjectTypes.IP6Block,
ObjectTypes.IP6Network, or ObjectTypes.DHCP6Range to find the block,
network, or range containing the IPv6 address. Specify an empty string to return
the most direct container for the IPv6 address.
address
An IPv6 address.
Get IPv6 Objects by Hint
Returns an array of IPv6 objects found under a given container object. The networks can be filtered by
using ObjectProperties.hint and ObjectProperties.accessRight options. Currently, it only supports IPv6
networks.
Version 8.3.0 | 87
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Output / Response
Returns an array of IPv6 objects based on the input argument without their properties fields populated, or
returns an empty array if containerId is invalid. If no access right option is specified, the View access
level will be used by default.
API call:
APIEntity[] getIP6ObjectsByHint ( long containerId, String objectType, int start, int
count, String options )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID for the container object. It can be the object ID of any object in the
parent object hierarchy. The highest parent object is the configuration level.
objectType
The type of object containing the IPv6 network. Currently, it only supports
ObjectTypes.IP6Network.
start
Indicates where in the list of objects to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
Indicates the maximum number of child objects that this method will return.
options
A string containing options. The Option names available in ObjectProperties are
ObjectProperties.hint and ObjectProperties.accessRight.
Multiple options can be separated by a | (pipe) character. For example:
hint=ab|accessRight=ADD
The values for the ObjectProperties.hint option can be the prefix of the IP
address for a network or the name of a network.
•
Example 1
The following example will match networks that have the network ID starting
with 2000::. For example, 2000::/64.
String options = ObjectProperties.hint + “=2000::”
•
Example 2
The following example will match networks that have a name starting with
“abc”. For example, “abc”, “abc123” or “abcdef”.
String options = ObjectProperties.hint + “=abc|”
Note: Matching networks to a network ID (Example 1) will take
precedence over matching networks to a name (Example 2).
The values for the ObjectProperties.accessRight option must be one of the
constants listed in Access Right Values on page 189 and Object Types on
page 209. For example:
String options = ObjectProperties.accessRight + "=" +
AccessRightValues.AddAccess;
Assign IPv6 Address
Assigns an IPv6 address to a MAC address and host.
Output / Response
88 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Returns true if the IPv6 address is successfully assigned; returns false if the address is not successfully
assigned.
API call:
boolean assignIP6Address ( long containerId, String address, String action, String
macAddress, String hostInfo, String properties )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv6 address is being assigned. This
can be the object ID of a Configuration, IPv6 block or IPv6 network. The parent
IPv6 network object must exist before adding an IPv6 address, otherwise an error
will occur.
address
The IPv6 address to be assigned. This value cannot be empty. The address
must be created with addIP6Address() before it can be assigned. For more
information, refer to Add IPv6 Address on page 85. The address must be a
string representing an IPv6 address.
action
Determines how to assign the address. Valid values are MAKE_STATIC or
MAKE_DHCP_RESERVED.
macAddress
The MAC address in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
hostInfo
The host information for the IPv6 address. This value can be empty. The hostInfo
string uses the following format: viewId, hostname, ifSameAsZone,
ifReverseMapping.
Where viewId is the object ID of the DNS view; hostname is the name of
DNS zone for the address; ifSameAsZone is a Boolean value, with true
indicating that the name of the resource record should be the same as the host;
ifReverseMapping is a Boolean value, with trueindicating that a reverse record
should be created.
Shown here is an example of a hostInfo string:
2030445,www.example.com,false,true.
properties
A string containing the following property, including user-defined fields:
•
ptrs—a string containing the list of unmanaged external host records to be
associated with the IPv6 address in the following format:
viewId,exHostFQDN[, viewId,exHostFQDN,...]
You can assign External Host records to an IPv6 address using the following
method:
EntityProperties props = new EntityProperties();
props.addProperty( ObjectProperties.ptrs,
"123,exHostFQDN.com,456,exHostFQDN.net" )
long addressId =
service.assignIP4Address( configurationId,
IPv6Address, macAddressStr, hostInfo,
IPAssignmentActionValues.MAKE_STATIC,
props.getPropertiesString() );
•
•
•
name—name of the IPv6 address.
DUID—DHCPv6 unique identifier.
locationCode—the hierarchical location code consists of a set of 1 to 3
alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two characters indicate
Version 8.3.0 | 89
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
a country, followed by next three characters which indicate a city in UN/
LOCODE. New custom locations created under a UN/LOCODE city are
appended to the end of the hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates:
CA= Canada TOR=Toronto OF1=Office 1.
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER CASE letters.
The county code and child location code should be alphanumeric
strings.
This value can be empty.
Clear IPv6 Address
Clears a specified IPv6 address assignment.
Output / Response
Returns true to indicate that the IPv6 address has been cleared, or returns false if the operation was
unsuccessful.
API call:
boolean clearIP6Address ( long addressId )
Parameter
Description
addressId
The object ID of the IPv6 address to be deleted.
Get Entity by Prefix
Returns an APIEntity for the specified IPv6 block or network.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the specified IPv6 block or network. The APIEntity is empty if the block or network
does not exist.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByPrefix ( long containerId, String prefix, String type )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of higher-level parent object (IPv6 block or configuration) in which
the IPv6 block or network is located.
prefix
The prefix value for the IPv6 block or network. This value cannot be empty.
type
The type of object to be returned. This value must be either IP6Block or
IP6Network.
Get IPv6 Address
Returns an APIEntity for the specified IPv6 address.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the specified IPv6 address. The APIEntity is empty of the IPv6 address does not
exist.
API call:
APIEntity getIP6Address ( long containerId, String address )
90 | Address Manager API Guide
IPAM
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv6 address is located. The container
can be a configuration, an IPv6 block, or an IPv6 network.
address
The IPv6 address.
Reassign IPv6 Address
Reassigns an existing IPv6 address to a new IPv6 address. The destination address can be specified as
an IPv6 address or as a MAC address from which an IPv6 address can be calculated.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the reassigned IPv6 address.
API call:
long reassignIP6Address ( long oldAddressId, String destination, String properties )
Parameter
Description
oldAddressId
The object ID of the current IPv6 address.
destination
The destination of the reassigned address. This can be specified as an IPv6
address string (NetworkID and InterfaceID), or as a MAC address from which the
new IPv6 address can be calculated. The MAC address can be specified in the
format nnnnnnnnnnnn or nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Provision Devices
Provision and manage new devices for the network.
Add Device Instance
Used to provision new devices for the network and combines a number of existing API methods into one.
This method assigns the next available, or manually defined, IP address and optionally adds a DNS host
record and MAC address that are linked to the IP address and returns the property string containing IP
address, netmask and gateway. When configured with a DNS host record, addDeviceInstance() will
update the DNS server to immediately deploy the host record.
Note: Address Manager adds the DNS host record directly to the DNS/DHCP Server so that
the individual host record is made live instantly. This is done through the Address Manager to
DNS/DHCP Server communication service (Command Server) and does NOT require a standard
Address Manager deployment.
Output / Response
Returns the property string containing IP address, netmask and gateway.
API call:
String addDeviceInstance ( String configName, String deviceName, String ipAddressMode,
String ipEntity, String viewName, String zoneName, String recordName, String macAddressMode,
String macEntity, String options )
Parameter
Description
configName
Name of parent configuration. If the value is empty or cannot be found, an
exception will be thrown.
Version 8.3.0 | 91
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
deviceName
IP/device name of the new instance. Reserved for future use.
ipAddressMode
Accepted values are REQUEST_STATIC, REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED and
PASS_VALUE. REQUEST_STATIC or REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED is used
to get the next available IP address. PASS_VALUE is used to pass an existing
IP address. Metadata values will be updated to the newly assigned IP address
only. REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED is reserved for future use.
ipEntity
If ipAddressMode is REQUEST_STATIC or REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED,
this needs to be the network where the IP address will be provisioned from in
the format of an IP address range in CIDR format or range. If ipAddressMode is
PASS_VALUE, this needs to be an IP address.
viewName
Name of parent view.
zoneName
Parent zone of the record. This must be specified and existing if the viewName
parameter is an empty string and existing.
recordName
Note: Specify an empty string ("") for all viewName, zoneName and
recordName parameters to ignore DNS object creation.
Note: Specify an empty string ("") for all viewName, zoneName and
recordName parameters to ignore DNS object creation.
Name of the host record to add. This cannot be empty if both viewName
and zoneName are specified and in use. The viewName, zoneName and
recordName parameters need to be used together: the values must all be an
empty string (""), or they must all be populated with specific values.
Note: If all three parameter values are an empty string, DNS objects will
not be created but an IP address will be assigned from a network and
linked to a MAC address.
macAddressMode
Accepted values are REQUEST_VALUE or PASS_VALUE. If specified an
empty string (""), the MACEntity parameter will be ignored. Use PASS_VALUE to
manually provide the MAC address linked to IP address. REQUEST_VALUE is
reserved for future use.
macEntity
If macAddressMode is PASS_VALUE, this must be a MAC address. If
macAddressMode is REQUEST_VALUE, this is a MAC mask.
options
The options string contains four properties; skip, offset, excludeDHCPRange
and allowDuplicateHosts.
•
•
•
92 | Address Manager API Guide
skip—This is optional. It is applied to REQUEST_STATIC and
REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED for ipAddressMode. It is used to specify the
IP address ranges or IP addresses to skip, separated by comma. A hyphen(-),
not a dash is used to separate the start and end addresses.
offset—This is optional. It is applied to REQUEST_VALUE for
ipAddressMode. This is to specify from which address to start to assign IPv4
Address.
excludeDHCPRange—This specifies whether IP addresses in DHCP
ranges should be excluded from assignment or not. It is applied to
REQUEST_STATIC only for ipAddressMode. The value is either true
or false, default value is false. The value will always be set to true if the
ipAddressMode is REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED.
DHCP
Parameter
Description
•
allowDuplicateHosts—This specifies whether the IP address can be added
to an existing host record or not. The value is either true or false, default value
is false.
Note: The values for skip and offset must be IPv4 addresses and must
appear in dotted octet notation.
Delete Device Instance
Deletes either the IP address or MAC address (and all related DNS entries including host records, PTR
records, or DHCP reserved addresses) on both the Address Manager and DNS/DHCP Server based on
the IPv4 address or a MAC address supplied.
Note: Address Manager adds the DNS host record directly to the DNS/DHCP Server so that
the individual host record is made live instantly. This is done through the Address Manager to
DNS/DHCP Server communication service (Command Server) and does NOT require a standard
Address Manager deployment.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDeviceInstance ( String configName, String identifier, String options )
Parameter
Description
configName
Name of parent configuration. If the value is empty or cannot be found, an
exception will be thrown.
identifier
IP address or MAC address. If the value is empty or cannot be found, an
exception will be thrown. Relevant IP addresses, host records and MAC
addresses liked to multiple entities will be updated. Relevant IP addresses, host
records and MAC addresses liked to a single entity will be deleted.
options
Currently empty. This parameter is reserved for future use.
DHCP
DHCP is an essential part of IPAM. DHCP manages the dynamic allocation of IP addresses on an IP
network using the concept of address leases.
In Address Manager, DHCP is integrated into the IP core and defined using range objects. At most
levels of the IP core, deployment options control the behavior of the DHCP service for an object and
its descendant objects within the Address Managermanaged network. A deployment role can also be
associated with a server to provide DHCP services for a specific subnet.
IPv4 DHCP Ranges
DHCP ranges indicate the portion of a network that is dedicated to DHCP.
Ranges can have deployment options assigned to them to control the exact settings that clients receive.
Address Manager then manages the deployment of the DHCP ranges to the managed server and activates
the configuration.
Version 8.3.0 | 93
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Add IPv4 DHCP Range
Adds IPv4 DHCP ranges.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCPv4 range.
API call:
long addDHCP4Range ( long networkId, String start, String end, String properties )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID for the network in which this DHCP range is located.
start
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the range.
end
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the range.
properties
Adds object properties, including the object name and user-defined fields.
Add IPv4 DHCP Range By Size
Adds IPv4 DHCP ranges by offset and percentage.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCPv4 range.
API call:
long addDHCP4RangeBySize ( long networkId, String offset, String size, String properties )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID for the network in which this DHCP range is located.
offset
An integer value specifying the point where the range should begin. The positive
values indicate that the starting IP address of the range will be counted from
the Network ID (first IP address) and forward in the range. The negative values
indicate that the starting IP address of the range will be counted from the
Network Broadcast Address (last IP address) and backward in the range.
size
The size of the range. Currently the range size can only be specified in a relative
size in proportion to the parent network size. To define the relative range size,
defineRangeBy must be set with the OFFSET_AND_PERCENTAGE value in the
properties field.
properties
Optional object properties that can contain the object name, the value of
defineRangeBy, and user-defined fields. The possible values for defineRangeBy
are OFFSET_AND_SIZE and OFFSET_AND_PERCENTAGE.
Note: OFFSET_AND_SIZE is reserved for future use.
Get IPv4 Range by IP Address
Returns the DHCP Range containing the specified IPv4 address. Use this method to find the Configuration,
IPv4 Block, IPv4 Network, or DHCP Range containing a specified address. You can specify the type of
object to be returned, or you can leave the type of object empty to find the most direct container for the
object.
Output / Response
94 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Returns an APIEntity for the object containing the specified address. If no object is found, returns an
empty APIEntity. If ObjectTypes.IP4Block, ObjectTypes.IP4Network, or ObjectTypes.DHCP4Range is
specified as the type parameter, returns an object of the specified type. If an empty string ("") is specified
as the type parameter, returns the most direct container for the IPv4 address.
API call:
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId, String type, String address )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv4 address is located. This can be
a Configuration, IPv4 Block, IPv4 Network, or DHCP Range. When you do not
know the block, network, or range in which the address is located, specify the
configuration.
type
The type of object containing the IPv4 address. Specify ObjectTypes.IP4Block,
ObjectTypes.IP4Network, or ObjectTypes.DHCP4Range to find the block,
network, or range containing the IPv4 address. Specify an empty string ("") to
return the most direct container for the IPv4 address.
address
An IPv4 address.
Get IPv4 DHCP Range
Returns an IPv4 DHCP range object by calling it using its range.
Output / Response
Returns the specified DHCP4Range object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByRange ( long parentId, String address1, String address2, String type )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the parent object of the DHCP range.
address1
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the range.
address2
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the range.
type
The type of object returned: DHCP4Range. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
Get IPv4 DHCP Ranges
Returns multiple IPv4 DHCP ranges for the specified parent ID.
Output Response
Returns an array of DHCPv4 range objects from the database.
API call:
APIEntity[] getEntities ( long parentId, String type, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the DHCP range.
type
The type of object returned: DHCP4Range. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
Version 8.3.0 | 95
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
start
Indicates where in the list of child ranges to start returning range objects. The list
begins at an index of 0.
count
The type of object returned: DHCP4Range. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
Get Max Allowed Range
Finds the maximum possible address range to which the existing IPv4 DHCP range can be extended. This
method only supports the IPv4 DHCP range.
Output / Response
Returns the possible start address and end address for the specified IPv4 DHCP range object in the form
of array of length 2.
API call:
String[] getMaxAllowedRange ( long rangeId )
Parameter
Description
rangeId
The object ID of the IPv4 DHCP range.
Update IPv4 DHCP Range
A DHCP range’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
IPv4 DHCP Range Generic Methods
DHCP ranges can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, see Deleting Objects on page 52.
IPv6 DHCP Ranges
DHCPv6 ranges indicate the portion of a network that is dedicated to DHCPv6.
Ranges can have deployment options assigned to them to control the exact settings that clients receive.
Address Manager then manages the deployment of the DHCPv6 ranges to the managed server and
activates the configuration.
Add IPv6 DHCP Range
Adds IPv6 DHCP ranges.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCPv6 range.
API call:
long addDHCP6Range ( long networkId, String start, String end, String properties )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID for the network in which this DHCPv6 range is located.
start
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the range.
96 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Parameter
Description
end
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the range.
properties
Adds object properties, including the object name and user-defined fields.
Add IPv6 DHCP Range By Size
Adds IPv6 DHCP ranges by size.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCPv6 range.
API call:
long addDHCP6RangeBySize ( long networkId, String start, String size, String properties )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID for the network in which this DHCP range is located.
start
An integer value or IPv6 address specifying the point where the range should
begin. The positive values indicate that the starting IP address of the range will
be counted from the Network ID (first IP address) and forward in the range. The
IPv6 address value indicates the starting address of the range.
Note:
•
•
•
If defineRangeBy is set with the AUTOCREATE_BY_SIZE value in
the property field, the start field must contain an empty string ("").
If defineRangeBy is set with the OFFSET_AND_SIZE value in the
property field, the start field must contain a non-negative integer
value.
If defineRangeBy is set with the START_ADDRESS_AND_SIZE
value in the property field, the start field must contain a valid IPv6
address that will be used as the starting address of the DHCP range.
size
The size of the range. Currently the range size can only be specified in a relative
size in proportion to the parent network size.
properties
Optional object properties that can contain the object name, the value
of defineRangeBy, and user-defined fields. The possible values for
defineRangeBy are AUTOCREATE_BY_SIZE, OFFSET_AND_SIZE, and
START_ADDRESS_AND_SIZE.
Note: If you do not specify the defineRangeBy value, the DHCP range
will be created using AUTOCREATE_BY_SIZE by default.
Get IPv6 Range by IP Address
Returns the DHCPv6 Range containing the specified IPv6 address.
Use this method to find the Configuration, IPv6 Block, IPv6 Network, or DHCPv6 Range containing a
specified address. You can specify the type of object to be returned, or you can leave the type of object
empty ("") to find the most direct container for the object.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity for the DHCPv6 Range containing the specified IPv6 address. If no object
is found, returns an empty APIEntity. If ObjectTypes.IP6Block, ObjectTypes.IP6Network,or
ObjectTypes.DHCP6Range is specified as the type parameter, returns an object of the specified type.
Version 8.3.0 | 97
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
If an empty string ("") is specified as the type parameter, returns the most direct container for the IPv6
address.
API call:
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId, String type, String address )
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID of the container in which the IPv6 address is located. This can be
a Configuration, IPv6 Block, IPv6 Network, or DHCP Range. When you do not
know the block, network, or range in which the address is located, specify the
configuration.
type
The type of object containing the IPv6 address. Specify ObjectTypes.IP6Block,
ObjectTypes.IP6Network, or ObjectTypes.DHCP6Range to find the block,
network, or range containing the IPv6 address. Specify an empty string ("") to
return the most direct container for the IPv6 address.
address
An IPv6 address.
Get IPv6 DHCP Range
Returns an IPv6 DHCP range by calling it using its range.
Output / Response
Returns the specified DHCP6Range object from the database.
API call:
APIEntity getEntityByRange ( long parentId, String address1, String address2, String type )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the DHCPv6 range.
address1
An IP address defining the lowest address or start of the range.
address2
An IP address defining the highest address or end of the range.
type
The type of object returned: DHCPv6 Range. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 209.
Get Multiple IPv6 DHCP Ranges
Returns multiple DHCPv6 range objects for the specified parent ID.
Output / Response
Returns an array of DHCPv6 range objects from the database.
API call:
APIEntity[] getEntities ( long parentId, String type, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the DHCPv6 range.
type
The type of object returned: DHCPv6 Range. This must be one of the constants
listed in Object Types on page 229.
start
Indicates where in the list of child ranges to start returning range objects. The list
begins at an index of 0.
98 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Parameter
Description
count
The maximum number of DHCPv6 range objects to return.
Update IPv6 DHCP Range
A DHCPv6 range’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
IPv6 DHCP Range Generic Methods
DHCPv6 ranges can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, refer to Deleting Objects on page 52.
DHCP Client Options
DHCP options that can be added to a DHCP configuration to specify deployment instructions relating to
extra settings for client configuration.
For more information about these options, refer to RFCs 2132, 2242, 2610, 2241, and 2485. Readers
are also encouraged to examine RFCs 1497 and 1122 for background information. Options that accept
Boolean values are activated by a value of 1 unless otherwise specified. When specifying a list of IPv4
addresses, the first address takes precedence.
Add DHCP Client Option
Adds DHCP client options and returns the object ID for the new option object.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCPv4 client option object.
API call:
long addDHCPClientDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, String value, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is being added.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 client option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in DHCP Client Options on page 191.
value
The value being assigned to the option.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Get DHCP Client Option
Returns DHCPv4 client options assigned for the object specified excluding the options inherited from the
higher-level parent object.
Output / Response
Returns the specified DHCPv4 client option object from the database.
API call:
APIDeploymentOption getDHCPClientDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long
serverId )
Version 8.3.0 | 99
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option has been applied.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 client option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in DHCP Client Options on page 191.
serverId
The specific server or server group to which this option is deployed. To return an
option that has not been assigned to a server, set this value to 0(zero). Omitting
this parameter from the method call will result in an error.
Update DHCP Client Option
Updates DHCP client options.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void updateDHCPClientDeploymentOption ( APIDeploymentOption option )
Parameter
Description
option
The DHCP client option object to be updated.
Note: The Name field of the DHCP client deployment option object
cannot be updated.
Delete DHCP Client Option
Deletes DHCP client options.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDHCPClientDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity from which the deployment option will be deleted.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 client option to be deleted. This name must be one of
the constants listed in DHCP Client Options on page 191.
serverId
The specific server or server group to which this option is deployed. To delete an
option that has not been assigned to a server, set this value to 0 (zero). Omitting
this parameter from the method call will result in an error.
DHCP6 Client Options
DHCPv6 options that can be added to a DHCP configuration to specify deployment instructions relating to
extra settings for client configuration.
Add DHCP6 Client Option
Adds DHCPv6 client options and returns the database object ID for the new option object.
Output / Response
100 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Returns the object ID of the new DHCPv6 client object.
API call:
long addDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, String value, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is being added.
name
The name of the DHCPv6 client option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in the DHCP6 Client Options on page 194.
value
The value being assigned to the option.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Get DHCP6 Client Option
Returns DHCP6 client options assigned for the object specified excluding the options inherited from the
higher-level parent object.
Output / Response
Returns the specified DHCPv6 client option object from the database.
API call:
APIDeploymentOption getDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long
serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity.
name
The name of the DHCPv6 client option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in the DHCP6 Client Options on page 194.
serverId
The specific server or server group to which this option is deployed. To return
an option that has not been assigned to a server role, set this value to 0 (zero).
Omitting this parameter from the method call will result in an error.
Update DHCP6 Client Option
Updates DHCPv6 client options.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void updateDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption ( APIDeploymentOption option )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The DHCPv6 client option object that is updated.
Note: The Name field of the DHCPv6 client deployment option object
cannot be updated.
Delete DHCP6 Client Option
Deletes DHCPv6 client options.
Version 8.3.0 | 101
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The database object ID for the entity from which this deployment option will be
deleted.
name
The name of the DHCPv6 client option being deleted. This name must be one of
the constants listed in the DHCP6 Client Options on page 194.
serverId
The specific server or server group to which this option is deployed. To delete
an option that has not been assigned to a server role, set this value to 0 (zero).
Omitting this parameter from the method call will result in an error.
DHCP Custom Options
This method is available to add DHCP custom option definitions.
Add Custom Deployment Option
Adds a custom deployment option.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new option defined.
API call:
long addCustomOptionDefinition ( long configurationId, String name, long optionId, String
optionType, boolean allowMultiple, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the parent configuration.
name
The name of the custom deployment option. This value cannot be empty.
optionId
The option code for the custom deployment option. This value must be within the
range of 151 to 174, 178 to 207, 212 to 219, 222 to 223, or 224 to 254.
optionType
The type of custom deployment option. This value must be one of the items listed
in DHCP Custom Option Types on page 194.
allowMultiple
Determines whether or not the custom option requires multiple values. The
default value is false. The value cannot be empty.
In Perl script, only an empty string and 0 (zero) are considered as false;
other values are considered as true. Therefore, a string containing the word
false is considered to be true because the string is not empty. In Perl, set the
allowMultiple data type to string and set the value to either true or false:
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->
name( 'allowMultiple' )->
value( "false")->
attr({xmlns => ''})
102 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Parameter
Description
Or, set the allowMultiple data type to boolean. Set the value to either 0 or an
empty string to represent false. Set the value to any other text to represent true.
SOAP::Data->type( 'boolean' )
->name( 'allowMultiple' )
->value( 0 )
->attr({xmlns => ''})
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields
DHCP Service Options
These are the DHCP service options that can be added to a DHCP configuration to specify deployment
instructions relating to extra settings for service configuration.
Add DHCP Service Option
Adds DHCP service options.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCPv4 service option.
API call:
long addDHCPServiceDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, String value, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is being added.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 service option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in DHCP Service Options on page 195.
value
The value being assigned to the option.
When adding the DDNS hostname option, you need to specify the value
in the following format: [Type],[Position],[Data] for IP and MAC type, and
[Type],[Data] for FIXED type. Where:
•
•
•
properties
Type—type of DDNS hostname. The possible values are
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_IP,
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_MAC, or
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_FIXED.
Position—specify where you wish to add the data value
to the IP or MAC address. The possible values are
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_POSITION_PREPEND,
or DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_POSITION_APPEND.
This is only required for IP or MAC type with Data.
Data—For IP and MAC address, this value is used to be prepended or
appended to the IP address or MAC address. For FIXED type, this value must
be specified and will be used for the DDNS hostname. This is optional for IP
and MAC type.
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Version 8.3.0 | 103
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Get DHCP Service Option
Returns DHCP service options assigned for the object specified excluding the options inherited from the
higher-level parent object.
Output / Response
Returns the requested DHCPv4 service option object from the database.
API call:
APIDeploymentOption getDHCPServiceDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long
serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is assigned.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 service option being retrieved. This name must be one
of the constants listed in DHCP Service Options on page 195.
serverId
Specifies the server or server group to which the option is deployed for the
specified entity. To retrieve an option that has not been assigned to a server role,
specify 0 as a value. Omitting this parameter from the method call will result in an
error.
Update DHCP Service Option
Updates DHCP service options.
Note: The Name field of the DHCP service deployment option object cannot be updated.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void updateDHCPServiceDeploymentOption ( APIDeploymentOption option )
Parameter
Description
option
The DHCP service option object to be updated.
Delete DHCP Service Option
Deletes DHCP service options.
Note: The Name field of the DHCP service deployment option object cannot be updated.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDHCPServiceDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity from which this deployment option is being deleted.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 service option being deleted. This name must be one
of the constants listed in DHCP Service Options on page 212.
104 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Parameter
Description
serverId
Specifies the server or server group to which the option is deployed for the
specified entity. To retrieve an option that has not been assigned to a server role,
set this value to 0(zero). Omitting this parameter from the method call will result
in an error.
DHCP6 Service Options
These are the DHCPv6 service options that can be added to a DHCP configuration to specify deployment
instructions relating to extra settings for service configuration.
Add DHCP6 Service Option
Adds DHCPv6 service options.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new option.
API call:
long addDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, String value, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is being added.
name
The name of the DHCPv6 service option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in DHCP6 Service Options on page 196.
value
The value being assigned to the option.
When adding the DDNS hostname option, you need to specify the value in the
following format: [Type],[Data] for IP and DUID. Where:
•
•
properties
Type—type of DDNS hostname. The possible values are
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_IP,
DHCPServiceOptionConstants.DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_DUID.
Data—For IP and DUID, this value is used to form the DDNS hostname. This
is optional.
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Get DHCP6 Service Option
Returns DHCPv6 service options assigned for the object specified excluding the options inherited from the
higher-level parent object.
Output / Response
Returns the requested DHCPv6 service option object from the database.
API call:
APIDeploymentOption getDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long
serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The database object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is assigned.
Version 8.3.0 | 105
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
name
The name of the DHCPv6 service option being added. This name must be one of
the constants listed in DHCP6 Service Options on page 196.
serverId
Specifies the server or server group to which the option is deployed for the
specified entity. To retrieve an option that has not been assigned to a server role,
set this value to 0(zero). Omitting this parameter from the method call will result
in an error.
Update DHCP6 Service Option
Updates DHCPv6 service options.
Note: The Name field of the DHCPv6 service deployment option object cannot be updated.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void updateDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption ( APIDeploymentOption option )
Parameter
Description
option
The DHCPv6 service option object to be updated.
Delete DHCP6 Service Option
Deletes DHCPv6 service options.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption ( long entityId, String name, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity from which this deployment option is being deleted.
name
The name of the DHCPv4 service option being deleted. This name must be one
of the constants listed in DHCP6 Service Options on page 196.
serverId
Specifies the server or server group to which the option is deployed for the
specified entity. To return an option that has not been assigned to a server role,
set this value to 0(zero). Omitting this parameter from the method call will result
in an error.
DHCP Vendor Profiles and Options
Vendor profiles are sets of DHCP options required by particular devices. For example, a VoIP phone might
need a very specific set of DHCP options.
A vendor profile is the container in which the DHCP vendor options are stored. A single vendor profile
contains several DHCP vendor options, all of which can be sent to a specific type of device such as an
IP handset. After the vendor profile is created and populated with the appropriate options, the options
themselves can be defined and set at the appropriate level.
106 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Add DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
Adds a DHCP vendor deployment to specified objects.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new DHCP vendor deployment option.
API call:
long addDHCPVendorDeploymentOption ( long parentId, long optionId, String value, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object for the DHCP vendor deployment option. The
parent object must not be a DNS object. Valid parent types are Configuration,
IP4Block, IP4Network, IP4NetworkTemplate, IP4Addr, IP4DHCPRange, Server,
MACAddr, and MACPool.
optionId
The object ID of the vendor option definition. All DHCP vendor client
deployment options have a fixed option code of 60 and a unique option
sub-code. The unique sub-code is set with the optionId value in the
addVendorOptionDefinition() method.
value
The value for the option. This value cannot be empty. The value should be
appropriate for its option type. For example, if the option type is IP4 and
allowMultiple is set as true in the vendor option definition, then the value of the
DHCP vendor client deployment option should be multiple IPv4 addresses in a
comma-separated list.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields. This value can be empty.
If the DHCP vendor client deployment option is intended for use with a specific
server, the object ID of the server must be specified in the properties string.
Add Vendor Option Definition
Adds a vendor option definition to a vendor profile.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new vendor option definition.
API call:
long addVendorOptionDefinition ( long vendorProfileId, long optionId, String name, String
optionType, String description, boolean allowMultiple, String properties )
Parameter
Description
vendorProfileId
The object ID of the vendor profile.
optionId
The deployment option ID. This value must be within the range of 1 to 254.
name
The name of the vendor option. This value cannot be empty.
optionType
The option type. This value must be one of the types listed in Vendor Profile
Option Types on page 216.
description
A description of the vendor option. This value cannot be empty.
allowMultiple
Determines whether or not the custom option requires multiple values. The
default value is false. This value cannot be empty.
Version 8.3.0 | 107
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
In Perl script, only an empty string and 0 (zero) are considered as false;
other values are considered as true. Therefore, a string containing the word
“false” is considered to be true because the string is not empty. In Perl, set the
allowMultipledata type to string and set the value to either true or false:
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->
name( 'allowMultiple' )->
value( "false")->
attr({xmlns => ''})
Or, set the allowMultipledata type to boolean. Set the value to either 0or an
empty string to represent false. Set the value to any other text to represent true.
SOAP::Data->type( 'boolean' )
->name( 'allowMultiple' )
->value( 0 )
->attr({xmlns => ''})
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields. This value can be empty.
Add Vendor Profile
Adds a vendor profile and returns the object ID for the new vendor profile.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new vendor profile.
API call:
long addVendorProfile ( String identifier, String name, String description, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
identifier
The Vendor Class Identifier.
name
A descriptive name for the vendor profile. This name is not matched against
DHCP functionality.
description
A description of the vendor profile.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Delete DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
Deletes a specified DHCP vendor deployment option.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDHCPVendorDeploymentOption ( long entityId, long optionId, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the object to which the DHCP vendor deployment option is
assigned.
108 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Parameter
Description
optionId
the object ID of the vendor option definition. All DHCP vendor client
deployment options have a fixed option code of 60 and a unique option
sub-code. The unique sub-code is set with the optionId value in the
addVendorOptionDefinition() method.
serverId
The object ID of the server or server group where the DHCP vendor deployment
option is used. If the option is generic, set this value to 0 (zero). Omitting this
parameter from the method call will result in an error.
Get DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
Retrieves a DHCP vendor deployment option assigned for the object specified excluding the options
inherited from the higher-level parent object.
Output / Response
Returns an APIDeploymentOption for the DHCP vendor client deployment option. The
APIDeploymentOption is empty if the specified option does not exist. The property string of the returned
APIDeploymentOption contains at least contain the following substring to represent vendor option
definitions:
optionId=optionID|optionType=Integer(-128 to 127)|
optionDescription=description
multipleSignedInt8|optionAllowMultiple=boolean|server=serverID|
server=serverID only appears if the DHCP vendor client deployment option is used for a specific server.
API call:
APIDeploymentOption getDHCPVendorDeploymentOption ( long entityId, long optionId, long
serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the DHCP vendor deployment option is
assigned. This must be the ID of a configuration, IPv4 block, IPv4 network, IPv4
address, IPV4 DHCP rage, server, MAC address, or MAC Pool.
optionId
The object ID of the DHCP vendor option definition.
serverId
The specific server or server group to which this option is deployed for the
specified entity. To return an option that has not been assigned to a server, set
this value to 0 (zero). Omitting this parameter from the method call will result in
an error.
Update DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
Updates the specified DHCP vendor deployment option.
Note: The Name field of the DHCP vendor deployment option object cannot be updated.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void updateDHCPVendorDeploymentOption ( APIDeploymentOption option )
Version 8.3.0 | 109
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
option
APIDeploymentOption to be updated. This is what
getDHCPVendorDeploymentOption() returns.
DHCP Match Classes
Match classes in Address Manager (also known as classes in ISC DHCP and as user and vendor classes
in Microsoft DHCP) allow you to restrict address allocation and assign options to clients that match
specified criteria.
For example, using a match class, you could assign a specific DHCP lease length to clients that match a
MAC address pattern or clients that are configured to send a specific identifier. A DHCP client becomes a
member of a class when it matches the specified criteria.
Address Manager provides the following seven match criteria values:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
MATCH_HARDWARE
MATCH_DHCP_CLIENT_ID
MATCH_DHCP_VENDOR_ID
MATCH_AGENT_CIRCUIT_ID
MATCH_AGENT_REMOTE_ID
CUSTOM_MATCH
CUSTOM_MATCH_IF
Add DHCP Match Classes
Adds DHCP match classes to Address Manager.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new DHCP match class added.
API Call:
long addDHCPMatchClass ( long configurationId, String name, String matchCriteria, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration to which the DHCP match class is being
added.
name
The name of the DHCP match class.
matchCriteria
A string defining the match criteria. The value must be one of the constants
listed in DHCP Class Match Criteria on page 191.
properties
A string containing the following properties and values:
•
•
•
•
110 | Address Manager API Guide
description—a description of the match class.
matchOffset—Match Offset value for the MatchClass. It refers to the point
where the match should begin.
matchLength—Match Length value for the Matchclass. It refers to the
number of characters to match.
customMatchRawString—a raw string that maps directly to a data
or boolean expression for DHCP_CLASS_CUSTOM_MATCH and
DHCP_CLASS_CUSTOM_MATCH_IF constants. Use the syntax and
grammar supported by the ISC’s DHCP daemon. End the string with a “;”
semicolon. If you omit the semicolon, one is automatically added when the
condition is deployed.
DHCP
Parameter
Description
Note:
•
•
matchOffset and matchLength are only applicable to the
following five constants:
• DHCP_CLASS_HARDWARE
• DHCP_CLASS_CLIENT_ID
• DHCP_CLASS_VENDOR_ID
• DHCP_CLASS_AGENT_CIRCUIT_ID
• DHCP_CLASS_AGENT_REMOTE_ID
matchOffset and matchLength must be specified together.
Update DHCP Match Classes
A DHCP Match class’ name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
Parameter
Description
properties
A string containing options, in addition to the following element:
•
ignoreError—If true, the validation errors for the available match values
violating the match conditions will be ignored.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
Delete DHCP Match Classes
DHCP Match Classes can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, refer to Deleting Objects on page 52.
Add DHCP Sub Classes
Adds DHCP match class values.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new DHCP match class value.
API Call:
long addDHCPSubClass ( long matchClassId, String matchValue, String properties )
Parameter
Description
matchClassId
The object ID of the match class in which the DHCP match class value is being
defined.
matchValue
The value of the DHCP match value to be matched with the match class. The
length of the match value must be equal to the length, in bytes, specified in the
match class.
properties
A string containing the following element:
•
description—a description of the match class.
Update DHCP Sub Classes
A DHCP Sub class’ matchValue and description properties can be updated using the generic update()
method.
Version 8.3.0 | 111
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
Delete DHCP Sub Classes
DHCP Sub Classes can be deleted using the generic delete() method.
For more information, refer to Deleting Objects on page 52.
DHCP Raw Options
The DHCPv4 and DHCPv6 Raw options allow you to add DHCPv4 and DHCPv6 deployment options that
are not directly supported by Address Manager.
A raw option is passed to the DHCP services on the managed server exactly as you type it in the rawData
parameter. Therefore, it is essential that you enter the data with the correct syntax. There is no error
checking or data checking on the raw option. In the event of a syntax error in a DHCP Raw option, DHCP
service will stop then rollback to the previous DHCP configuration, resulting in a service outage.
Raw options are not inherited between levels. They cannot be set at the configuration level or the IP block
level because options set at these levels would not be inherited below. They can be set at the following
levels:
•
For DHCPv4 raw options:
•
• Server
• Server group
• IPv4 network
• IPv4 network template
• IPv4 DHCP range
• DHCP match class
• DHCP match class value
• MacAddress
• MacPool
• IPv4 DHCP reserved address
For DHCPv6 raw options:
•
•
•
•
Server
Server group
IPv6 network
IPv6 DHCP reserved address
To add or update DHCP raw deployment options, refer to Add Raw Deployment Option on page 144 and
Update Raw Deployment Option on page 145.
Shared Networks
Shared network declarations in DHCP are used to group together different logical subnets that share the
same physical network.
Note: Shared networks are known as superscopes in Windows.
Note: For shared networks, each member networks of the shared network must have the same
type of DHCP deployment role assigned to its network object.
For example, consider a network with 250 workstations on a physicalnetwork with the logical address ID of
192.168.6.0/24. You need to add 100 workstationsto this physical network, but the only available subnet
ID is 192.168.12.0/24. If the subnets were contiguous (that is, 192.168.6.0/24 and 192.168.7.0/ 24), you
could modify the subnet mask to create a single logical subnet to accommodate the additional computers
(192.168.6.0/23). However, the two network IDs are not contiguous.
112 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
By configuring a shared network, you can group the two networks together. The benefit is that your DHCP
server can allocate IP addresses from the common shared network to any host on either of the networks,
without the need to isolate the networks to different router interfaces.
Tag groups and tags are the mechanism by which subnets are grouped into DHCP shared networks.
To use shared networks, you need to associate a single tag group with a configuration. A configuration
can have many associated tags, but only one tag that is associated for the purpose of forming shared
networks.
Link a Shared Network Tag
Links an IPv4 network with a shared network tag.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void shareNetwork ( long networkId, long tagId )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID of the IPv4 network that is being linked with a
shared network tag. If networkId is not valid, an error will be
returned.
tagId
The object ID of the tag that is linked. If tagId is not valid, an
error will be returned.
Unlink a Shared Network Tag
Unlinks the shared network tag from an IPv4 network.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void unshareNetwork ( long networkId )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID of the IPv4 network that is being unlinked
from a shared network tag. If networkId is not valid, an error
will be returned.
Get Shared Networks
Returns multiple IPv4 networks linked to the given shared network tag.
Output / Response
Returns an array of entities of all the IPv4 networks linked to the given shared network tag. If no networks
are found, an empty array will be returned.
API Call:
APIEntity[] getSharedNetworks ( long tagId )
Version 8.3.0 | 113
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
tagId
The object ID of the tag that is linked with shared IPv4
networks. If tagId is not valid, an error will be returned.
DNS
The DNS service part of the Address Manager API implements DNS structures through views and zones.
All supported DNS resource record types can be manipulated through this part of the API. Control of DNS
options allows you to customize the DNS service.
DNS Views
Address Manager treats all DNS structures as views. Address Manager creates the default View clause
in the named.conf files and then creates additional Views as needed to add customized DNS response
groups to the structure.
Each view is a child of a configuration object. Beneath the views are zones, which can contain subzones or resource records. All views can be associated with an Access Control List (ACL) to filter client
requests and provide different sets of DNS information in response to requests from different clients. BIND
views and Address Manager views are the same. Views in Address Manager use the same IP address to
deliver different DNS services to different clients depending on their IP address. In a Address Manager
configuration, you can add views for each client group that requires filtering against an ACL. Address
Manager differs from standard implementations of views in the area of zone transfers. Address Manager
only assigns a single IP address for DNS to a managed server. To send notifications to a slave server to
request a zone transfer, DNS/DHCP Servers recognize each other through the use of TSIG keys. The
TSIG keys enable each DNS/DHCP Server appliance to be dealt with on an individual basis with high
security in terms of data integrity and authentication. Address Manager handles all of the implementation
details for these advanced features while providing views-based service on a single port and on a single
address.
Add DNS View
Adds DNS Views.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DNS view.
API Call:
long addView ( long configurationId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the parent configuration in which this DNS view is
located.
name
The name of the view.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Update DNS View
A DNS view’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
114 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
DNS View Generic Methods
DNS views use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Updating Objects on page 50.
Add Access Control List (ACL)
Adds an Access Control List to a view.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new ACL object.
API Call:
long addACL( long configurationId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration on which ACL need to be added.
name
The name of the ACL.
properties
A string containing the comma-separated list of options in the following
format:
aclValues=IP4Address, IP6Address, IP4Network’s CIDR,
IP6Network’s CIDR, ACL’s name,
TSIG key’s name, Predefined BIND ACL values
where:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
IP4Address—the IPv4 address.
IP6Address—the IPv6 address.
IP4Network’s CIDR—the CIDR notation defining the IPv4 network.
IP6Network’s CIDR—the CIDR notation defining the IPv6 network.
ACL’s name—the name of the ACL (Example: acl aclName).
TSIG key’s name—the name of the TSIG key (Example: key
TSIGName).
Predefined BIND ACL values—Example: ‘none’, 'any', 'localhost',
'localnets' or 'All', 'None', 'Local Host', 'Local Networks'.
Note: Use an exclamation mark (!) to exclude a certain option.
For example, !none, !acl aclName, !10/ 24, etc.
Update Access Control List (ACL)
An Access Control List (ACL) can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
DNS Zones
In Address Manager, DNS zones are child objects of views. Zones can contain sub-zones and resource
records. Sub-zones can be created several layers deep, as required.
Add Entity for DNS Zones
Adds DNS zones.
Version 8.3.0 | 115
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
addEntity() is a generic method for adding configurations, DNS zones, and DNS resource records.
When using addEntity() to add a zone, you must specify a single zone name without any . (dot)
characters. The parent object must be either a DNS view or another DNS zone.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DNS zone.
API call:
long addEntity( long parentId, APIEntity entity )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent DNS view or DNS zone to which the zone is
added.
entity
The zone name, without any . (dot) characters, to be added.
Add Zone
Adds DNS zones. When using addZone(), you can use . (dot) characters to create the top level domain
and subzones.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DNS zone.
API Call:
long addZone( long parentId, String absoluteName, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID for the parent object to which the zone is being added. For
top-level domains, the parent object is a DNS view. For sub zones, the
parent object is a top-level domain or DNS zone.
absoluteName
The complete FQDN for the zone with no trailing dot (for example,
example.com).
properties
Adds object properties, including a flag for deployment, an optional
network template association, and user-defined fields in the format:
deployable=|template=|
=
The deployable flag is false by default and is optional. To make the zone
deployable, set the deployable flag to true.
Get Zones by Hint
Returns an array of accessible zones of child objects for a given containerId value.
Output / Response
Returns an array of zones based on the input argument without their properties fields populated, or returns
an empty array if containerId is invalid. If no access right option is specified, the View access level will be
used by default.
API Call:
APIEntity[] getZonesByHint( long containerId, int start, int count, String options )
116 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Parameter
Description
containerId
The object ID for the container object. It can be the object ID of any object in
the parent object hierarchy. The highest parent object can be the configuration
level.
start
Indicates where in the list of objects to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
Indicates the maximum number of child objects that this method will return. The
maximum number of child objects cannot exceed more than 10.
options
A string containing options. The Option names available in the ObjectProperties
are ObjectProperties.hint, ObjectProperties.accessRight, and
ObjectProperties.overrideType. Multiple options can be separated by a |
(pipe) character. For example:
hint=ab|overrideType=HostRecord|accessRight=ADD
The values for ObjectProperties.hint option can be the prefix of a zone name.
For example:
String options = ObjectProperties.hint + "=abc|"
The values for the ObjectProperties.accessRight and
ObjectProperties.overrideType options must be one of the constants listed
in Access Right Values on page 189 and Object Types on page 209. For
example:
String options = ObjectProperties.accessRight + "=" +
AccessRightValues.AddAccess +
"|"+ ObjectProperties.overrideType + "=" +
ObjectTypes.HostRecord;
Update Zone
A DNS zone’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
Zone Generic Methods
DNS zones use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, refer to Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Get Key Signing Key
Returns a string containing all active Key Signing Keys (KSK) for a given entityId value in a specified
output format with its start time and expire time, divided by a delimiter (|). The list of returned KSKs is
sorted in descending order by expiry date.
Output / Response
Returns a string containing up-to two active KSK(s) of an entity in the following format:
KSK in specified format|create time|expire time.
Version 8.3.0 | 117
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
API Call:
String[] getKSK( long entityId, String format )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity associated with the KSK. The only supported entity
types are Zone, IPv4 block, and IPv4 network.
format
The output format of the KSK of an entity. The value must be one of the
constants listed in DNSSEC Key Format on page 199.
DNS Zone Templates
DNS zone templates provide a standard set of DNS records and options that can be maintained in a
central location. These templates contain the same tabs as a regular zone except for the Deployment
Roles tab.
Any settings that should be repeated in several zones, such as mail servers or web servers, should be
added to a zone template so that the setting can be applied easily and consistently across zones. The
records and options set in a zone template are created in any zones to which the template is applied.
If a record or an option is updated in the template, it is also updated in any zones to which the template
applies. Modifying a template-applied record or option in a zone severs the link between the template
and the modified record or option. If the template is re-applied, you have a choice to ignore conflicts or
overwrite the conflicting objects with the settings in the template.
Zone templates can be edited to change the template name. Editing a zone template is exactly the same
as building a zone, with the exception of assigning deployment roles, because zone templates are not
deployable.
Add Zone Template
Adds a DNS zone template.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new DNS zone template.
API Call:
long addZoneTemplate( long parentId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent DNS view when adding a view-level zone
template. The object ID of the configuration when adding a configurationlevel zone template.
name
The name of the DNS zone template. This value can be an empty string
("").
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Assign or Update Template
Assigns, updates, or removes DNS zone and IPv4 network templates.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void assignOrUpdateTemplate( long entityId, long templateId, String properties )
118 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the IPv4 network to which the network template is to
be assigned or updated, or the object ID of the zone to which the zone
template is to be assigned or updated.
templateId
The object ID of the DNS zone template or IPv4 network template. To
remove a template, set this value to 0 (zero).
properties
A string containing the following settings:
•
ObjectProperties.templateType—Specifies the type of template on
which this operation is being performed.
The possible values are ObjectProperties.IP4NetworkTemplateType
(Assigning or updating IP4NetworkTemplate on an IP4Network)
and ObjectProperties.zoneTemplateType (Assigning or updating
zoneTemplate on a DNS zone). This is mandatory.
Along with ObjectProperties.templateType, user can also specify the
reapply mode for various properties of the template.
•
•
For Network template, the following additional parameters can also be
specified:
• ObjectProperties.gatewayReapplyMode
• ObjectProperties.reservedAddressesReapplyMode
• ObjectProperties.dhcpRangesReapplyMode
• ObjectProperties.ipGroupsReapplyMode
• ObjectProperties.optionsReapplyMode
For Zone Template, the following additional parameter can also be
specified:
•
ObjectProperties.zoneTemplateReapplyMode
The possible values for re-apply mode properties are:
•
•
•
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeIgnore
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeOverwrite
If the re-apply mode is not specified in the properties, the default
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeIgnoremode is used.
Note: If you are not using Java or Perl, refer to Object Properties
on page 201 for the actual values.
Java client example:
EntityProperties ntProp = new EntityProperties();
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.templateType,
ObjectProperties.IP4NetworkTemplateType );
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.gatewayReapplyMode,
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate );
ntProp.addProperty( ObjectProperties.reservedAddressesReapplyMode,
ObjectProperties.templateReapplyModeUpdate );
service.assignOrUpdateTemplate( ip4N20_26Id, networkTemplateId,
ntProp.getPropertiesString() );
Version 8.3.0 | 119
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Perl client example:
SOAP::Data->type( 'string' )->name( 'properties' )->
value( ObjectProperties::templateType."=".ObjectProperties::
IP4NetworkTemplateType."|".
ObjectProperties:: gatewayReapplyMode."=".ObjectProperties::
templateReapplyModeUpdate."|" )
->attr({xmlns => ''}) )->result;
Update Zone Template
A zone template’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
Zone Template Generic Methods
Zone templates use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Add Records to DNS Zone Template
addEntity() is a generic method for adding configuration, DNS zones, and DNS resource records.
You must use this method to add or update DNS resource records to DNS zone templates. For more
information, refer to Add Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
ENUM Zones
ENUM zones provide voice over IP (VoIP) functionality within a DNS server.
The system requires DNS to manage the phone numbers associated with client end points; Address
Manager provides an E164 or ENUM zone type for this purpose. The ENUM zone represents the area
code for the phone prefixes and numbers stored in it. ENUM zones contain special sub-zones called
prefixes that represent telephone exchanges and can contain the records for the actual devices.
VoIP devices are addressed in several ways. A uniform resource identifier (URI) string provides custom
forward locator references for these devices as covered in RFC 3401. Reverse DNS is used to discover
the relevant information for a device based on its phone number. Name authority pointer (NAPTR) records
are used to represent this information.
Add ENUM Zone
Adds ENUM zones.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new ENUM zone.
API Call:
long addEnumZone( long parentId, long prefix, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID for the parent object of the ENUM zone.
prefix
The number prefix for the ENUM zone.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
120 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Update ENUM Zone
An ENUM zone’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
ENUM Zone Generic Methods
ENUM zones use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, refer to Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
ENUM Numbers
ENUM number objects represent VoIP phone numbers within Address Manager. This functionality is
provided as an alternative to using raw NAPTR records.
Add ENUM Number
adds ENUM numbers.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new ENUM number record.
API Call:
long addEnumNumber( long parentId, int number, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object for the ENUM number. The parent object for
an ENUM number is always an ENUM zone.
number
The ENUM phone number.
properties
Adds object properties, and user-defined fields, including the data string, which
includes service, URI, comment and ttl values.
Update ENUM Number
You can update an ENUM number’s number property using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
ENUM Number Generic Methods
ENUM numbers use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, refer to Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
DNS Resource Records
In Address Manager, DNS resource records describe the characteristics of a zone or sub-zone. Address
Manager supports the following types of resource records.
Resource Record Type
Description
Host Record
Designates an IP address for a device. A new host requires a name
and an IP address. Multiple addresses may exist for the same device.
Mail Exchanger Record
Designates the host name and preference for a mail server or
exchanger. An MX record requires a name and a priority value.
Version 8.3.0 | 121
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Resource Record Type
Description
Priorities with a lower numeric value are chosen first in assessing
delivery options.
CNAME Alias Record
Specifies an alias for a host name. The alias record type requires a
name.
Service Record
Defines services available within a zone, such as LDAP. A service
record requires a name, priority, port, and weight. A lower priority
value indicates precedence. The port value indicates the port on
which the service is available. The weight value is used when multiple
services have the same priority value; a higher weight value indicates
precedence.
HINFO Host Info Record
Specifies optional text information about a host. The host info record
includes CPU and OS information.
TXT Text Record
Associates arbitrary text with a host name. A text record includes name
and text information. This record is used to support record types such
as those used in Sender Policy Framework (SPF) e-mail validation.
Generic Record
The following generic record types are available: A, A6, AAAA, AFSDB,
APL, CAA, CERT, DHCID, DNAME, DS, IPSECKEY, ISDN, KEY, KX,
LOC, MB, MG, MINFO, MR, NS, NSAP, PTR, PX, RP, RT, SINK, SPF,
SSHFP, TLSA, WKS, and X25. These records contain name, type, and
value information.
NAPTR Naming Authority
Pointer Record
Specifies settings for applications, such as VoIP. These records are
used in Address Manager to populate ENUM zones.
Handling dotted resource records
The resource record adder includes two new property parameters, namely, parentZoneName and
linkedParentZoneName. Both parameters should be absolute names. The record absolute name must end
with the zone absolute name; otherwise an exception is thrown, and an error message appears. Record
name is not subset of parent zone: abc.bcn.example.com.
Note: The linkedParentZoneName parameter must be used only for adding or updating the linked
records for CName, MX and SRV records.
The parentZoneName parameter refers to a destination zone for the record to be added to, and applies
to all resource record you add. This parameter makes it possible to support dot-separated record
names. For example, an API user can add a resource record named abc.xyz.example.com to the zone
example.com.
Note: You should not use parentZoneName when updating records, because you cannot change
the parent zone of a record. If you try to do this an exception is thrown.
Example 1:
Suppose the zone example.com has a dot separated host record abc.xyz. A user add a sub-zone
called xyz, and then adds a host record abc to this sub-zone. There are now two host records named
abc.xyz.example.com.
If an API user wants to link a CName record to abc.xyz.example.com, the linked record will be the one
located in the sub-zone, because the user cannot link the record to the one in the parent zone. To allow
API users to choose whatever parent zone they want, use the linkedParentZoneName parameter.
Note: Use this parameter with CName, MX and SRV records. It cannot be used as metadata fields
for these records. If this parameter is used in updating other resource records, an error occurs.
122 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Example 2:
An API entity CName abcName.example.com has the following property string:
ttl=123|absoluteName=abcName.example.com|
linkedRecordName=bcnhost.dot.bcn.com|
An API user wants to change the linked record name to abc.bcn.example.com. The user applies the
following updates to the property string:
linkedParentZoneName=example.com|absoluteName=abcName.example.com|ttl=123|
linkedRec ordName=abc.bcn.example.com|
If the API user does not use the linkedParentZoneName parameter, Address Manager chooses the internal
host record or alias record if it exists; otherwise it chooses the external host record for the linked record.
Generic Resource Records
Each resource record type has a specialized add method, but there are two general methods for adding
resource records in the Address Manager API.
•
•
Add Resource Records on page 123
Add Entity for Resource Records on page 124
Add Resource Records
This method is a generic method for adding resource records of any kind by specifying the name, type, and
rdata arguments.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new resource record.
API Call:
long addResourceRecord( long viewId, String absoluteName, String type, String rdata, long ttl,
String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which the resource record is being added.
absoluteName
The absolute name of the record, specified as an FQDN. If you are adding a
record in a zone that is linked to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#)
sign must be added at the appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the
policy order value, the location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
type
The type of record being added. Valid values for this parameter are the resource
record types shown in Object Types on page 209:
•
•
•
•
•
rdata
AliasRecord
HINFORecord
HostRecord
MXRecord
TXTRecord
Note: To add NAPTRRecord, SRVRecord and GenericRecord,
you must use addNAPTRRecord(), add SRVRecord() and
addGenericRecord() methods respectively.
The data for the resource record in BIND format (for example, for A records, A
10.0.0.4). You can specify either a single IPv4 or IPv6 address for the record.
Version 8.3.0 | 123
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Add Entity for Resource Records
addEntity() is a generic method for adding configurations, DNS zones, and DNS resource records. Use
this method to add resource records that have . (dot) characters in their names.
Note: In order to add DNS resource records to a DNS zone template, you must use the
addEntity() method.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new resource record.
API Call:
long addEntity( long parentId, APIEntity entity )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent zone to which the record is added.
APIEntity
The resource record object being passed to the database.
Move Resource Records
Moves resource records between different zones that already exist.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void moveResourceRecord( long resourceRecordId, String destinationZone )
Parameter
Description
resourceRecordId
The object ID of the resource record to be moved.
destinationZone
Fully qualified domain name of the destination DNS zone to which the resource
record will be moved.
NAPTR Records
NAPTR records specify settings for applications, such as VoIP. Address Manager uses NAPTR records to
populate ENUM zones.
Add NAPTR Record
Adds NAPTR records.
This method will add the record under a zone. In order to add records under templates, you must use Add
Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new NAPTR resource record.
API Call:
long addNAPTRRecord( long viewId, String absoluteName, int order, int preference, String
service, String regexp, String replacement, String flags, long ttl, String properties )
124 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which this record is added.
absoluteName
The FQDN for the record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked
to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
order
Specifies the order in which NAPTR records are read if several are present and
are possible matches. The lower ordervalue takes precedence.
preference
Specifies the order in which NAPTR records are read if the ordervalues are the
same in multiple records. The lower preferencevalue takes precedence.
service
Specifies the service used for the NAPTR record. Valid settings for this
parameter are listed in ENUM Services on page 200.
regexp
A regular expression, enclosed in double quotation marks, used to transform
the client data. If a regular expression is not specified, a domain name must be
specified in the replacement parameter.
replacement
Specifies a domain name as an alternative to the regexp. This parameter
replaces client data with a domain name.
flags
An optional parameter used to set flag values for the record.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update NAPTR Record
A NAPTR record’s name, ttl, comment, order, preference, service, regexp, and replacement properties
can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
NAPTR Record Generic Methods
NAPTR records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
External Host Records
External hosts, specified with an FQDN, represent host names that reside outside the Address Managermanaged servers.
External hosts are never deployed, but act as glue that lets other records (such as MX and CNAME
records) link to hosts that are not managed by Address Manager. Any references within a view that refer
to entities completely outside of the IP space and DNS namespace managed by Address Manager are
defined here.
Add External Host Record
Adds external host records.
This method will add the external host record under a zone. In order to add external host records under
templates, you must use Add Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new external host record.
Version 8.3.0 | 125
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
API Call:
long addExternalHostRecord( long viewId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which this record is being added.
name
The FQDN for the host record.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Get External Host Records associated with IP addresses
Returns an array of external host records that are associated with IPv4 or IPv6 addresses.
You can use the getLinkedEntities() method to retrieve the array of external host records that are
assigned to IP addresses. Use ObjectTypes.ExternalHostRecord to retrieve all linked external host
records with IP addresses. For example:
APIEntity[] linkedEntities = service.getLinkedEntities( ipAddressId,
ObjectTypes.ExternalHostRecord, 0, Integer.MAX_VALUE );
Get IP address assigned with External Host Records
Retrieves IP addresses that are assigned with external host records.
Use the following methods to get the address linked with external host records:
•
•
•
•
getEntityById()
getEntityByName()
getEntities()
getEntitiesByName()
Update External Host Record
An external host record’s name and comment properties can be updated using the generic update()
method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Update External Host Records assigned to IP addresses
You can update external host records that are assigned to IPv4 or IPv6 addresses using the generic
update() method. Refer to the following ptrs property values and example:
•
•
•
null—updates IPv4 or IPv6 address without any change.
empty string ("")—use an empty string ("") for the ptrs property value when updating. This will remove
all linked external host records.
Valid comma-separated external host records string—use a valid string. This will remove previously
linked external host records and link newly specified external host records. The records previously
linked should not be unlinked.
EntityProperties props = new EntityProperties();
props.addProperty( ObjectProperties.ptrs,
"123,exHostFQDN.com,456,exHostFQDN.net" );
service.update( ipAddress );
External Host Record Generic Methods
External host records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
126 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Host Records
A host record, or A record, designates an IP address for a device.
A new host requires a name and an IP address. Multiple addresses may exist for the same device. Set
the time-to-live for this record to an override value here so that the record has a longer or shorter ttl. A
comment field is also included.
Add Host Record
Adds host records for IPv4 or IPv6 addresses. All addresses must be valid addresses.
This method will add the record under a zone. In order to add records under templates, you must use Add
Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
When adding a host record, the reverseRecord property, if not explicitly set in the properties string, is
set to true and Address Manager creates a reverse record automatically. IPv4 addresses can be added
in both workflow and non-workflow mode. IPv6 addresses can be added in non-workflow mode only. For
more information on workflow mode, see Workflow Change Requests on page 182.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new host resource record.
API call:
long addHostRecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, String addresses, long ttl, String
properties)
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which this record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN for the host record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked
to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
addresses
A list of comma-separated IP addresses (for example, 10.0.0.5,130.4.5.2).
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Add Bulk Host Records
Adds host records using auto-increment from the specific starting address.
This method will add the record under a zone. In order to add records under templates, you must use Add
Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
This method adds host records to a zone linked to a DNS naming policy, each with an IP address autoincremented starting from a specific address in a network.
Output / Response
Returns an array of host record APIEntity objects based on available addresses and number of IP
addresses required. If no addresses are available, an error will be shown.
API call:
APIEntity[] addBulkHostRecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, long ttl, long
networkId, String startAddress, int numberOfAddresses, String properties)
Version 8.3.0 | 127
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which this record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN for the host record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked
to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
networkId
The network which to get the available IP addresses. Each address is used for
one host record.
startAddress
The starting IPv4 address for getting the available addresses.
numberOfAddresses
The number of addresses.
properties
excludeDHCPRange=true/false, if true then IP addresses within a DHCP
range will be skipped. This argument can also contain user-defined fields.
Get Host Record by Hint
Returns an array of objects with host record type.
Output / Response
Returns an array of host record APIEntity objects.
API call:
APIEntity[] getHostRecordsByHint ( int start, int count, String options)
Parameter
Description
start
Indicates where in the list of objects to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
Indicates the maximum of child objects that this method will return. The value
must be less than or equal to 10.
options
A string containing options. The supported options are hint and retrieveFields.
Multiple options can be separated by a | (pipe) character. For example:
hint=^abc|retrieveFields=false
If the hint option is not specified in the string, searching criteria will be based on
the same as zone host record. The following wildcards are supported in the hint
option.
•
•
•
•
•
^—matches the beginning of a string. For example: ^ex matches example
but not text.
$—matches the end of a string. For example: ple$ matches example but not
please.
^ $—matches the exact characters between the two wildcards. For example:
^example$ only matches example.
?—matches any one character. For example: ex?t matches exit.
*—matches one or more characters within a string. For example: ex*t
matches exit and excellent.
The default value for the retrieveFields option is set to false. If the option is set
to true, user-defined field will be returned. If the options string does not contain
retrieveFields, user-defined field will not be returned.
128 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Get IP Address with Host Records
Returns an array of IP addresses with linked records and the IP addresses that are assigned as DHCP
Reserved, Static or Gateway.
Output / Response
Returns an array of IP address APIEntity objects with their linked host records and the IP addresses
that are assigned as DHCP Reserved, Static or Gateway. The output has the following format:
hostId:hostName:zoneId:zoneName:viewId:viewName:hasAlias;.
API call:
APIEntity[] getNetworkLinkedProperties ( long networkId )
Parameter
Description
networkId
The object ID for the IPv4 network.
Get Dependent Records
Returns any CNAME, MX, or SRV resource records that reference the specified host record.
Note: This method is deprecated. Using this method now returns an error message. Use the
getLinkedEntities() method instead. For more information, see Get Linked Entities on page
53.
Output / Response
Returns an array of APIEntity objects representing the CNAME, MS, or SRV records referencing the
specified host record.
API call:
APIEntity[] getDependentRecords ( long entityId, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the host record for which you want to retrieve dependent
records.
start
Indicates where in the list of dependent records to start returning objects. This
list begins at an index of 0.
count
The maximum number of dependent records to return.
Update Host Record
A host records’s name, ttl, comment, and addresses properties can be updated using the generic
update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Host Record Generic Methods
Host records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Alias Records
This is a Canonical Name or CNAME record, used to specify an alias for a host name.
The alias record type requires only a name to be supplied. The time-to-live for this record can be set to an
override value so that this record has a longer or shorter ttl. A comment field is also included.
Version 8.3.0 | 129
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Add Alias Record
Adds alias records.
This method attempts to link to an existing host record. If an existing host record cannot be located, the
method attempts to link to an existing external host record. If neither can be located, the method fails. This
method will add the record under a zone. In order to add records under templates, you must use Add Entity
for Resource Records on page 124.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new alias resource record.
API call:
long addAliasRecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, String linkedRecordName, long ttl,
String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which this record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN of the alias. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked to
a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
linkedRecordName
The name of the record to which this alias will link.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Get Aliases by Hint
Returns an array of CNAMEs with linked record name.
Output / Response
Returns an array of Alias APIEntity objects.
API call:
APIEntity[] getAliasesByHint ( int start, int count, String options )
Parameter
Description
start
indicates where in the list of objects to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
indicates the maximum of child objects that this method will return. The value
must be less than or equal to 10.
options
a string containing options. The supported options are hintand retrieveFields.
Multiple options can be separated by a | (pipe) character. For example:
hint=^abc|retrieveFields=false
If the hint option is not specified in the string, searching criteria will be based on
the same as zone alias. The following wildcards are supported in the hint option.
•
•
130 | Address Manager API Guide
^—matches the beginning of a string. For example: ^ex matches example
but not text.
$—matches the end of a string. For example: ple$ matches example but not
please.
DNS
Parameter
Description
•
•
•
^ $—matches the exact characters between the two wildcards. For example:
^example$ only matches example.
?—matches any one character. For example: ex?t matches exit.
*—matches one or more characters within a string. For example: ex*t
matches exit and excellent.
The default value for the retrieveFields option is set to false. If the option is set
to true, user-defined field will be returned. If the options string does not contain
retrieveFields, user-defined field will not be returned.
Update Alias Record
An alias record’s name, ttl, comment, and linked record properties can be updated using the generic
update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Alias Record Generic Methods
Alias records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Text Records
Text records associate arbitrary text with a host name.
This record features name and text fields and is used to support record types such as those used in SPF
email validation. The time-to-live for this record can be set to an override value here so that this record has
a longer or shorter ttl. A comment field is also included.
Add Text Record
Adds TXT records.
This method will add the record under a zone. To add records under templates, you must use Add Entity
for Resource Records on page 124.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new TXT record.
API call:
long addTXTRecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, String txt, long ttl, String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which the record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN of the text record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked
to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
txt
The text data for the record.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Version 8.3.0 | 131
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Update Text Record
A text record’s name, ttl, comment, and text data properties can be updated using the generic update()
method. For more information, see Updating Objects on page 52.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Text Record Generic Methods
Text records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
HINFO Records
The Host Info or HINFO resource record contains optional text information about a host.
The standard version of this record has name, cpu and os fields. The time-to-live for this record can be set
to an override value here so that it has a longer or shorter ttl. A comment field is also included. This record
type is a good candidate for user-defined fields to track information about hosts on the network.
Add HINFO Record
Adds HINFO records.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new HINFO resource record.
API call:
long addHINFORecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, String cpu, String os, long ttl, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which the HINFO record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN of the HINFO record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is
linked to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at
the appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
cpu
A string providing central processing unit information.
os
A string providing operating system information.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update HINFO Record
An HINFO record’s name, ttl, comment, cpu, and os properties can be updated using the generic
update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
HINFO Record Generic Methods
HINFO records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
132 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
MX Records
A Mail Exchanger or MX record designates the host name and preference value for a mail server or
exchanger, as defined in RFC 974.
An MX Record requires a name and a priority value. Priorities with a lower numeric value are chosen first
in assessing delivery options. The time-to-live for this record can be set to an override value, so that this
record has a longer or shorter ttl. A comment field is also included. This method attempts to link to an
existing host record. If an existing host record cannot be located, the method attempts to link to an existing
external host record. If neither can be located, the method fails.
Add MX Record
Adds MX records.
This method will add the record under a zone. In order to add records under templates, you must use Add
Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new MX resource record.
API call:
long addMXRecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, int priority, String linkedRecordName,
long ttl, String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which the MX record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN for the record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked
to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
priority
Specifies which mail server to send clients to first when multiple matching MX
records are present. Multiple MX records with equal priority values are referred
to in a round-robin fashion.
linkedRecordName
The FQDN of the host record to which this MX record is linked.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update MX Record
An MX record’s name, ttl, comment, linked record, and priority properties can be updated using the
generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
MX Record Generic Methods
MX records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
SRV Records
Service records define services that are available within the zone, such as LDAP.
An SRV record requires a name by which it is known in Address Manager. The time-to-live for this record
can be set to an override value here so that this record has a longer or shorter ttl. A comment field is
Version 8.3.0 | 133
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
also included. This method attempts to link to an existing host record. If an existing host record cannot
be located, the method attempts to link to an existing external host record. If neither can be located, the
method fails.
Add SRV Record
Adds SRV records.
This method will add the record under a zone. In order to add records under templates, you must use Add
Entity for Resource Records on page 124.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new SRV record.
API call:
long addSRVRecord ( long viewId, String absoluteName, int priority, int port, int weight, String
linkedRecordName, long ttl, String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which the SRV record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN of the SRV record. If you are adding a record in a zone that
is linked to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be
added at the appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy
order value, the location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
priority
Specifies which SRV record to use when multiple matching SRV records
are present. The record with the lowest value takes precedence.
port
The TCP/UDP port on which the service is available.
weight
If two matching SRV records within a zone have equal priority, the weight
value is checked. If the weight value for one object is higher than the other,
the record with the highest weight has its resource records returned first.
linkedRecordName
The FQDN of the host record to which this SRV record is linked.
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update SRV Record
An SRV record’s name, ttl, comment, linked record, priority, port, and weight properties can be
updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
SRV Record Generic Methods
SRV records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Start of Authority Records
Start of Authority (SOA) records are used to define administrative information relating to particular zones.
Add Start of Authority Record
Adds SOA records.
Output / Response
134 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Returns the object ID for the new SOA record.
API call:
long addStartOfAuthority ( long parentId, String email, long refresh, long retry, long
expire, long minimum, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the SOA record.
email
Specifies the email address of the administrator for the zones to which the
SOA applies.
refresh
The amount of time that a slave server waits before attempting to refresh
zone files from the master server. This is specified in seconds using a 32bit integer value. RFC 1912 recommends a value between 1200 and 4300
seconds.
retry
Specifies the amount of time that the slave server should wait before reattempting a zone transfer from the master server after the refresh value
has expired. This is specified as a number of seconds using a 32-bit integer
value.
expire
Specifies the length of time that a slave server will use a non-updated set
of zone data before it stops sending queries. This is specified as a number
of seconds using a 32-bit integer. RFC 1912 recommends a value from
1209600 to 2419200 seconds or 2 to 4 weeks.
minimum
Specifies the maximum amount of time that a negative cache response is
held in cache. A negative cache response is a response to a DNS query
that does not return an IP address (a failed request). Until this value expires,
queries for this DNS record return an error. The maximum value for this field
is 10800 seconds, or 3 hours.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields. The
supported properties are time-to-live (TTL), primary server (mname) and
serial number format (serialNumberFormat). To override the default TTL
value for SOA records, use ObjectProperties.ttl=”” in the properties
string.
Update Start of Authority Record
Use the generic update() method to update an SOA record.
The following properties of an SOA record can be updated using the generic update() method:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
name
email
refresh
retry
expire
minimum
mname
serialNumberFormat
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Start of Authority Record Generic Methods
SOA records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
Version 8.3.0 | 135
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Generic Records
Use the generic resource record methods to add and update the following resource record types: A6,
AAAA, AFSDB, APL, CAA, CERT, DNAME, DNSKEY, DS, ISDN, KEY, KX, LOC, MB, MG, MINFO, MR,
NS, NSAP, PX, RP, RT, SINK, SSHFP, TLSA, WKS, and X25.
The fields available are name, type (which defines the custom record type), and data (the rdata value for
the custom type). The time-to-live for this record can be set to an override value, so the record has a longer
or shorter ttl. A comment field is also included.
Add Generic Record
Adds Generic records.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new generic resource record.
API call:
long addGenericRecord (long viewId, String absoluteName, String type, String rdata, long ttl,
String properties )
Parameter
Description
viewId
The object ID for the parent view to which the record is being added.
absoluteName
The FQDN of the record. If you are adding a record in a zone that is linked
to a incremental Naming Policy, a single hash (#) sign must be added at the
appropriate location in the FQDN. Depending on the policy order value, the
location of the single hash (#) sign varies.
type
The type of record being added. Valid settings for this parameter are the
generic resource record types supported in Address Manager: A6, AAAA,
AFSDB, APL, CAA, CERT, DNAME, DNSKEY, DS, ISDN, KEY, KX, LOC,
MB, MG, MINFO, MR, NS, NSAP, PX, RP, RT, SINK, SSHFP, TLSA, WKS,
and X25.
rdata
The data for the resource record in BIND format (for example, for A records,
10.0.0.4).
ttl
The time-to-live value for the record. To ignore the ttl, set this value to -1.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update Generic Record
A generic record’s name, type, rdata, ttl, and comment properties can be updated using the generic
update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Generic Record Generic Methods
Generic records use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
DNS Options
DNS options define the deployment of Address Manager DNS services. Address Manager supports most
of the options used by both BIND and Microsoft DNS.
136 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
For options that are not directly supported by Address Manager, you can use the raw deployment option.
For more information, refer to Add Raw Deployment Option on page 144 and Update Raw Deployment
Option on page 145.
Add DNS Option
Adds DNS options.
Output / Response
Returns long type and represents the database object ID of the newly added DNS deployment option.
API Call:
long addDNSDeploymentOption( long entityId, String name, String value, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which this deployment option is being added.
name
The name of the DNS option being added. This name must be one of the
constants listed in DNS Options on page 197.
value
The value being assigned to the option.
properties
Note: Depending on the type of DNS deployment option being
added, the format of the value input might differ. For more
information, refer to Reference: DNS Option value formats on page
138.
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Get DNS Option
Retrieves all DNS options assigned for the object specified excluding the options inherited from the higherlevel parent object.
Output / Response
Returns an instance of the type APIDeploymentOption that represents the DNS deployment option or
empty if none were found.
API Call:
APIDeploymentOption getDNSDeploymentOption( long entityId, String name, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which this deployment option is assigned.
name
The name of the DNS option. This name must be one of the constants
listed in DNS Options on page 197.
serverId
Note: Depending on the type of DNS deployment option
being retrieved, the format of the value might differ. For more
information, refer to Reference: DNS Option value formats on
page 138.
Specifies the server or server group to which this option is assigned. To
retrieve an option that has not been assigned to a server role, set this
value to 0(zero). Omitting this parameter from the method call will result in
an error.
Version 8.3.0 | 137
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Update DNS Option
Updates DNS options.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void updateDNSDeploymentOption( APIDeploymentOption option )
Parameter
Description
option
The object ID of the DNS option to be updated.
Delete DNS Option
Deletes DNS options.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void deleteDNSDeploymentOption( long entityId, String name, long serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which the deployment option is assigned.
name
The name of the DNS option being deleted. This name must be one of the
constants listed in DNS Options on page 197.
serverId
Specifies the server or server group to which the option is assigned. To
delete an option that has not been assigned to a server role, set this value
to 0(zero). Omitting this parameter from the method call will result in an
error.
Reference: DNS Option value formats
The input and output value formats for DNS Option API methods.
When performing an add operation of DNS deployment options, the value input is in double quotation
marks (""). For example, adding a Lame TTL DNS deployment option with a value of "300" using the
addDNSDeploymentOption API method to Address Manager would look similar to the following:
Input
long optId = service.addDNSDeploymentOption(100977, DNSOptions.LAME_TTL,
"300", "");
Similarly, retrieving a Lame TTL DNS deployment option with a value of "300" using the
getDeploymentOptions API method would return values similar to the following:
Output
{
"id": 100977,
"type": "DNS",
"name": "lame-ttl",
"value": "300",
"properties": "inherited=false|"
138 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
}
Exception - When performing an add, update, or get API call with the Root Hints (CACHE) DNS
deployment option, the value input is in double quotation marks and braces ("{}"). For example, adding
a Root Hint DNS deployment option with a specified name value of "admin.corp" and IP address of
172.25.19.53 using the addDNSDeploymentOption API method would look similar to the following:
Input
logn optId = service.addDNSDeploymentOption(100977, DNSOptions.CACHE,
"{admin.corp,172.25.19.53}","");
Similarly, retrieving a Root Hint DNS deployment option with a specified name value of "admin.corp" and IP
address of 172.25.19.53 using the getDeploymentOption API method would return values similar to the
following:
Output
{
}
"id": 100977,
"type": "DNS",
"name": "cache",
"value": "{admin.corp,172.25.19.53}",
"properties": "inherited=false|"
Note: When adding a Root Hint DNS deployment option with the value of "Auto", the value defined
in the add API method must be empty double quotation marks and braces ("{}"). Similarly, when
performing a get API method of DNS deployment options where the Root Hint has a value of
"Auto", the value returned is empty double quotation marks and braces ("{}").
DNS Raw Option
The DNS raw option allows you to add options to the DNS service in a raw format that gets passed to the
service when deployed. Address Manager does not perform any data checking on raw options. You must
ensure that the syntax for these options is correct.
Raw options assigned to a parent object are not inherited by child objects. For example, an option set at a
parent zone is not inherited by a child zone. However, raw options assigned to a server group are inherited
only by the servers that are linked to that server group.
DNS raw options can be set at the following levels:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Server
Server group
DNS View
DNS zone
Root zone
ENUM zone
Zone template
IPv4 block
IPv4 network
IPv4 network template
IPv6 block
IPv6 network
Note: DNS raw options cannot be configured for Windows servers.
Version 8.3.0 | 139
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
To add or update DNS raw deployment options, refer to Add Raw Deployment Option on page 144 and
Update Raw Deployment Option on page 145.
DNS Response Policies
The Response Policies feature allows users to manage a recursive DNS resolver attempting to respond to
the queries that might not be desirable or legal.
You can set the types of response policies based on your needs and deploy to a DNS server managed
under Address Manager. By setting up these response policies, you can block, redirect, or allow particular
domain name queries that you wish to and must prevent. For example:
•
•
If you are a corporate user and want to prevent employees from being connected to any harmful
website, you can setup the response policies and block these harmful websites so that they does not
return the query response or the employees can simply be redirected to an appropriate website.
If you need to follow a government regulation that mandates certain DNS blocking, the response
policies can be used to implement this requirement.
There are three different types of response policies that can be set based on user requirements:
Blacklist
Matching items in the list of blacklist object return an NXDomain result.
Blackhole
Matching items in this response policy object return a NOERROR result with no answers.
Whitelist
Matching items in this response policy object are excluded from further processing.
Add Response Policy
Adds a DNS response policy.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new DNS response policy added.
API Call:
long addResponsePolicy( long configurationId, String name, String responsePolicyType,
long ttl, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration to which the response policy is being added.
name
The name of the DNS response policy being added.
responsePolicyType
The type of response policy being added. The available values are BLACKLIST,
BLACKHOLE and WHITELIST.
Note: The responsePolicyType values need to be in CAPITAL letters.
ttl
The time-to-live value in seconds.
properties
A string containing options, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update Response Policy
A response policy’s name, ttl and responsePolicyType properties can be updated using the generic
update() method.
For more information, refer to Updating Objects on page 50.
140 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Response Policy Generic Methods
Response policy uses the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Upload Response Policy Item
Uploads one response policy file containing a list of fully qualified domain names (FQDNs).
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void uploadResponsePolicyItems( long parentId, byte[] policyItemsData )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent response policy under which the response policy
item file is being uploaded.
policyItemsData
The file to be uploaded under the response policy. This file is passed to
Address Manager as a byte array.
Note: This actual file size should be no more than 75 MB.
Search Response Policies
Searches Response Policy items configured in local Response Policies or predefined BlueCat Security
feed data. The search will return a list of all matching items in Address Manager across all configurations.
Use this method to fetch response policy items and their associated properties or objects such as
Response Policy, RP Zone, Threat Protection category for feed data, policy type and the parent
configuration.
Output / Response
Returns an array of ResponsePolicySearchResult objects. Each object contains information of one
Response Policy item found either in local Response Policies or BlueCat Security feed data.
API Call:
ResponsePolicySearchResult[] searchResponsePolicyItems( String keyword, String scope,
int start, int count, String properties )
Parameter
Description
keyword
The search string for which you wish to search.
•
•
•
scope
^—matches the beginning of a string. For example: ^ex matches example
but not text.
$—matches the end of string. For example: ple$ matches example but not
please.
*—matches zero or more characters within a string. For example: ex*t
matches exit and excellent.
The scope in which the search is to be performed. The possible values are:
•
•
RPItemSearchScope.LOCAL—to search policy items configured in local
Response Policies.
RPItemSearchScope.FEED—to search policy items configured in
predefined BlueCat Security Feed data.
Version 8.3.0 | 141
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
•
RPItemSearchScope.ALL—to search policy items configured in both local
Response Policies and predefined BlueCat Security Feed data.
start
A starting number from where the search result will be returned. The possible
value is a positive integer ranging from 0 to 999. For example, specifying 99 will
return the search result from the 100th result to the maximum number that you
specify with the count option.
count
The total number of results to be returned. The possible value is a positive
integer ranging from 1 to 1000.
properties
Reserved for future use. Use an empty string ("") for now.
Reverse zone name format
Address Manager creates the reverse zone and reverse zone structure automatically when deploying a
DNS deployment role configuration to DNS/DHCP Server.
Previously, only one reverse zone format was supported and this resulted in issues when importing an
existing reverse zone that did not follow the default Address Manager format. Because there are number
of other acceptable formats that can be used to generate reverse DNS zones, Address Manager now
supports setting a custom reverse zone format.
Add Reverse Zone Name Format
Adds custom DNS reverse zone name formats.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new DNS reverse zone name format added.
API Call:
long addDNSDeploymentOption( long entityId, String name, String value, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the entity to which this deployment option is being added.
name
The name must be DNSOptions.CLASSLESS_REVERSE_ZONE_FORMAT or
“classless-reverse-zoneformat”.
value
The following values are supported:
•
•
•
•
•
properties
142 | Address Manager API Guide
ReverseZoneFormatType.STARTIP_NETMASK_NET or "[start-ip]-[netmask].[net].inaddr.arpa"
ReverseZoneFormatType.STARTIP_ENDIP_NET or "[start-ip]-[end-ip].
[net].in-addr.arpa"
ReverseZoneFormatType.STARTIP_SLASH_NETMASK_NET or "[start-ip]/
[netmask].[net].in-addr.arpa"
ReverseZoneFormatType.STARTIP_SLASH_ENDIP_NET or "[start-ip]/[endip].[net].inaddr.arpa"
ReverseZoneFormatType.CUSTOM +
ReverseZoneFormatType.SEPARATOR + "[customformat-value]" or
“custom:”
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Deployment options
Deployment options
Deployment is the process by which the configuration in Address Manager becomes a running set of
services on Address Manager-managed servers, and Deployment Options define the deployment of
Address Manager DNS and DHCP services.
Deployment options can be applied at many different levels within a configuration such as server, block,
network, DNS Views, or DNS Zones level.
Getting deployment options
This is the generic API method for getting Deployment options for Address Manager DNS and DHCP
services.
Get Deployment Options
Retrieves deployment options for Address Manager DNS and DHCP services.
Output / Response
Returns all deployment options assigned to the specified object including inherited options from higherlevel parent objects. If an option is inherited and overridden, then only the overriding option will be
returned.
Note: Multiple raw options with long values can cause longer than normal processing time when
returning the values.
API Call:
APIDeploymentOption[] getDeploymentOptions( long entityId, String optionTypes, long
serverId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the DNS or DHCP deployment option is
assigned.
optionTypes
The type of deployment options. Multiple options can be separated by a | (pipe)
character. This value must be one of the following items:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
DNSOption
DNSRawOption
DHCPRawOption
DHCPV6RawOption
DHCPV4ClientOption
DHCPV6ClientOption
DHCPServiceOption
DHCPV6ServiceOption
VendorClientOption
StartOfAuthority
For complete list of Option Types and Object Types constants, refer to Option
Types on page 211 and Object Types on page 209.
•
If Invalid deployment option types or invalid strings are specified, the API
execution will fail and return the error message: "Invalid deployment option
found". For example, if the user passes DHCPv6ClientOption for IPv4
networks, it will return this error message as DHCPv6 client options are not a
valid for IPv4 networks.
Version 8.3.0 | 143
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
•
•
serverId
If specified as an empty string (""), all deployment options for the specified
entity will be returned.
Depending on the type of DNS deployment option being retrieved, the format
of the value might differ. For more information, refer to Reference: DNS
Option value formats on page 138.
The specific server or server group to which options are deployed. The valid
values are as follows:
•
•
•
>0—returns only the options that are linked to the specified server ID.
<0—returns all options regardless of the server ID specified.
=0—returns only the options that are linked to all servers.
Raw deployment option
This is the generic API method for adding and updating raw deployment option to DNS and DHCP services
in a raw format.
The raw option allows you to add DNS or DHCP options that are not directly supported by Address
Manager.
A raw option is passed to the DNS or DHCP service on the managed server exactly as you type it in the
rawData parameter. Therefore, it is essential that you enter the data with the correct syntax. There is no
error checking or data checking on the raw option .
Add Raw Deployment Option
Adds deployment options to DNS or DHCP services in a raw format that will be passed to the service when
deployed.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the newly added Raw option.
API Call:
long addRawDeploymentOptions( long parentId, String optionTypes, String rawData, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the entity to which the DNS or DHCP raw deployment option is
assigned.
optionType
The type of the raw deployment option being assigned. This value must be one
of the following items:
•
•
•
DNS_RAW
DHCP_RAW
DHCPV6_RAW
For complete list of Option Types constants, refer to Option Types on page
211.
rawData
144 | Address Manager API Guide
The raw option value. The maximum supported characters are 65,536. The
raw option will be passed to the DNS or DHCP service on the managed server
exactly as you enter here. Therefore, it is essential that you enter the data with
the correct syntax.
TFTP
Parameter
Description
properties
Adds object properties, including associated server and server group, and userdefined fields.
Update Raw Deployment Option
Updates raw deployment options.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
long updateRawDeploymentOptions( APIDeploymentOption option )
Parameter
Description
option
The DNS or DHCP raw option object to be updated.
TFTP
Address Manager uses Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP) to provide configuration files to end-point
devices.
TFTP Groups
TFTP files are organized into a list of tree structures. Each tree has a root, called a TFTP group. The
leaves of this tree are files, and the nodes of the tree are folders. TFTP groups are child objects of
configurations. Each tree structure reflects the directory structure on a target TFTP server.
Add TFTP Group
Adds TFTP groups.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new TFTP group.
API Call:
long addTFTPGroup( long configurationId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration to which the TFTP group is being added.
name
The name of the TFTP group.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update TFTP Group
A TFTP group’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
TFTP Group Generic Methods
TFTP groups use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
Version 8.3.0 | 145
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
TFTP Folders
TFTP folders are used to create the directory structure on the TFTP server.
Add TFTP Folder
Adds TFTP folders.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new TFTP folder.
API Call:
long addTFTPFolder( long parentId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the TFTP folder. The parent is either a
TFTP group or another TFTP folder object.
name
The name of the TFTP folder.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update TFTP Folder
A TFTP folder’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
TFTP Folder Generic Methods
TFTP folders use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
TFTP Files
TFTP files contain configuration information that is passed to the client end-point devices to be configured.
Add TFTP File
Adds TFTP files.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new TFTP file.
API Call:
long addTFTPFile( long parentId, String name, String version, byte[] data, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent object of the TFTP file. The parent will always be a
TFTP folder.
name
The name of the TFTP file.
version
The version of the file. This parameter is optional.
146 | Address Manager API Guide
Servers and Deployment
Parameter
Description
data
The file to be uploaded and distributed to clients by TFTP. The file is passed to
Address Manager as a byte array.
properties
Adds object properties, including comments and user-defined fields.
Update TFTP File
A TFTP file’s name, version, and description properties can be updated using the generic update()
method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
TFTP File Generic Methods
TFTP files use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Servers and Deployment
Address Manager deploys settings and services separately from designing and configuring the actual
services.
Server objects must be added to Address Manager, and then server roles can associate various DNS,
DHCP, and TFTP services to the servers on which they will run. Deployment can be scheduled within
the Address Manager interface, but only immediate deployments can be performed through the Address
Manager API.
Servers
To use a DNS/DHCP Server with Address Manager, you must add the server to the Address Manager
configuration.
This involves providing information in the Add Server screen, and then connecting to the server, or using
the addServer() method. A successful connection places the DNS/DHCP Server under the control of
Address Manager and disables the native DNS/DHCP Server command server agent. As a result, the
server is no longer managed through the DNS/DHCP Server Management Console and responds only to
commands from Address Manager.
Servers are added to a Address Manager configuration so that services can be deployed to them using
deployment roles and server options. Servers can be added with the API or in the Address Manager
GUI without connecting to them if the server objects need to be created and configured before the actual
servers are available. The method described here adds the server to a Address Manager configuration
only, and does not connect to the server.
Before deploying a configuration, you must connect to servers added using this method or using the
Address Manager web interface. For more information about connecting to existing servers using the
Address Manager web interface refer to the Address Manager Administration Guide and the online
help. Server control is available through the Address Manager web interface and the Address Manager
Administration Console.
Address Manager v8.0.0 and greater, and DNS/DHCP Server v7.0.0 and greater feature support
for dedicated management on multi-interface DNS/DHCP Server appliances (DNS/DHCP Server
hardware models 1900, 1925, and 1950). These DNS/DHCP Server appliances include support for three
interface ports (Services, XHA, Management) and four interface ports (Services, XHA, Management, and
Redundancy through port bonding: eth0 + eth3).
Version 8.3.0 | 147
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Note: The procedure for configuring a DNS/DHCP Server and adding it to Address Manager will
vary according to the number of interfaces on your DNS/DHCP Server appliance, and the number
of interfaces that you wish to utilize.
The following table describes the interfaces that are being used by different types of DNS/DHCP Server:
Number of ports
eth0
eth1
eth2
eth3
2
Services /
Management
XHA
N/A
N/A
3
Services
XHA
Dedicated
Management
N/A
4
Services
XHA
Dedicated
Management
Redundancy
Note: If you are using multi-port DNS/DHCP Server appliances and want to use dedicated
management, you must enable it from the Administration Console before adding a DNS/DHCP
Server to Address Manager.
Add Server
Adds servers to Address Manager.
Note: Existing customers who have upgraded their Address Manager API to v8.0.0 or greater
may need to update their API calls to add a server with dedicated management enabled. For more
information, refer to KB-939.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new server.
API Call:
long addServer ( long configurationId, string name, string defaultInterfaceAddress, string
fullHostName, string profile, string properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration to which the server is being added.
name
The name of the server within Address Manager.
defaultInterfaceAddress
The physical IP address for the server within Address Manager.
fullHostName
The DNS FQDN by which the server is referenced.
profile
The server capability profile. The profile describes the type of server
or appliance being added and determines the services that can be
deployed to this server. This must be one of the constants found in Server
Capability Profiles on page 213.
properties
A string containing the following options:
•
•
•
148 | Address Manager API Guide
connected—either true or false; indicates whether or not to connect to
a server. In order to add and configure multi-port DNS/DHCP Servers,
this option must be set to true. If false, other interface property options
will be ignored.
upgrade—indicates whether or not to apply the latest version of DNS/
DHCP Server software once the appliance is under Address Manager
control. The value is either true or false (by default, true).
password—the server password (by default, bluecat).
Servers and Deployment
Parameter
Description
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
servicesIPv4Address—IPv4 address used only for services traffic
such as DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6, and TFTP. If dedicated management
is enabled, this option must be specified.
servicesIPv4Netmask—IPv4 netmask used only for services traffic
such as DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6, and TFTP. If dedicated management
is enabled, this option must be specified.
servicesIPv6Address—IPv6 address used only for services traffic
such as DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6, and TFTP. This is optional.
servicesIPv6Subnet—IPv6 subnet used only for services traffic such
as DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6, and TFTP. This is optional.
xhaIPv4Address—IPv4 address used for XHA. This is optional.
xhaIPv4Netmask—IPv4 netmask used for XHA. This is optional.
redundancyScenario—networking redundancy scenarios. The
possible values are ACTIVE_BACKUP (Failover) and IEEE_802_3AD
(Load Balancing).
The following properties only apply to the Windows server:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
ProteusDDW—enter the object ID of the DDW server.
readOnly—indicates if the Windows server is added in read-only
mode. The value is either true or false (by default, true). If set to false,
the server will be added in read-write mode.
enableDNS—indicates if DNS is enabled. The value is either true or
false (by default, true).
enableDHCP—indicates if DHCP is enabled. The value is either true
or false (by default, true).
importViewName—enter a View name for the Windows server. When
you manage Windows DNS from Address Manager, you must specify
a DNS View. Only DNS records contained in this View are deployed.
This is mandatory if enableDNS is set to true.
authenticationCredentialDomain—enter the domain name of the
Windows Active Directory domain to which this server belongs. If the
server is not a member of a domain, enter the server’s NETBIOS
computer name.
authenticationCredentialUsername—enter the username for the
Windows server.
authenticationCredentialPassword—enter the user password for the
Windows server.
Note: For DNS/DHCP Servers without multi-port support, the
interface-related property options will be ignored.
Import Server
Imports Windows DNS or DHCP services from Managed Windows servers.
Output / Response
Returns void.
API Call:
void importServer( long serverId, boolean importDns, boolean importDhcp, string properties
)
Version 8.3.0 | 149
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
serverId
The object ID of the server that needs to be imported.
Note: You must set at least one of the following Boolean parameters,
but you cannot set both of them to False.
importDns
Imports DNS service if true.
importDhcp
Imports DHCP service if true.
properties
Reserved for future use.
Replace Server
Allows you to replace a server.
Output / Response
Replaces the server using the existing server ID.
API Call:
void replaceServer( long serverId, string name, string defaultInterface, string hostName,
string password, boolean upgrade, string properties )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The object ID of the server that needs to be replaced.
name
Name of the server to be replaced.
defaultInterface
Management interface address for the server.
hostName
The DNS FQDN by which the server is referenced.
password
The server password (by default, bluecat).
upgrade
Flag indicating that server needs to be upgraded or not. True means server
needs to be upgraded.
properties
A string containing the following options:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
150 | Address Manager API Guide
servicesIPv4Address—IPv4 address used only for services traffic such
as DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6 and TFTP. If dedicated management is enabled,
this option must be specified. If dedicated management is disabled, this
address must be the same as defaultInterfaceAddress which is management
interface address.
servicesIPv4Netmask—IPv4 netmask used only for services traffic such as
DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6 and TFTP. If dedicated management is enabled, this
option must be specified. If dedicated management is disabled, this netmask
address must be the same as the management interface netmask address.
servicesIPv6Address—IPv6 address used only for services traffic such as
DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6 and TFTP. This is optional.
servicesIPv6Subnet—IPv6 subnet used only for services traffic such as
DNS, DHCP, DHCPv6 and TFTP. This is optional.
xhaIPv4Address—IPv4 address used for XHA. This is optional.
xhaIPv4Netmask—IPv4 netmask used for XHA. This is optional.
redundancyScenario—networking redundancy scenarios. The possible
values are ACTIVE_BACKUP (Failover) and IEEE_802_3AD (Load
Balancing).
Servers and Deployment
Parameter
Description
•
resetServices—allows you to replace the DNS/DHCP Server while
maintaining existing configurations for DNS, DHCP, and TFTP services.
Define this option only if you have modified the IPv4 or IPv6 addresses of
the Services interface or wish to reset configurations for DNS, DHCP, and
TFTP services on the DNS/DHCP Server. The value is either true or false
(by default, false).
Note: For DNS/DHCP Servers without multi-port support, the interfacerelated property options will be ignored.
!
Caution: Resetting DNS/DHCP Servers will result in a service outage.
This service outage will last until you have deployed services to the
replacement system. Only reset DNS/DHCP Server services if you are
replacing the DNS/DHCP Server with a new appliance of a different
type and/or reconfiguring the IPv4 or IPv6 addresses of the Services
interface on the appliance. BlueCat recommends that you schedule a
maintenance window before performing a reset of DNS/DHCP Server
services.
Deploy Server
Deploys servers. When this method is invoked, the server is immediately deployed.
Output / Response
None.
Deployment is the process through which the configuration created in Address Manager becomes a
running set of services on the Address Manager-managed servers. Deployment takes account of the
IP, DHCP, and DNS design determined during configuration. This is represented by a set of service
configuration files deployed to the servers.
API Call:
void deployServer( long serverId )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The object ID of the server to be deployed.
Deploy Server Configuration
Allows you to deploy specific configuration(s) to a particular server.
Output / Response
Deploys specific configuration(s) to a particular server.
API Call:
void deployServerConfig( long serverId, String properties )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The database object ID of the server that will immediately be deployed.
properties
A string containing property names. The property names available
in the ObjectProperties are ObjectProperties.services, and
Version 8.3.0 | 151
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
ObjectProperties.forceDNSFullDeployment. Multiple options can be separated
by a | (pipe) character. For example:
ObjectProperties.services=DNS|forceDNSFullDeployment=true
The values for properties are:
•
•
services—the name of the valid service configuration that needs to
be deployed. These are the valid values for the services: DNS, DHCP,
DHCPv6, and TFTP.
forceDNSFullDeployment—a boolean value. set to true to perform a full
DNS deployment. Omit this parameter from the method call to perform a
differential deployment.
Deploy Server Services
Allows you to deploys specific service(s) to a particular server.
Output / Response
Deploys specific service(s) to a particular server.
API Call:
void deployServerServices( long serverId, String services )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The database object ID of the server for which deployment services to be
deployed.
services
The name of the valid services to be deployed. Specify multiple services using a
comma (,). The valid format is services=DNS,DHCP,TFTP.
Quick Deployment
Allows you to instantly deploy changes you made to DNS resource records made since the last full or quick
deployment. This function applies only to DNS resource records that you have changed and does not
deploy any other data.
Output / Response
Instantly deploys changes to DNS resource records made since the last full deployment or quick
deployment.
API Call:
void quickDeploy( long entityId, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the DNS zone or network for which deployment service needs
to be deployed.
properties
A string containing the services option. It can also be empty.
•
152 | Address Manager API Guide
services—the name of the valid service that need to be deployed. The only
valid service name for quick deployment is DNS. Any other service names
will throw an error.
Servers and Deployment
Deployment Status
Returns the server's deployment status.
Output / Response
Returns status code for deployment of a particular server. These are the possible returning code values:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
EXECUTING = -1
INITIALIZING = 0
QUEUED = 1
CANCELLED = 2
FAILED = 3
NOT_DEPLOYED = 4
WARNING = 5
INVALID = 6
DONE = 7
NO_RECENT_DEPLOYMENT = 8
API Call:
int getServerDeploymentStatus( long serverId, String properties )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The object ID of the server whose deployment status needs to be checked.
properties
Ignore this for now. The valid value is empty.
Server Generic Methods
Servers use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Get Published Interface
To get the published interface IP address for a server, use the getEntities() method with the
PublishedServerInterface type to return the server properties. The publiushedInterfaceAddress
property appears in the returned properties string.
Server Group
A Server Group is a logical container in which multiple servers are grouped together for common purposes.
Grouping servers in a Server Group allows you to apply DNS and DHCP deployment options to all servers
that comprise the group. After you have created a Server Group, you can add one or more DNS/DHCP
Servers to the Server Group. DNS or DHCP options can then be applied to the Server Group and these
options will be inherited by all servers that are added to that specific Server Group. When DNS or DHCP
options are removed from the Server Group, the options are no longer inherited by the servers that are
added to that group.
!
Attention:
•
•
•
Only BlueCat DNS/DHCP Servers can be added to a Server Group.
A DNS/DHCP Server can only be added to a single server group.
Deployment options applied to specific servers within a Server Group will override the options
set on the Server Group.
Version 8.3.0 | 153
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Add Server Group
Adds a Server Group that will contain multiple DNS/DHCP Servers.
You can use the generic addEntity() method to add a Server Group. Use ObjectType.ServerGroup to
define the Server Group entity. For example:
serverGroup = new APIEntity( 0, name, properties, ObjectTypes.ServerGroup );
serverGroupId = service.addEntity( configurationId, serverGroup );
Note: When defining a Server Group entity, the entity name cannot be empty.
For more information about addEntity(), refer to Adding Objects on page 31
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new Server Group.
Update Server Group
Updates the Server Group's name property using the generic update() method.
When updating a Server Group entity, the name property must not be empty. For more information, refer to
Updating Objects on page 50.
Server Group Generic Methods
Server Group uses the generic get () and delete () methods for entities.
For more information, refer to Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Add Server to Server Group
Use the generic linkEntities() method to add a server to a Server Group.
For more information, refer to Link Entities on page 53.
Remove Server from Server Group
Use the generic unlinkEntities() method to remove a server from a Server Group.
For more information, refer to Unlink Entities on page 54.
DNS and DHCP Deployment Roles
Deployment roles determine the general pattern of the deployment. A deployment role exists on a
particular server interface (physical or published) specified with an IP address.
Each server interface can have multiple DNS roles and one DHCP role with the most locally-specified
server role taking precedence. The addition of a deployment role is allowed only if that role is possible
under that server’s service capability profile as described in the Address Manager Administration Guide.
Get Servers Associated with a Deployment Role
Returns a list of all servers associated with the specified deployment role.
Output / Response
Returns an APIEntity object representing the servers associated with the specified deployment role.
API Call:
APIEntity getServerForRole( long roleId )
154 | Address Manager API Guide
Servers and Deployment
Parameter
Description
roleId
The object ID for the deployment role whose servers are to be returned.
Get Server’s Associated Deployment Roles
Returns a list of all deployment roles associated with the server.
Output / Response
Returns a list of all deployment roles associated with the server.
API Call:
APIDeploymentRole[] getServerDeploymentRoles( long serverId )
Parameter
Description
serverId
The object ID of the server with which deployment roles are associated.
Get Deployment Roles for DNS and IP Address Space Objects
Returns the DNS and DHCP deployment roles associated with the specified object. For DNS Views
and zones, getDeploymentRoles() returns DNS deployment roles. For IP address space objects,
such as IPv4 blocks and networks, IPv6 blocks and networks, DHCP classes, and MAC pools,
getDeploymentRoles() returns DNS and DHCP deployment roles.
Output / Response
Returns an array of APIDeploymentRole objects representing the deployment roles associated with the
specified object. The properties string contains the following elements:
•
•
•
view—for DNS deployment roles set for IP address space objects.
zoneTransServerInterface—the server interface for zone transfers for the deployment role types of
slave, stealth slave, forwarder and stub.
inherited—returns true or false to indicate whether the deployment role was inherited or not.
API Call:
APIDeploymentRole[] getDeploymentRoles( long entityId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for a DNS view, DNS zone, IPv4 block or network, IPv6 block or
network, DHCP class, or MAC pool.
Move Deployment Roles
Moves all DNS and DHCP deployment roles from a server to the specified interface of another server.
Note: You CANNOT move deployment roles if the target server has deployment roles associated
with it. You MUST remove all deployment roles assigned to the target server before moving the
roles.
Note: Either the moveDnsRoles or moveDhcpRoles parameter must be set to true.
API Call:
Output / Response
None.
void moveDeploymentRoles( long sourceServerId, long targetServerInterfaceId, boolean
moveDnsRoles, boolean moveDhcpRoles, String options )
Version 8.3.0 | 155
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
sourceServerId
The object ID of the server that contains the roles.
targetServerInterfaceId The object ID of the server interface of the server to which the roles are to be
moved.
moveDnsRoles
If set to true, DNS roles will be moved to the target server interface.
moveDhcpRoles
If set to true, DHCP roles will be moved to the target server interface.
options
This is reserved for future use.
DHCP Deployment Roles
The DHCP server role can be set to either master or none. Roles set to none are not deployed.
Roles can also be applied at many points throughout a configuration, with the most local roles taking
precedence over those assigned to objects higher in the object hierarchy.
Add DHCP Deployment Role
Adds a DHCP deployment role to a specified object.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DHCP server role object.
API call:
long addDHCPDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId, String type, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object to which the deployment role is to be added.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the role is to be deployed.
type
The type of DHCP role to be added. The type must be one of those listed in
DHCP Deployment Role Types on page 195.
properties
A string containing options including:
•
•
inherited—either true or false;indicates whether or not the deployment role
was inherited.
secondaryServerInterfaceId—the object ID of the secondary server
interface for a DHCP failover.
Get DHCP Deployment Role
Retrieves the DHCP deployment role assigned to a specified object.
Output / Response
Returns the DHCP deployment role assigned to the specified object, or returns an empty
APIDeploymentRole if no role is defined. For information about the output properties, refer to Property
Options Reference on page 241.
API call:
APIDeploymentRole getDHCPDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId )
156 | Address Manager API Guide
Servers and Deployment
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object to which the deployment role is assigned.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the role is assigned.
Update DHCP Deployment Role
Updates a DHCP deployment role.
Output / Response
None.
void updateDHCPDeploymentRole( APIDeploymentRole role )
Parameter
Description
role
The DHCP deployment role object to be updated.
Delete DHCP Deployment Role
Deletes DHCP deployment roles.
Output / Response
None.
void deleteDHCPDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object from which the deployment role is to be deleted.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface from which the deployment roles is to be
deleted.
DNS Deployment Roles
At a minimum, DNS roles must be applied at the View level in order for DNS deployment to occur.
They can also be applied further into the DNS core if desired. For Reverse DNS, a DNS deployment role
must be applied to either a block or a network in order to deploy the Reverse DNS settings for that object
and its sub-objects.
The following DNS server roles are available:
DNS role
Description
None
This DNS role is not deployed. Use this option for DNS objects that exist, but
should not be deployed.
Master
This role deploys details and options consistent with a DNS master. This role
is also used on a DNS/DHCP Server 250 with the appropriate DNS options to
create a caching-only DNS server.
Hidden Master
This role deploys details and options consistent with a DNS master. However,
no name server records are created for the server, thus hiding it from DNS
queries.
Slave
This role deploys details and options consistent with a DNS slave.
Version 8.3.0 | 157
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
DNS role
Description
Stealth Slave
A stealth slave is a DNS slave server that does not have any name server
records pointing to it. This is useful for testing purposes or for having a hot
spare stand-by server. However, this is not a commonly used DNS role.
Forwarder
This role deploys details and options consistent with a DNS forwarder. You
must use both the forwarding policy and forwarding options to make this role
function properly.
Stub
A stub zone contains only the name server records for a domain. Address
Manager generates name server records automatically during deployment, so
a zone deployed within a stub role will not contain any user-selected details or
options.
Recursion
This role creates DNS caching servers. The options and root zone associated
with this role are described in the Address Manager Administration Guide.
Add DNS Deployment Role
Adds a DNS deployment role to a specified object.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new DNS server role object.
API call:
long addDNSDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId, String type, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object to which the deployment role is to be added.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the role is to be added.
type
The type of DNS role to be added. The type must be one of those listed in DNS
Deployment Role Type on page 197.
properties
Adds object properties, including the View associated with this DNS deployment
role and user-defined fields.
Get DNS Deployment Role
Retrieves a DNS deployment role from a specified object.
Output / Response
Returns a DNS deployment role from the specified object, or returns an empty APIDeploymentRole if no
role is defined. For information about the output properties, refer to Property Options Reference on page
241.
API call:
APIDeploymentRole getDNSDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object to which the DNS deployment role is assigned.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the DNS deployment role is
assigned.
158 | Address Manager API Guide
Servers and Deployment
Get DNS Deployment Role for View
Retrieves the DNS deployment role assigned to a view-level objects in the IP space for ARPA zones.
Output / Response
Returns the requested APIDeploymentRole object. For information about the output properties, refer to
Property Options Reference on page 241.
API call:
APIDeploymentRole getDNSDeploymentRoleForView( long entityId, long
serverInterfaceId, long viewId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object to which the DNS deployment role is assigned.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the DNS deployment role is
assigned.
viewId
The view in which the DNS deployment role is assigned.
Update DNS Deployment Role
Updates a specified DNS deployment role.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void updateDNSDeploymentRole( APIDeploymentRole role )
Parameter
Description
role
The DNS deployment role object to be updated.
Delete DNS Deployment Role
Deletes a specified DNS deployment roles.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void deleteDNSDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object from which this DNS deployment role is to be
deleted.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the DNS deployment role is
assigned.
Delete DNS Deployment Role for View
Deletes the DNS deployment role assigned to view-level objects in the IP space for ARPA zones.
Output / Response
None.
Version 8.3.0 | 159
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
API call:
void deleteDNSDeploymentRoleForView( long entityId, long serverInterfaceId, long
viewId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object from which this DNS deployment role is to be
deleted.
serverInterfaceId
The object ID of the server interface to which the DNS deployment role is
assigned.
viewId
The view from which the DNS deployment role is to be deleted.
TFTP Deployment Roles
TFTP deployment roles are used to assign TFTP services to DHCP servers.
Add TFTP Deployment Role
Adds a TFTP deployment role to a specified object.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new TFTP deployment role object.
API call:
long addTFTPDeploymentRole( long entityId, long serverId, String properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID for the object to which the TFTP deployment role is to be added.
serverId
The object ID of the server interface to which the TFTP deployment role is to be
added.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Update TFTP Deployment Role
TFTP deployment roles cannot be updated.
TFTP Deployment Role Generic Methods
TFTP deployment roles use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Crossover High Availability (xHA)
DNS/DHCP Server Crossover High Availability (xHA) provides disaster recovery through the use of
redundant appliances: xHA makes two DNS/DHCP Server appliances function as a single appliance.
If one of the appliances fails for any reason, the other takes its place and continues providing services. The
pair appears as a single server for DNS queries because both servers share an IP address. Each server
in the pair has its own IP addresses for management through Address Manager. For details about xHA,
please refer to Address Manager Administration Guide.
160 | Address Manager API Guide
Crossover High Availability (xHA)
Requirements for creating an xHA pair
Before you create an xHA pair in Address Manager, you must have the following requirements in place:
•
•
You must have at least two connected and managed DNS/DHCP Servers in the configuration.
DNS/DHCP Servers must be either two physical appliances or two virtual machines. Mixed xHA pairs of
appliance and VM are NOT supported.
Both DNS/DHCP Servers must be at the same software version before creating an xHA pair.
Both DNS/DHCP Servers must be of the same profile, such as two DNS/DHCP Server 60 or two DNS/
DHCP Server 100 profiles.
Both DNS/DHCP Servers must be of the same architecture, That is, two 64-bit servers, or two 32-bit
servers (such as two XMB2 appliances).
•
•
•
Attention: Cross-architecture xHA pairs, such as one 64-bit node and one 32-bit node, are
NOT supported.
In order to create an xHA pair with the Active node on which the dedicated management interface
enabled, the dedicated management interface on the Passive node must be enabled.
The Active and Passive nodes must be on the same network.
The servers for the xHA pair must not be associated with a deployment schedule.
The server intended for the passive role must not be associated with a deployment role.
To avoid split-brain scenarios (where both servers are active or passive at the same time), the use of
xHA Backbone Communication is mandatory.
!
•
•
•
•
•
!
Attention:
•
•
If you are currently using the xHA/eth1 ports for another purpose, you can reset and then
reconfigure them for xHA communication, but you cannot use the eth1 ports for xHA
communication and for their previous purpose.
If you are upgrading from a previous version of DNS/DHCP Server, you must delete each
eth1 port to reset it. This is because previous versions did not support eth1, and it is not reset
automatically.
Creating an xHA
With xHA prerequisites are met, you can create an xHA pair.
Note: You cannot configure interface and network settings of DNS/DHCP Server appliances
that are part of a functioning xHA pair. You must configure interface and network settings before
creating a xHA pair.
Create xHA
Creates an xHA pair.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the xHA pair created.
API call:
long createXHAPair( long configurationId, long activeServerId, long passiveServerId,
String activeServerNewIPv4Address, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the xHA servers are located.
activeServerId
The object ID of the active DNS/DHCP Server server.
passiveServerId
The object ID of the passive DNS/DHCP Server server.
Version 8.3.0 | 161
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
activeServerNewIPv4Address The new IPv4 address for the active server.
properties
Note: This is the physical interface of the active server used
during creation of the pair. The original IP address of the active
server is assigned to the virtual interface.
A string containing options listed in List of options.
List of options
activeServerPassword
The deployment password for the active server (by default,
bluecat).
passiveServerPassword
The deployment password for the passive server (by default,
bluecat).
pingAddress
An IPv4 address that is accessible to both active and passive
servers in the xHA pair.
ip6Address
An optional IPv6 address for the xHA pair.
newManagementAddress
The new IPv4 address for the Management interface for the
active server (only for DNS/DHCP Servers with dedicated
management enabled).
backboneActiveServerIPv4Address The IPv4 address of the xHA interface for the active server
(eth1).
backboneActiveServerIPv4Netmask The IPv4 netmask of the xHA interface for the active server
(eth1).
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Address The IPv4 address of the xHA interface for the passive server
(eth1).
backbonePassiveServerIPv4NetmaskThe IPv4 netmask of the xHA interface for the passive server
(eth1).
activeServerIPv4AddressForNAT
The inside virtual IPv4 address for the active server.
passiveServerIPv4AddressForNAT
The inside virtual IPv4 address for the passive server.
activeServerNewIPv4AddressForNATThe inside physical IPv4 address for the active server.
Edit xHA
Updates the xHA pair created.
Output / Response
None.
API call:
void editXHAPair( long xHAServerId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
xHAServerId
The object ID of the xHA server.
name
The name of the xHA server being updated.
properties
A string containing options listed in List of options.
162 | Address Manager API Guide
Crossover High Availability (xHA)
List of options
backboneActiveServerIPv4Address
The IPv4 address of the xHA interface for the active
server (eth1).
backboneActiveServerIPv4Netmask
The IPv4 netmask of the xHA interface for the active
server (eth1).
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Address
The IPv4 address of the xHA interface for the passive
server (eth1).
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Netmask
The IPv4 netmask of the xHA interface for the
passive server (eth1).
overrideDHCPValidation
True or false; indicates whether or not the
deployment validation settings set at the configuration
level is inherited.
checkDHCPConfigurationDeployment
True or false; checks the syntax of the dhcpd.conf file
and validate data deployed from Address Manager.
overrideDNSValidation
True or false; indicates whether or not the
deployment validation settings set at the configuration
level is inherited.
checkDNSConfigurationDeployment
True or false; checks the syntax of the named.conf
file and validate data deployed from Address
Manager.
checkDNSZonesDeployment
True or false; checks the syntax of each DNS
zone file and validate data deployed from Address
Manager.
postLoadZoneIntegrityValidationDNSDeploy
Checks the syntax based on the mode selected. The
available modes are as follows:
•
Full—checks for the following conditions:
•
•
If MX records refer to A or AAAA records, for
both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames.
• If SRV records refer to A or AAAA records, for
both in-zone and out-of-zone hostnames.
• If Delegation NS records refer to A or AAAA
records, for both in-zone and out-of-zone
hostnames
• If glue address records in the zone match
those specified by the child.
Local—checks for the following conditions:
•
•
If MX records refer to A or AAAA records, for
in-zone hostnames.
• If SRV records refer to A or AAAA records, for
in-zone hostnames.
• If Delegation NS records refer to an A or AAAA
record, for in-zone hostnames.
• If glue address records in the zone match
those specified by the child.
Full-sibling—performs the same checks as in Full
mode but does not check the glue records.
Version 8.3.0 | 163
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
•
•
Local-sibling—performs the same checks as in
Local mode but does not check the glue records.
None—disables all post-load zone integrity
checks.
checkNamesValidationModeDNSDeploy
Checks names. Specify Ignore, Warn or Fail to
determine how Address Manager handles conditions
found by this check.
checkIfMXRecordsAreIPsDNSDeploy
Checks if MX records point to an IP address rather
than an A or AAAA record. Specify Ignore, Warn
or Fail to determine how Address Manager handles
conditions found by this check.
checkIfMXRecordsPointToCNAMEsDNSDeploy Checks if MX records point to a CNAME record rather
than an A or AAAA record. Specify Ignore, Warn
or Fail to determine how Address Manager handles
conditions found by this check.
checkIfNSRecordsAreIPsDNSDeploy
Checks if NS record point to an IP address rather
than an A or AAAA record. Specify Ignore, Warn
or Fail to determine how Address Manager handles
conditions found by this check.
checkIfSRVRecordsPointToCNAMEsDNSDeployChecks if SRV record point to a CNAME record
rather than an A or AAAA record. Specify Ignore,
Warn or Fail to determine how Address Manager
handles conditions found by this check.
checkForNonTerminalWildcardsDNSDeploy
Checks for wildcards in zone names that do not
appear as the last segment of a zone name. Specify
Ignore or Warn to determine how Address Manager
handles conditions found by this check.
Breaking an xHA
Breaking an xHA pair returns each server to its original stand-alone state.
The server that held the active role remains connected to Address Manager while the server that held the
passive role is disconnected and has HA-NODE2 appended to its name. Each server is re-assigned its
original IP address.
Break xHA
Breaks an xHA pair and returns each server to its original stand-alone state.
Output / Response
Breaks an xHA pair.
API call:
void breakXHAPair( long xHAServerId, boolean breakInProteusOnly )
Parameter
Description
xHAServerId
The object ID of the xHA server.
breakInProteusOnly
Either true or false; determines whether or not the xHA pair breaks in Address
Manager interface only. This argument breaks the xHA pair in Address Manager
even if the xHA settings are not removed on the actual servers.
164 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
xHA Failover
Under normal operation, xHA automatically fails over in the event of a hardware, network or service failure
related to the Active node.
However, you can perform a manual xHA failover for maintenance or verification purposes.
Failover xHA
Performs a manual xHA failover.
Output / Response
Performs a manual xHA failover.
API call:
void failoverXHA( long xHAServerId )
Parameter
Description
xHAServerId
The object ID of the xHA server.
Address Manager Objects
The other objects managed by the Address Manager API are native Address Manager objects.
These objects are part of the Address Manager server rather than the services it manages. For more
information about Address Manager object types, refer to Address Manager Object Hierarchy on page 22,
and to the Address Manager Administration Guide.
Configurations
Address Manager provides a separation between the logical design of a network and its implementation on
the actual network hardware.
An administrator designs a network as a configuration. The configuration uses global elements such as
users and groups, and local elements such as DNS and IP designs. When combined, these create a
complete logical network design. During this process or afterward, servers (defined for each configuration)
can be associated with different parts of the configuration using the various deployment roles available
within the configuration.
Add Configuration
A generic method for adding configurations, DNS zones, and DNS resource records.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new configuration.
API call:
long addEntity( long parentId, APIEntity entity )
Parameter
Description
parentId
For configurations, always set the parentId value to 0 (zero), which is the root
element.
entity
The configuration object, including its name, sharedNetwork, and user-defined
fields.
Version 8.3.0 | 165
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Update Configuration
A configuration’s name and sharedNetwork properties can be updated using the generic update()
method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Configuration Generic Methods
Configurations use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Get Configuration Setting
A method to get the configuration setting.
Output / Response
Returns the properties of the setting of the configuration in the following format:
attribute1=value1|attribute2=value2
Note: Currently, the getConfigurationSetting method only returns the
OPTION_INHERITANCE setting.
API call:
String getConfigurationSetting( long configurationId, String settingName )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the setting is to be located.
settingName
The name of the specific setting to be read. Only the option inheritance
(OPTION_INHERITANCE) setting is supported.
Update Configuration Setting
A method to update the configuration setting.
Output / Response
Updates the configuration setting.
API call:
void updateConfigurationSetting( long configurationId, String settingName, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the setting is to be located.
settingName
The name of the specific setting to be read. Only the option inheritance
(OPTION_INHERITANCE) setting is supported.
properties
The new properties of the configuration setting to be updated. Only the disable
DNS option inheritance (disableDnsOptionInheritance) property is supported. If
set to true, DNS options that have been configured on a zone are not inherited
by the child zone. In the reverse space, DNS options that have been configured
on a block are not inherited by the child block or network.
166 | Address Manager API Guide
Note:
Address Manager Objects
Parameter
Description
•
•
Disabling DNS option inheritance only affect options attached to a
zone or block and the inheritance of those options by child zones,
blocks, or networks.
You cannot disable the inheritance of DNS options that are attached
to a configuration, view, or server. These DNS options will continue
to be inherited by all zones, blocks, or networks found under the
object.
Groups and Users
Address Manager is designed to accommodate environments that require the ability to host multiple
concurrent users who could be located in different regions. Address Manager can also be run by a single
administrator.
Add Group
Adds user groups.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new Address Manager user group.
Tip: To add users to a user group, use the linkEntities() method, specifying the user ID and
the group ID. It does not matter in which order you specify the user ID and the group ID. Either of
the following will add a user to a user group:
void linkEntities ( long user_id, long group_id, String properties )
or
void linkEntities ( long group_id, long user_id, String properties )
API Call:
long addUserGroup( String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
name
The name of the user group.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Update Group
A user group’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Group Generic Methods
User groups use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Add User
Adds Address Manager users.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new Address Manager user.
Version 8.3.0 | 167
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Tip: To add users to a user group, use the linkEntities() method, specifying the user ID and
the group ID. It does not matter in which order you specify the user ID and the group ID. Either of
the following will add a user to a user group:
void linkEntities ( long user_id, long group_id, String properties )
or
void linkEntities ( long group_id, long user_id, String properties )
API Call:
long addUser( String username, String password, String properties )
Parameter
Description
username
The name of the user.
password
The Address Manager password for the user. The password must be set even if
the authenticator property option is defined.
properties
A string containing user-defined fields and options listed in List of options.
Multiple property values can be separated by a | (pipe) character. For
example: my $properties = “email=$email|phoneNumber=$tel|
authenticator=1368969|userAccessType=$accessType”
Note: You must add a | (pipe) character at the end in the properties
string.
List of options
authenticator
The object ID of the external authenticator defined in Address Manager.
securityPrivilege
A security privilege type for Non-Administrator users with GUI, API, or GUI
and API access. NO ACCESS is the default value.
historyPrivilege
A history privilege type for Non-Administrator users with GUI, or GUI and
API access. HIDE is the default value.
email
The email address for the user. This is required.
phoneNumber
The phone number for the user.
UserType
ADMIN or REGULAR (non-administrator—REGULAR is the default value).
UserAccessType
API, GUI, or GUI and API. This is required. This string must be one of the
constants listed in User Access Type on page 215.
User types and access types
UserType
UserAccessType
Privileges
ADMIN
n/a
History and Security privileges are set automatically.
REGULAR
GUI
History and Security privileges are set to a userspecific value.
REGULAR
API
Security privilege is set to a user-specific value.
REGULAR
GUI and API
History and Security privileges are set to a userspecific value.
168 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
Update User
A Address Manager user’s securityPrivilege and historyPrivilege properties can be updated using the
generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Update User Password
Updates an Address Manager user password. You must be an Address Manager administrator to invoke
this method.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void updateUserPassword( long userId, String newPassword, String[] options )
Parameter
Description
userId
The userId of an application user who is either a primary or a secondary
authenticator whose password is to be updated.
newPassword
The new password for the user.
options
Reserved for future use.
User Generic Methods
Address Manager user objects use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Authenticators
Address Manager includes a fully featured authentication subsystem. The Address Manager administrator
uses this system to securely log in to Address Manager and administer the system when it is being
configured.
Address Manager also supports mixed-mode authentication through RADIUS, LDAP, Microsoft Active
Directory, or Kerberos. Support for RSA Secure ID is accomplished through the RADIUS authentication
module.
The necessary settings must be in place before Address Manager can pass authentication information
to these remote systems. Also, the authentication method must be associated with a Address Manager
user. This is accomplished by creating an authenticator and assigning it to a user. Authenticators are
system objects that represent a connection to an external authentication system. The use of that system’s
native safeguards applies for communications between it and Address Manager. Address Manager acts
as a proxy client for the authentication system, validating the identity of a Address Manager user without
managing or validating the user’s password or credentials.
After the users are authenticated against the external system, they are considered to be validated
in Address Manager until they close their sessions, or until it is invalidated by a session time-out.
Authentication is not a substitute for Address Manager user management. Being a Address Manager user
is still a requirement to log in to the system. Authenticators move the responsibility of validating credentials
to another system.
Many organizations centralize control over internal digital identities. In such scenarios, suspending or
revoking credentials and password management are tightly controlled. Address Manager is designed to
be deployed within all major network authentication frameworks. This lets Address Manager assist with
enforcing network standards, rather than requiring a circumvention.
Version 8.3.0 | 169
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
A user may be assigned several authenticators. These are used in order of primary-secondary.
Update Authenticator
An authenticator’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Authenticator Generic Methods
Authenticators use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Access Rights
Address Manager is arranged as a hierarchy of objects with the server itself at the highest level. This offers
a security and privilege system that is both simple and adaptive because different subsections of the server
do not have separate systems.
An object may be an entire configuration, a single subnet, a tag, etc. However, this means that existing
security schemes must be mapped to the Address Manager architecture. This section outlines the
concepts necessary to perform this mapping.
The Address Manager server is a hierarchical structure with a configuration, user, group, or Object Tag
group as the root element of the tree. Because everything in this hierarchy is an object, a user can have a
different set of rights for each object within the system. However, permissions are more likely granted for a
certain level as well as for everything below that level (with certain exceptions).
Access rights within Address Manager can be assigned to both users and groups. Furthermore, multiple
rights can exist for the same object. Three simple rules dictate a user’s access rights for any object:
•
•
•
Administrators always have full control over any system object.
Local rights take precedence over rights assigned higher in the object hierarchy.
In the case of conflicting object rights, the most permissive right always takes precedence.
These three rules cover all of the possible cases for access rights. For more information about Address
Manager user rights and security, refer to the Address Manager Administration Guide.
Add Access Right
Adds access rights to a specified object.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new access right.
API Call:
long addAccessRight( long entityId, long userId, String value, String overrides, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the access right is being added. Set this to 0
if the access right is being added to the root level (default access rights).
userId
The object ID of the user to whom this access right applies.
value
The value of the access right being added. Valid values for this parameter are
listed in Access Right Values on page 189.
170 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
Parameter
Description
overrides
A list of type-specific overrides in the following format:
"objectType=accessValue|objectType=accessValue"
properties
A string including the following options:
•
workflowLevel—valid values for this option are as follows:
•
•
•
•
None—changes made by the user or group take effect immediately.
Recommend—changes made by the user or group are saved as change
requests and must be reviewed and approved before they take effect.
• Approve—changes made by the user or group take effect immediately
and the user or group can approve change requests from other users or
groups.
deploymentAllowed—either true or false; to indicate whether or not the
user or group can perform a full deployment of data from the configuration to
a managed server.
quickDeploymentAllowed—either true or false; to indicate whether or not
the user or group can instantly deploy changed DNS resource records.
Note:
•
•
•
All these Properties are optional.
The deploymentAllowedproperty is applicable only for
configuration, server or root with Full access.
The workflowLevelproperty is applicable only for Change, Add, or
Full access rights.
Get Access Right
Retrieves an access right for a specified object.
Note: If the full access right is set on the parent object, the getAccessRight() method for the
child object will retrieve the full access right even if there is a hide override set for the child object
type. It is the caller’s responsibility to evaluate the returned APIAccessRight’s value and overrides
to determine the effective access level for the child object.
Output / Response
Returns the access right for the specified object.
API Call:
APIAccessRight getAccessRight( long entityId, long userId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the access right is assigned.
userId
The object ID of the user to whom the access right is applied.
Get Access Rights for Entity
Returns an array of access rights for entities.
Output / Response
Returns an array of access right objects.
Version 8.3.0 | 171
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
API Call:
APIAccessRight[] getAccessRightsForEntity( long entityId,int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity whose access rights are returned.
start
Indicates where in the list of child access right objects to start returning objects.
The list begins at an index of 0.
count
The maximum number of access right child objects to return.
Get Access Rights for User
Returns an array of access rights for a specified user.
Output / Response
Returns an array of access right objects.
API Call:
APIAccessRight[] getAccessRightsForUser( long userId,int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the user whose access rights are returned.
start
Indicates where in the list of child access right objects to start returning objects.
The list begins at an index of 0.
count
The maximum number of access right child objects to return.
Update Access Rights
Updates access rights for a specified object.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void updateAccessRight( long entityId, long userId, String value,String overrides, String
properties )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the access right is assigned.
userId
The object ID of the user to whom the access right is assigned. This value is not
mutable.
value
The new value for the access right. Valid entries are listed in Access Right
Values on page 189.
overrides
A list of potentially modified type-specific overrides in the following format:
"objectType=accessValue|objectType=accessValue"
properties
A string including the following options:
•
workflowLevel—valid values for this option are as follows:
•
172 | Address Manager API Guide
None—changes made by the user or group take effect immediately.
Address Manager Objects
Parameter
Description
•
•
•
Recommend—changes made by the user or group are saved as change
requests and must be reviewed and approved before they take effect.
• Approve—changes made by the user or group take effect immediately
and the user or group can approve change requests from other users or
groups.
deploymentAllowed—either true or false; to indicate whether or not the user
or group can perform a full deployment of data from the configuration to a
managed server
quickDeploymentAllowed—either true or false; to indicate whether or not the
user or group can instantly deploy changed DNS resource records.perform a
full deployment of data from the configuration to a managed server.
Note:
•
•
•
All these Properties are optional.
The deploymentAllowed property is applicable only for
configuration, server or root with Full access.
The workflowLevel property is applicable only for Change, Add, or
Full access rights.
Delete Access Rights
Deletes an access right for a specified object.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void deleteAccessRight( long entityId, long userId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the access right is assigned.
userId
The object ID of the user to whom this access right is applied.
Object Tag Groups
Object tags can change the entire scheme by which users navigate Address Manager. By tagging various
objects, companies can assign privileges based on existing business authority regimes, and limit access to
system objects using familiar business models.
Address Manager object tags are arranged in a hierarchical tree structure. This should accommodate most
element-based XML designs, because any realistic number of elements are supported at each level of the
hierarchy below a top-level or root tag known as a tag group. The system supports more than one hundred
levels of tags, so it can accommodate complex nested structures.
The object tagging structure comprises large sets of XML elements that are without attributes. They begin
with a root element and all subsequent tags belong to branches below the tag group in a series of parentchild relationships. The tag groups cannot be applied to objects.
Add Object Tag Group
Adds object tag groups.
Output / Response
Version 8.3.0 | 173
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Returns the object ID for the new tag group.
API Call:
long addTagGroup( String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
name
The name of the tag group.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Update Object Tag Group
A tag group’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Object Tag Group Generic Methods
This object implements the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Object Tags
Object tag groups use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
Add Object Tag
Adds object tags.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new object tag.
API Call:
long addTag( long parentid, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentid
The object ID of the parent for this object tag. The parent is either an object tag
or an object tag group.
name
The name of the object tag.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Assign Object Tag
Assigns object tags to objects through the Address Manager API.
Note: This method is deprecated. Using this method now returns an error message. Use the
linkEntities() method instead. For more information, see Get Linked Entities on page 53.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void tagEntity( long entityId, String tagId )
174 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity to which the tag is assigned.
tagId
The object ID of the tag that is assigned.
Remove Object Tag
Removes object tags from specified objects.
Note: This method is deprecated. Using this method now returns an error message. Use the
unlinkEntities() method instead. For more information, refer to Unlink Entities on page 54.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void tagEntity( long entityId, String tagId )
Parameter
Description
entityId
The object ID of the entity from which the tag is to be removed.
tagId
The object ID of the tag to be removed.
Update Object Tag
An object tag’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
Object Tag Generic Methods
Object tags use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Locations
The Location feature in Address Manager helps organizations with a large global network infrastructure
manage their network objects and standardize location information.
You can use the Location feature to customize your network location structure by adding your own location
objects under default master location objects. Master location objects are available by default in Address
Manager. You cannot create, edit or delete any default master location objects.
Add a Location
Adds a location object under a parent location object.
addEntity() is a generic method for adding Address Manager API objects.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the newly added location object in Address Manager.
API Call:
long addEntity( long parentId, APIEntity entity )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent location object.
Version 8.3.0 | 175
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
entity
The location object. For a list of supported properties, refer to Location on page
246.
Get Location By Code
Use this method to get the location object with the specified hierarchical location code.
Output / Response
Returns the entity that matches the specified hierarchical location code. If no entity is found, returns an
empty APIEntity. For a list of supported properties, refer to Location on page 246.
API Call:
APIEntity getLocationByCode( String code )
Parameter
Description
code
The hierarchical location code consists of a set of 1 to 3 alpha-numeric strings
separated by a space. The first two characters indicate a country, followed
by next three characters which indicate a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom
locations created under a UN/LOCODE city are appended to the end of the
hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates:
•
•
•
CA—Canada
TOR—Toronto
OF1—Office 1
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER CASE letters.
The county code and child location code should be alphanumeric
strings.
Get All Used Locations
Use this method to get all location objects that are used to annotate other objects.
Output / Response
Returns an array of location APIEntity objects. For a list of supported properties, refer to Location on page
246.
API Call:
APIEntity[] getAllUsedLocations( )
Database Management
BlueCat Address Manager comes with built-in PostgreSQL database to store data such as DHCP and DNS
objects, configuration information, notifications, server information, events, and alerts.
The Address Manager Database functions transparently to store the data. Because the database is built
inside Address Manager, you do not need to install or set up the database separately to get it functioning.
However, you need to configure administrative features such as database backup, replication, restoration,
or disaster recovery from the Address Manager Administration Console.
176 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
Configure Replication
Enables database replication on a remote system in order to automate the setup of replication between two
or three Address Manager systems. This API method must be run against the Address Manager system
that will be primary.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void configureReplication( String standbyServer, boolean compressReplication, long
replicationQueueThreshold, long replicationBreakThreshold, String properties )
Parameter
Description
standbyServer
The IP address of the standby server.
compressReplication
Note: The standby server must be accessible from the primary
server and must have database access from the primary server.
To enable database access, refer to the Configuring database
replication section in the Address Manager Administration Guide.
The boolean value. Set to true to compress the database replication files.
Note: Compressing database replication files is a resourceintensive process that might affect system performance. Use
caution when performing this action.
replicationQueueThreshold
A value to specify the threshold size of the replication directory in
megabytes (MB). The valid values are in the range of 16 to 99999999.
replicationBreakThreshold
A value to specify the threshold size of the replication break in gigabytes
(GB). The valid values are in the range of 5 to 30. This value multiplied by
1024 must be greater than the value of replicationQueueThreshold.
properties
A string containing the following property:
•
secondStandbyServer—the IP address of the second standby
server. This is optional.
Note: Any property string other than secondStandbyServer
option will be ignored.
Purge History
Run the purge function.
Output / Response
Returns 0 (zero) when the purge service has successfully completed.
The following codes will be returned if you specify the waitOption parameter to true. These returning codes
will be logged in the /var/log/jetty/server.log file:
•
•
33 – is either empty or does not contain a hyphen and no valid value found in
either of the two numeric alternatives.
35 – contains a hyphen but is not a valid timestamp.
The details of the output or the reason for failure will be logged in /tmp/purge_results.out.
Version 8.3.0 | 177
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
API Call:
int purgeHistoryNow( String untilWhenTimestamp, int numberOfDaysToKeep, int
numberOfMonthsToKeep, boolean waitOption )
Note: This API method will examine each of the following three retention-period specifying
parameters in sequential order to decide which parameter value it will use to run the purge service.
The first valid parameter will be used:
1. untilWhenTimestamp
2. numberOfDaysToKeep
3. numberOfMonthsToKeep
Parameter
Description
untilWhenTimestamp
The string specifying the point in time after which history is to be preserved.
The valid timestamp pattern is YYYY-MM[-DD[ HH:MM:SS[.mmm]]].
Set this parameter with an empty string ("") if you are using either
numbeOfDaysToKeep or numberOfMonthsToKeep. Using this parameter
will not archive any data.
numberOfDaysToKeep
The number of days for which the data will be preserved in the database.
The valid value for this parameter is between 1 and 3650. Set this
parameter to -1 if you are using either untilWhenTimestamp or
numberOfMonthsToKeep. Using this parameter will archive all history that
will be purged and overwrite existing archive files in the /data/Archive
directory.
numberOfMonthsToKeep
The number of months for which the data will be preserved in the database.
The valid value for this parameter is between 0 to infinite months. Set
this parameter to -1 if you are using either untilWhenTimestamp or
numberOfDaysToKeep. Using this parameter will not archive any data.
waitOption
The Boolean value. If set to true, the purge will be performed and the
result will be returned when completed. The default value is false.
Devices
A device is an actual physical component, such as a router or printer or other equipment to which one or
more IP addresses are assigned.
Devices are organized by device types and device sub-types. A device type is a general category of
devices; a device sub-type is a more specific category of devices. For example, a general device type
might be Printers. More specific device sub-types might include Laser Printers, Plotters, and Imagesetters.
Add Device
Adds a device to a configuration.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new device.
API Call:
long addDevice( long configurationId, String name, long deviceTypeId, long
deviceSubtypeId, String ip4Addresses, String ip6Addresses, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the configuration in which the device is to be located.
name
The descriptive name of the device.
178 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
Parameter
Description
deviceTypeId
The object ID of the device type with which the device is associated. The value
can be 0 if you do not wish to associate a device type to the device you are
adding.
deviceSubtypeId
The object ID of the device sub-type with which the device is associated. The
value can be 0 if you do not wish to associate a device sub-type to the device
you are adding.
ip4Addresses
One or more IPv4 addresses to which the device is assigned. Specify multiple
addresses in a comma-delimited list.
ip6Addresses
One or more IPv6 addresses to which the device is assigned. Specify multiple
addresses in a comma-delimited list.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Add Device Type
Adds a device type to Address Manager. Use device types and device sub-types to categorize and
organize devices on the network.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new device type
API Call:
long addDeviceType( String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
name
The descriptive name for the device type.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
Add Device Subtype
Adds a device sub-type to Address Manager. Use device types and device sub-types to categorize and
organize devices on the network.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID of the new device sub-type
API Call:
long addDeviceSubtype( long parentId, String name, String properties )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent device type object.
name
The descriptive name for the device sub-type.
properties
Adds object properties, including user-defined fields.
MAC Pools
Media Access Control (MAC) pools are used to group MAC addresses for functionality such as Network
Access Control (NAC).
Version 8.3.0 | 179
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Each MAC pool can be linked to multiple MAC addresses, and each MAC address can be linked to multiple
IP addresses of different networks. However, each MAC address can belong to only one MAC pool, and
each IP address can belong to only one MAC address. The MAC pools include one default global ‘Deny’
pool object that the user cannot delete. All pools created by the user can be deleted. A MAC pool contains
a name (required), and optional links to MAC addresses.
Get MAC Addresses in Pool
Returns a list of the MAC address objects within a specified MAC pool.
Note: This method is deprecated. Using this method now returns an error message. Use the
getLinkedEntities() method instead. For more information, see Get Linked Entities on page
53.
Output / Response
Returns an array of MAC address objects.
API Call:
APIEntity[] getMACAddressesInPool( long macPoolId, int start, int count )
Parameter
Description
macPoolId
The object ID for the MAC pool.
start
Indicates where in the list of children to start returning objects. The list begins at
an index of 0.
count
This is the maximum number of child objects to return.
Add MAC Pool
Returns the object ID for the new MAC pool.
You can use the generic addEntity() method to add a MAC pool.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new MAC pool.
API Call:
long addEntity( long parentID, APIEntity entity )
Parameter
Description
parentId
The object ID of the parent Configuration to which the MAC pool is added.
entity
The MAC pool object with its name defined.
Update MAC Pool
A MAC pool’s name property can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
MAC Pool Generic Methods
MAC pools use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
180 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
MAC Addresses
MAC address objects are used to reference the MAC addresses of endpoints.
Add MAC Address
Adds MAC addresses.
Note: To assign a MAC address to the DENY MAC pool, use the denyMACAddress() method.
For more information, see Deny MAC Address on page 181.
Output / Response
Returns the object ID for the new MAC address.
API Call:
long addMACAddress( long configurationId, String macAddress, String properties )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the parent configuration in which the MAC address resides.
macAddress
The MAC address in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
properties
Adds object properties, including the name, MAC Pool ID (macPool), and userdefined fields.
Associate MAC Address
Associates a MAC address with a MAC pool.
!
Attention: To assign a MAC address to the DENY MAC pool, use the denyMACAddress()
method. For more information, see Deny MAC Address on page 181.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void associateMACAddressWithPool( long configurationId, String macAddress, long poolId )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the parent configuration in which the MAC address resides.
macAddress
The MAC address in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
poolId
The object ID of the MAC pool with which this MAC address is associated.
Deny MAC Address
Denies MAC addresses.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void denyMACAddress( long configurationId, String macAddress )
Version 8.3.0 | 181
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the parent configuration in which the MAC address resides.
macAddress
The MAC address in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
Is Address Allocated?
Queries a MAC address to determine if the address has been allocated to an IP address.
Output / Response
Returns a Boolean value indicating whether the address is allocated.
API Call:
boolean isAddressAllocated( long configurationId, String ipAddress, String macAddress )
Parameter
Description
configurationId
The object ID of the parent configuration in which the MAC address resides.
ipAddress
The IPv4 DHCP allocated address to be checked against the MAC address.
macAddress
The MAC address in the format nnnnnnnnnnnn, nn-nn-nn-nn-nn-nn or
nn:nn:nn:nn:nn:nn, where nn is a hexadecimal value.
Update MAC Address
A MAC address’s name and macPoolId properties can be updated using the generic update() method.
For more information, see Updating Objects on page 50.
MAC Address Generic Methods
MAC addresses use the generic get() and delete() methods for entities.
For more information, see Getting Objects on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Workflow Change Requests
You can use change requests to manage the creation of network, resource records, zones, and IP address
assignments. Workflow permissions are assigned to users along with access rights.
Users with a default access right of Change, Add, or Full Access can be assigned one of these workflow
levels:
•
•
•
None—the user is not affected by the change request process and can create networks, resource
records, zones, and IP address assignments. Users with the None level cannot access or work with
workflow change requests.
Recommend—when the user creates, edits, or deletes a network, resource record, zone, or IP address
assignment, Address Manager creates a change request for the object. The change request must be
approved before the object is actually created, edited, or deleted. Users with the Recommend level can
review their change requests.
Approve—the user can approve change requests made by other users. Users with the Approve level
can create, edit, or delete networks, resource records, zones, and IP address assignments.
For information about adding access rights and Workflow Levels, refer to Add Access Right on page 195.
Users who are assigned the workflow level of Recommend create a change request each time they add,
edit, or delete a network, resource record, zone, or IP address.
The following objects support workflow mode operations:
182 | Address Manager API Guide
Migration
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Zone
HostRecord
AliasRecord (CName)
MXRecord
TXTRecord
GenericRecord
HINFORecord
NAPTRRecord
SRVRecord
IP4Network
IP4Address
The following API operations support workflow mode operations:
•
•
•
Add (for all objects except IP4Address)
Update
Delete
Migration
You can use XML files to migrate data from other systems into Address Manager. For more information on
the migration document type definition (DTD) and performing migrations from the Address Manager web
interface, see Migration in the Address Manager Administration Guide and Address Manager online help.
The Address Manager API provides two methods for managing the migration service:
•
•
migrateFile() migrates a specified XML file in to Address Manager.
isMigrationRunning() indicates if migrations are queued or in progress.
Migrate a File
Migrates the specified XML file in to Address Manager. The file must be located in the /data/migration/
incoming directory on the Address Manager server. The file name must not include a path.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void migrateFile( String filename )
Parameter
Description
filename
The filename of the XML file in the data/migration/incoming directory. Do not
include a path in the filename.
Migration Status
Returns true or false to indicate if the migration service is running. Specify a filename to determine if the
specified file is migrating. Specify an empty string ("") to determine if any migration files are migrating or
queued for migration.
API Call:
boolean isMigrationRunning( String filename )
Version 8.3.0 | 183
Chapter 4: API Object Methods
Parameter
Description
filename
The filename of the XML file in the data/migration/incoming directory. Do not
include a path in the filename. This value can be empty.
Output / Response
Returns a Boolean value indicating if the specified file is currently migrating. When an empty string ("") is
specified for the filename, returns a true if there are any migration files queued for migration or currently
migrating.
Collecting Data
The Address Manager API provides three methods for gathering data from the Address Manager
database.
Start Probe
Starts collecting data from Address Manager’s database using pre-defined SQL queries.
Output / Response
None.
API Call:
void startProbe( String definedProbe, String properties )
Parameter
Description
definedProbe
Pre-defined SQL queries that will be triggered to collect data. The available
values are LEASE_COUNT_PER_DATE and NETWORK_BLOOM.
properties
Reserved for future use.
Get Probe Status
Returns the status of the triggered data collection process.
Output / Response
This method will return a pre-defined value from 0 to 3, depending on the status of the data collection
process. For more information, refer to Probe Status Values on page 217.
API Call:
int getProbeStatus( String definedProbe )
Parameter
Description
definedProbe
Pre-defined SQL queries that have been triggered to collect data. The available
values are LEASE_COUNT_PER_DATE and NETWORK_BLOOM.
Get Probe Data
Returns the JSON response from the properties field of the APIData object.
Output / Response
Returns the JSON response from the properties field of the APIData object.
184 | Address Manager API Guide
Collecting Data
API Call:
APIData getProbeData( String definedProbe, String properties )
Parameter
Description
definedProbe
Pre-defined SQL queries that will be triggered to collect data. The available
values are LEASE_COUNT_PER_DATE and NETWORK_BLOOM.
properties
Reserved for future use.
Version 8.3.0 | 185
Chapter 5
API Constants
Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Access Right Values
Additional IP Service Type
Configuration Setting
Deployment Services
Deployment Status
Device Properties
DHCP Class Match Criteria
DHCP Client Options
DHCP6 Client Options
DHCP Custom Option Types
DHCP Deployment Role Types
DHCP Service Options
DHCPServiceOptionConstants
DHCP6 Service Options
DNS Deployment Role Type
DNS Options
DNS Option Values
DNSSEC Key Format
DNS Zones Deployment
Validation Check
Entity Categories
ENUM Services
IP Assignment Action Values
IP Discovery Type
Object Properties
Object Types
Option Types
PositionRangeBy
Response Policy Type
Response Policy Search
Scopes
Reverse Zone Format Type
Server Capability Profiles
Service Types
SNMP Version
SNMP Security Levels
SNMP Authentication Type
SNMP Privacy Type
Traversal Methodology
User Access Type
The Address Manager API uses various constants in its methods. To
accommodate changes in values, these constants are wrapped in
various libraries (such as Java and Perl).
The proceeding tables describe the Library (type of constant),
Property Key which is the name of the property in the library, and
Property Value which is the value to be used for the actual API call.
When you are not using the provided wrappers for Java and Perl, you
should use the value in the Property Value field.
187
Chapter 5: API Constants
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
User-defined Field Type
User-defined Field Validator
Properties
User History Privileges
User Security Privileges
User Type
Vendor Profile Option Types
Workflow Levels
Defined Probe Values
Probe Status Values
188 | Address Manager API Guide
Access Right Values
Access Right Values
Constants used in Access Right API methods.
Property Key
Property Value
HideAccess
HIDE
ViewAccess
VIEW
AddAccess
ADD
ChangeAccess
CHANGE
FullAccess
FULL
Additional IP Service Type
Constants used in the Additional IP Service Type.
Property Key
Property Value
SERVICE
service
LOOPBACK
loopback
Configuration Setting
Constants used in the Configuration Setting.
Property Key
Property Value
OPTION_INHERITANCE
OPTION_INHERITANCE
Deployment Services
Constants used in Deployment Services API methods.
Property Key
Property Value
DNS
DNS
DHCP
DHCP
TFTP
TFTP
DHCPv6
DHCPv6
Deployment Status
Constants used in the Deployment Status API method.
Property Key
Property Value
EXECUTING
-1
INITIALIZING
0
Version 8.3.0 | 189
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
QUEUED
1
CANCELLED
2
FAILED
3
NOT_DEPLOYED
4
WARNING
5
INVALID
6
DONE
7
NO_RECENT_DEPLOYMENT
8
Device Properties
Constants used in the Device Properties.
Property Key
Property Value
DEVICE_ROUTER
ROUTER
DEVICE_SWITCH
L2SWITCH
DEVICE_INTERFACE
INTERFACE
DEVICE_VLAN
VLAN
DEVICE_LOCATION
location
DEVICE_IP
ip
TOTAL_INTERFACES
totalInterfaces
TOTAL_VLANS
totalVlans
TOTAL_ARPS
totalArps
TOTAL_MACS
totalMacs
TOTAL_NETWORKS
totalNetworks
TOTAL_IPS
totalIps
INTERFACE_ALIAS
alias
INTERFACE_DESC
description
INTERFACE_INDEX
ifIndex
INTERFACE_SPEED
speed
INTERFACE_CONNECTOR
connector
MAC_ADDRESS
physicalAddress
VLAN_ID
vlanId
PORT_MODE
portMode
190 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP Class Match Criteria
DHCP Class Match Criteria
Constants used in the DHCP Class Match Criteria API method.
Property Key
Property Value
DHCP_CLASS_HARDWARE
MATCH_HARDWARE
DHCP_CLASS_CLIENT_ID
MATCH_DHCP_CLIENT_ID
DHCP_CLASS_VENDOR_ID
MATCH_DHCP_VENDOR_ID
DHCP_CLASS_AGENT_CIRCUIT_ID
MATCH_AGENT_CIRCUIT_ID
DHCP_CLASS_AGENT_REMOTE_ID
MATCH_AGENT_REMOTE_ID
DHCP_CLASS_CUSTOM_MATCH
CUSTOM_MATCH
DHCP_CLASS_CUSTOM_MATCH_IF
CUSTOM_MATCH_IF
DHCP Client Options
Constants used in the DHCP Client Options API method.
Property Key
Property Value
TIME_OFFSET
time-offset
ROUTER
router
TIME_SERVER
time-server
IEN_NAME_SERVER
ien-name-server
DNS_SERVER
dns-server
LOG_SERVER
log-server
COOKIE_SERVER
cookie-server
LPR_SERVER
lpr-server
IMPRESS_SERVER
impress-server
RESOURCE_LOCATION_SERVER
resource-location-server
HOST_NAME
host-name
BOOT_SIZE
boot-size
MERIT_DUMP_FILE
merit-dump-file
DOMAIN_NAME
domain-name
SWAP_SERVER
swap-server
ROOT_PATH
root-path
EXTENSIONS_PATH
extensions-path
IP_FORWARDING
ip-forwarding
NON_LOCAL_SOURCE_ROUTING
non-local-source-routing
POLICY_FILTER_MASKS
policy-filter-masks
Version 8.3.0 | 191
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
MAX_DATAGRAM_REASSEMBLU
max-datagram-reassembly
DEFAULT_IP_TTL
default-ip-ttl
PATH_MTU_AGING_TIMEOUT
path-mtu-aging-timeout
PATH_MTU_PLATEAU_TABLE
path-mtu-plateau-table
INTERFACE_MTU
interface-mtu
ALL_SUBNETS_LOCAL
all-subnets-local
BROADCAST_ADDRESS
broadcast-address
PERFORM_MASK_DISCOVERY
perform-mask-discovery
MASK_SUPPLIER
mask-supplier
ROUTER_DISCOVERY
router-discovery
ROUTER_SOLICITATION_ADDRESS
router-solicitation-address
STATIC_ROUTES
static-routes
TRAILER_ENCAPSULATION
trailer-encapsulation
ARP_CACHE_TIMEOUT
arp-cache-timeout
IEEE_802_3_ENCAPSULATION
ieee-802-3-encapsulation
DEFAULT_TCP_TTL
default-tcp-ttl
TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_INTERVAL
tcp-keep-alive-interval
TCP_KEEP_ALIVE_GARBAGE
tcp-keep-alive-garbage
NIS_DOMAIN
nis-domain
NIS_SERVER
nis-server
VENDOR_ENCAPSULATED_OPTIONS
vendor-encapsulated-options
NTP_SERVER
ntp-server
WINS_NBNS_SERVER
wins-nbns-server
NETBIOS_OVER_TCP_IP_NBDD
netbios-over-tcp-ip-nbdd
WINS_NBT_NODE_TYPE
wins-nbt-node-type
NETBIOS_SCOPE_ID
netbios-scope-id
X_WINDOW_FONT_MANAGER
x-window-font-manager
X_WINDOW_DISPLAY_MANAGER
x-window-display-manager
NETWARE_IP_DOMAIN
nwip.domain
NETWARE_IP_NSQ_BROADCAST
nwip.nsq-broadcast
NETWARE_IP_PREFERRED_DSS
nwip.preferred-dss
NETWARE_IP_NEAREST_NWIP_SERVER
nwip.nearest-nwip-server
NETWARE_IP_AUTO_RETRIES
nwip.auto-retries
NETWARE_IP_AUTO_RETRY_DELAY
nwip.auto-retry-delay
192 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP Client Options
Property Key
Property Value
NETWARE_IP_1_1_COMPATIBILITY
nwip.1-1-compatibility
NETWARE_IP_PRIMARY_DSS
nwip.primary-dss
NIS_PLUS_DOMAIN_NAME
nis-plus-domain-name
NIS_PLUS_SERVER
nis-plus-server
TFTP_SERVER_NAME
tftp-server-name
BOOT_FILE_NAME
boot-file-name
MOBILE_IP_HOME_AGENT
mobile-ip-home-agent
SMTP_SERVER
smtp-server
POP3_SERVER
pop3-server
NNTP_SERVER
nntp-server
WWW_SERVER
www-server
FINGER_SERVER
finger-server
IRC_SERVER
irc-server
STREET_TALK_SERVER
street-talk-server
STREET_TALK_DIRECTORY_ASSISTANCE_
SERVER
street-talk-directory-assistance-server
SLP_DIRECTORY_AGENT
slp-directory-agent
SLP_SERVICE_SCOPE
slp-service-scope
NDS_SERVER
nds-server
NDS_TREE_NAME
nds-tree-name
NDS_CONTEXT
nds-context
UAP_SERVER
uap-server
NAME_SERVICE_SEARCH
name-service-search
DOMAIN_SEARCH
domain-search
SIP_SERVERS
sip-server
CLASSLESS_STATIC_ROUTE_OPTION
classless-static-route-option
CCC_PRIMARY_DHCP_SERVER_ADDRESS
cablelabs.primary-dhcp-server
CCC_SECONDARY_DHCP_SERVER_ADDRESS
cablelabs.secondary-dhcp-server
CCC_PROVISIONING_SERVER_ADDRESS
cablelabs.provisioning-server
CCC_AS_BACKOFF_AND_RETRY
cablelabs.as-backoff-retry
CCC_AP_BACKOFF_RETRY
cablelabs.ap-backoff-retry
CCC_KERBEROS_REALM_NAME
cablelabs.kerberos-realm-name
CCC_TICKET_GRANTING_SERVER_
UTILIZATION
cablelabs.ticket-granting-server-utilization
CCC_PROVISIONING_TIMER_VALUE
cablelabs.provisioning-timer-value
Version 8.3.0 | 193
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
TFTP_SERVER_ADDRESS
tftp-server
IP_TELEPHONE
ip-telephone
WPAD_URL
wpad-url
DHCP6 Client Options
Constants used in the DHCP6 Client Options API method.
Property Key
Property Value
UNICAST
unicast
DNS_SERVERS
dns-servers
DOMAIN_SEARCH_LIST
domain-search-list
SNTP_SERVERS
sntp-servers
INFORMATION_REFRESH_TIME
information-refresh-time
wpad-url
DHCP Custom Option Types
Constants used in the DHCP Custom Option Types.
Property Key
Property Value
IP4
IP4
TEXT
TEXT
UNSIGNED_INT_8
UNSIGNED_INT_8
UNSIGNED_INT_16
UNSIGNED_INT_16
UNSIGNED_INT_32
UNSIGNED_INT_32
UNSIGNED_INT_64
UNSIGNED_INT_64
SIGNED_INT_8
SIGNED_INT_8
SIGNED_INT_16
SIGNED_INT_16
SIGNED_INT_32
SIGNED_INT_32
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
IP4_MASK
IP4_MASK
IP4_RANGE
IP4_RANGE
IP4_BLOCK
IP4_BLOCK
STRING
STRING
BINARY
BINARY
ENCAPSULATED
ENCAPSULATED
194 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP Deployment Role Types
DHCP Deployment Role Types
Constants used in DHCP Deployment Role API methods.
Property Key
Property Value
NONE
NONE
MASTER
MASTER
DHCP Service Options
Constants used in the Deployment Status API method.
Property Key
Property Value
DEFAULT_LEASE_TIME
default-lease-time
MAX_LEASE_TIME
max-lease-time
MIN_LEASE_TIME
min-lease-time
CLIENT_UPDATES
client-updates
DDNS_DOMAINNAME
ddns-domainname
DDNS_HOSTNAME
ddns-hostname
DDNS_REV_DOMAINNAME
ddns-rev-domainname
DDNS_TTL
ddns-ttl
DDNS_UPDATES
ddns-updates
PING_CHECK
ping-check
ALWAYS_BROADCAST
always-broadcast
ALWAYS_REPLY_RFC1048
always-reply-rfc1048
DYNAMIC_BOOTP_LEASE_LENGTH
dynamic-bootp-lease-length
FILENAME
filename
GET_LEASE_HOSTNAMES
get-lease-hostnames
MIN_SECS
min-secs
NEXT_SERVER
next-server
SERVER_IDENTIFIER
server-identifier
SITE_OPTION_SPACE
site-option-space
STASH_AGENT_OPTIONS
stash-agent-options
UPDATE_OPTIMIZATION
update-optimization
UPDATE_STATIC_LEASES
update-static-leases
USE_LEASE_ADDR_FOR_DEFAULT_ROUTE
use-lease-addr-for-default-route
ONE_LEASE_PER_CLIENT
one-lease-per-client
ALLOW_MAC_POOL
allow-mac-pool
Version 8.3.0 | 195
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
DENY_MAC_POOL
deny-mac-pool
DENY_UNKNOWN_MAC_ADDRESSES
deny-unknown-mac-addresses
LOAD_BALANCE_OVERRIDE
load-balance-override
LOAD_BALANCE_SPLIT
load-balance-split
MCLT
mclt
MAX_RESPONSE_DELAY
max-response-delay
MAX_UNACKED_UPDATES
max-unacked-updates
DHCP_CLASS_LEASE_LIMIT
dhcp-class-lease-limit
ALLOW_DHCP_CLASS_MEMBERS
allow-dhcp-class-members
DENY_DHCP_CLASS_MEMBERS
deny-dhcp-class-members
APPLY_MAC_AUTHENTICATION_POLICY
apply-mac-authentication-policy
DENY_DHCP_CLIENTS
deny-dhcp-clients
CONFLICT_DETECTION
conflict-detection
UPDATE_CONFLICT_DETECTION
update-conflict-detection
DO_REVERSE_UPDATES
do-reverse-updates
DHCPServiceOptionConstants
Constants used in the DHCPServiceOption API method.
Property Key
Property Value
DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_IP
ip
DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_MAC
mac
DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_FIXED
fixed
DDNS_HOSTNAME_TYPE_DUID
duid
DDNS_HOSTNAME_POSITION_APPEND
append
DDNS_HOSTNAME_POSITION_PREPEND
prepend
DHCP6 Service Options
Constants used in the DHCP6 service options API method.
Property Key
Property Value
DEFAULT_LEASE_TIME
default-lease-time
CLIENT_UPDATES
client-updates
DDNS_DOMAINNAME
ddns-domainname
DDNS_HOSTNAME
ddns-hostname
DDNS_TTL
ddns-ttl
196 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS Deployment Role Type
Property Key
Property Value
DDNS_UPDATES
ddns-updates
LIMIT_ADDRESSES_PER_IA
limit-addresses-per-ia
DO_REVERSE_UPDATES
do-reverse-updates
SERVER_PREFERENCE
server-preference
PREFERRED_LIFETIME
preferred-lifetime
RAPID_COMMIT
rapid-commit
DNS Deployment Role Type
Constants used in the reverse zone format type.
Property Key
Property Value
NONE
NONE
MASTER
MASTER
MASTER_HIDDEN
MASTER_HIDDEN
SLAVE
SLAVE
SLAVE_STEALTH
SLAVE_STEALTH
FORWARDER
FORWARDER
STUB
STUB
RECURSION
RECURSION
AD_MASTER
AD_MASTER
DNS Options
Constants used in the DNS Options.
Property Key
Property Value
ALLOW_XFER
allow-xfer
ALSO_NOTIFY
also-notify
ALLOW_DDNS
allow-ddns
ALLOW_RECURSION
allow-recursion
ALLOW_QUERY
allow-query
FORWARDING_POLICY
forwarding-policy
FORWARDING
forwarding
NOTIFY
notify
MAX_CACHE_TTL
max-cache-ttl
MAX_NEG_CACHE_TTL
max-neg-cache-ttl
TRANSFERS_IN
transfers-in
Version 8.3.0 | 197
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
TRANSFERS_OUT
transfers-out
TCP_CLIENTS
tcp-clients
MAX_TRANSFER_TIME_OUT
max-transfer-time-out
MAX_TRANSFER_TIME_IN
max-transfer-time-in
MAX_TRANSFER_IDLE_OUT
max-transfer-idle-out
MAX_TRANSFER_IDLE_IN
max-transfer-idle-in
TRANSFER_FORMAT
transfer-format
MAX_CACHE_SIZE
max-cache-size
RECURSIVE_CLIENTS
recursive-clients
TRANSFERS_PER_NS
transfers-per-ns
LAME_TTL
lame-ttl
ALLOW_UPDATE_FORWARDING
allow-update-forwarding
VERSION
version
MATCH_CLIENTS
match-clients
DENY_CLIENTS
deny-clients
CACHE
cache
ALLOW_NOTIFY
allow-notify
ZONE_DEFAULT_TTL
zone-default-ttl
DNSSEC_ENABLE
dnssec-enable
DNSSEC_VALIDATION
dnssec-validation
DNSSEC_KEY_DIRECTORY
dnssec-key-directory
DNSSEC_TRUST_ANCHORS
dnssec-trust-anchors
DNSSEC_MUST_BE_SECURE
dnssec-must-be-secure
ALLOW_QUERY_CACHE
allow-query-cache
DNSSEC_ACCEPT_EXPIRED
dnssec-accept-expired
START_OF_AUTHORITY
start-of-authority
CLASSLESS_REVERSE_ZONE_FORMAT
classless-reverse-zone-format
TSIG_KEY_FOR_SERVER_PAIR
tsig-key-for-server-pair
SLAVE_ZONE_NOTIFICATIONS
slave-zone-notifications
DNS Option Values
Constants used in the DNS options values.
Property Key
Property Value
SINGLE
SINGLE
198 | Address Manager API Guide
DNSSEC Key Format
Property Key
Property Value
MANY_ANSWERS
MANY_ANSWERS
FIRST
FIRST
ONLY
ONLY
DNSSEC Key Format
Constants used in the DNSSEC Key Format.
Property Key
Property Value
TRUST_ANCHOR
TRUST_ANCHOR
DNS_KEY
DNS_KEY
DS_RECORD
DS_RECORD
DNS Zones Deployment Validation Check
Constants used in the DNS Zones Deployment Validation Check.
Property Key
Property Value
FAIL
FAIL
WARN
WARN
IGNORE
IGNORE
NONE
NONE
FULL
FULL
FULL_SIBLING
FULL_SIBLING
LOCAL
LOCAL
LOCAL_SIBLING
LOCAL_SIBLING
Entity Categories
Constants used in the Entity Categories.
Property Key
Property Value
all
ALL
admin
ADMIN
Configuration
CONFIGURATION
deploymentOptions
DEPLOYMENT_OPTIONS
deploymentRoles
DEPLOYMENT_ROLES
deploymentSchedulers
DEPLOYMENT_SCHEDULER
dhcpClassObjects
DHCPCLASSES_OBJECTS
Version 8.3.0 | 199
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
dhcpNACPolicies
DHCPNACPOLICY_OBJECTS
IP4Objects
IP4_OBJECTS
IP6Objects
IP6_OBJECTS
MACPoolObjects
MACPOOL_OBJECTS
resourceRecords
RESOURCE_RECORD
servers
SERVERS
tags
TAGS
tasks
TASKS
TFTPObjects
TFTP_OBJECTS
vendorProfiles
VENDOR_PROFILES
viewZones
VIEWS_ZONES
TSIGKeys
TSIG_KEYS
GSS
GSS
DHCPZones
DHCP_ZONES
ServerGroup
SERVERGROUP
ENUM Services
Constants used in the ENUM Services.
Property Key
Property Value
H323
H323
SIP
SIP
ifax_mailto
ifax mailto
pres
pres
web_http
web http
web_https
web https
ft_ftp
ft ftp
email_mailto
email mailto
fax_tel
fax tel
sms_tel
sms tel
sms_mailto
sms mailto
ems_tel
ems tel
ems_mailto
ems mailto
mms_tel
mms tel
mms_mailto
mms mailto
200 | Address Manager API Guide
IP Assignment Action Values
Property Key
Property Value
VPIM_MAILTO
VPIM MAILTO
VPIM_LDAP
VPIM LDAP
voice_tel
voice tel
pstn_tel
pstn tel
pstn_sip
pstn sip
xmpp
xmpp
im
im
IP Assignment Action Values
Constants used in the IP Assignment Action Values.
Property Key
Property Value
MAKE_STATIC
MAKE_STATIC
MAKE_RESERVED
MAKE_RESERVED
MAKE_DHCP_RESERVED
MAKE_DHCP_RESERVED
IP Discovery Type
Constants used in the IP address discovery type.
Property Key
Property Value
SNMP
SNMP
PINGSWEEP
PINGSWEEP
SNMP_PINGSWEEP
SNMP_PINGSWEEP
NO_DISCOVERY
NO_DISCOVERY
Object Properties
Constants used in the Object Properties.
Property Key
Property Value
name
name
sharedNetwork
sharedNetwork
CIDR
CIDR
start
start
end
end
template
template
deployable
deployable
Version 8.3.0 | 201
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
authenticator
authenticator
securityPrivilege
securityPrivilege
historyPrivilege
historyPrivilege
email
email
phoneNumber
phoneNumber
users
users
version
version
description
description
addresses
addresses
address
address
state
state
server
server
serverGroup
serverGroup
serverInterface
serverInterface
zoneTransServerInterface
zoneTransServerInterface
macPool
macPool
view
view
refresh
refresh
retry
retry
expire
expire
minimum
minimum
absoluteName
absoluteName
userAccessType
userAccessType
allowDuplicateHost
allowDuplicateHost
pingBeforeAssign
pingBeforeAssign
defaultDomains
defaultDomains
dnsRestrictions
dnsRestrictions
defaultView
defaultView
comments
comments
ttl
ttl
reverseRecord
reverseRecord
txt
txt
parentZoneName
parentZoneName
linkedParentZoneName
linkedParentZoneName
202 | Address Manager API Guide
Object Properties
Property Key
Property Value
linkedRecordName
linkedRecordName
priority
priority
port
port
weight
weight
order
order
preference
preference
service
service
regexp
regexp
replacement
replacement
flags
flags
os
os
cpu
cpu
type
type
rdata
rdata
prefix
prefix
identifier
identifier
parentId
parentId
parentType
parentType
addressIds
addressIds
linkToExternalHost
linkToExternalHost
defaultInterfaceAddress
defaultInterfaceAddress
publishedInterfaceAddress
publishedInterfaceAddress
publishedInterfaceIPv6Address
publishedInterfaceIPv6Address
secondaryServerInterfaceId
secondaryServerInterfaceId
fullHostName
fullHostName
profile
profile
connected
connected
upgrade
upgrade
readOnly
readOnly
servicesIPv4Address
servicesIPv4Address
servicesIPv4Netmask
servicesIPv4Netmask
servicesIPv6Address
servicesIPv6Address
servicesIPv6Subnet
servicesIPv6Subnet
xhaIPv4Address
xhaIPv4Address
Version 8.3.0 | 203
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
xhaIPv4Netmask
xhaIPv4Netmask
redundancyScenario
redundancyScenario
xHAServerId
xHAServerId
activeServerId
activeServerId
passiveServerId
passiveServerId
activeServerNewIPv4Address
activeServerNewIPv4Address
activeServerPassword
activeServerPassword
passiveServerPassword
passiveServerPassword
pingAddress
pingAddress
ip6Address
ip6Address
newManagementAddress
newManagementAddress
activeServerIPv4AddressForNAT
activeServerIPv4AddressForNAT
passiveServerIPv4AddressForNAT
passiveServerIPv4AddressForNAT
activeServerNewIPv4AddressForNAT
activeServerNewIPv4AddressForNAT
backboneActiveServerIPv4Address
backboneActiveServerIPv4Address
backboneActiveServerIPv4Netmask
backboneActiveServerIPv4Netmask
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Address
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Address
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Netmask
backbonePassiveServerIPv4Netmask
nodeType
nodeType
breakInProteusOnly
breakInProteusOnly
overrideDHCPValidation
overrideDHCPValidation
checkDHCPConfigurationDeployment
checkDHCPConfigurationDeployment
overrideDNSValidation
overrideDNSValidation
checkDNSConfigurationDeployment
checkDNSConfigurationDeployment
checkDNSZonesDeployment
checkDNSZonesDeployment
postLoadZoneIntegrityValidationDNSDeploy
postLoadZoneIntegrityValidationDNSDeploy
checkNamesValidationModeDNSDeploy
checkNamesValidationModeDNSDeploy
checkIfMXRecordsAreIPsDNSDeploy
checkIfMXRecordsAreIPsDNSDeploy
checkIfMXRecordsPointToCNAMEsDNSDeploy
checkIfMXRecordsPointToCNAMEsDNSDeploy
checkIfNSRecordsAreIPsDNSDeploy
checkIfNSRecordsAreIPsDNSDeploy
checkIfSRVRecordsPointToCNAMEsDNSDeploy
checkIfSRVRecordsPointToCNAMEsDNSDeploy
checkForNonTerminalWildcardsDNSDeploy
checkForNonTerminalWildcardsDNSDeploy
ProteusDDW
ProteusDDW
enableDHCP
enableDHCP
204 | Address Manager API Guide
Object Properties
Property Key
Property Value
enableDNS
enableDNS
services
services
importViewName
importViewName
authenticationCredentialDomain
authenticationCredentialDomain
authenticationCredentialUsername
authenticationCredentialUsername
authenticationCredentialPassword
authenticationCredentialPassword
forceDNSFullDeployment
forceDNSFullDeployment
gateway
gateway
reservedAddresses
reservedAddresses
reservedBlock
RESERVED_BLOCK
reservedDHCPRange
RESERVED_DHCP_RANGE
ipGroup
IP_GROUP
templateType
templateType
zoneTemplateType
zonetemplate
IP4NetworkTemplateType
ip4networktemplate
zoneTemplateReapplyMode
zoneReapplyMode
templateReapplyModeIgnore
IGNORE
templateReapplyModeUpdate
UPDATE_IF_POSSIBLE
templateReapplyModeOverwrite
OVERWRITE
gatewayReapplyMode
gatewayReapplyMode
reservedAddressesReapplyMode
reservedAddressesReapplyMode
dhcpRangesReapplyMode
dhcpRangesReapplyMode
ipGroupsReapplyMode
ipGroupsReapplyMode
optionsReapplyMode
optionsReapplyMode
noGateway
noGateway
seedRouterAddress
seedRouterAddress
snmpVersion
snmpVersion
snmpPortNumber
snmpPortNumber
snmpCommunityString
snmpCommunityString
securityLevel
securityLevel
context
context
authenticationType
authenticationType
authPassphrase
authPassphrase
privacyPassphrase
privacyPassphrase
Version 8.3.0 | 205
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
networkBoundaries
networkBoundaries
schedule
schedule
activeStatus
activeStatus
enableLayer2Discovery
enableLayer2Discovery
acceptanceCriteriaReclaim
acceptanceCriteriaReclaim
acceptanceCriteriaUnknown
acceptanceCriteriaUnknown
acceptanceCriteriaMismatch
acceptanceCriteriaMismatch
overrideList
overrideList
matchCriteria
matchCriteria
matchOffset
matchOffset
matchLength
matchLength
customMatchRawString
customMatchRawString
ignoreError
ignoreError
matchValue
matchValue
splitStaticAddresses
splitStaticAddresses
noServerUpdate
noServerUpdate
transientParent
transientParent
optionId
optionId
optionType
optionType
optionAllowMultiple
optionAllowMultiple
optionDescription
optionDescription
deviceTypeId
deviceTypeId
deviceSubtypeId
deviceSubtypeId
ip4Addresses
ip4Addresses
ip6Addresses
ip6Addresses
overrideNamingPolicy
overrideNamingPolicy
deleteKeys
deleteKeys
excludeDHCPRange
excludeDHCPRange
skip
skip
offset
offset
displayName
displayName
hint
hint
accessRight
accessRight
overrideType
overrideType
206 | Address Manager API Guide
Object Properties
Property Key
Property Value
retrieveFields
retrieveFields
ignoreCase
ignoreCase
size
size
positionRangeBy
positionRangeBy
positionValue
positionValue
ipGroupBySize
ipGroupBySize
configName
configName
deviceName
deviceName
ipAddressMode
ipAddressMode
ipEntity
ipEntity
viewName
viewName
zoneName
zoneName
recordName
recordName
macAddressMode
macAddressMode
macEntity
macEntity
VCO_MODE_REQUEST_VALUE
REQUEST_VALUE
VCO_MODE_REQUEST_STATIC
REQUEST_STATIC
VCO_MODE_REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED
REQUEST_DHCP_RESERVED
VCO_MODE_PASS_VALUE
PASS_VALUE
allowDuplicateHosts
allowDuplicateHosts
netmask
netmask
ip
ip
inherited
inherited
redirectTarget
redirectTarget
responsePolicyType
responsePolicyType
workflowLevel
workflowLevel
deploymentAllowed
deploymentAllowed
quickDeploymentAllowed
quickDeploymentAllowed
TraversalMethodology.NO_TRAVERSAL
NO_TRAVERSAL
TraversalMethodology.DEPTH_FIRST
DEPTH_FIRST
TraversalMethodology.BREADTH_FIRST
BREADTH_FIRST
reuseExisting
reuseExisting
secondStandbyServer
secondStandbyServer
nsRecordTTL
nsRecordTTL
Version 8.3.0 | 207
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
serviceType
serviceType
routerPortInfo
routerPortInfo
switchPortInfo
switchPortInfo
vlanInfo
vlanInfo
discoveryType
discoveryType
pingSweepRange
pingSweepRange
seedRouterAddress
seedRouterAddress
snmpVersion
snmpVersion
snmpPortNumber
snmpPortNumber
snmpCommunityString
snmpCommunityString
secutityLevel
secutityLevel
context
context
authenticationType
authenticationType
authPassphrase
authPassphrase
privacyPassphrase
privacyPassphrase
privacyType
privacyType
networkBoundaries
networkBoundaries
blackHoleVlan
blackHoleVlan
trunkDefaultVlan
trunkDefaultVlan
skipFqdn
skipFqdn
dnsServers
dnsServers
schedule
schedule
ipV4ReconciliationStatus
ipV4ReconciliationStatus
acceptanceCriteriaReclaim
acceptanceCriteriaReclaim
acceptanceCriteriaUnknown
acceptanceCriteriaUnknown
acceptanceCriteriaMismatch
acceptanceCriteriaMismatch
overriddenList
overriddenList
convertOrphanedIPAddressesTo
convertOrphanedIPAddressesTo
locationCode
locationCode
locationInherited
locationInherited
code
code
country
country
subdivision
subdivision
localizedName
localizedName
208 | Address Manager API Guide
Object Types
Property Key
Property Value
description
description
latitude
latitude
longitude
longitude
reserved
reserved
mname
mname
serialNumberFormat
serialNumberFormat
parameterRequestList
parameterRequestList
vendorClassIdentifier
vendorClassIdentifier
macVendor
macVendor
disableDnsOptionInheritance
disableDnsOptionInheritance
leaseTime
leaseTime
expiryTime
expiryTime
deleteOrphanedIPAddresses
deleteOrphanedIPAddresses
ptrs
ptrs
Object Types
Constants used in the Object Types.
Property Key
Property Value
Entity
Entity
Configuration
Configuration
View
View
Zone
Zone
InternalRootZone
InternalRootZone
ZoneTemplate
ZoneTemplate
EnumZone
EnumZone
EnumNumber
EnumNumber
HostRecord
HostRecord
AliasRecord
AliasRecord
MXRecord
MXRecord
TXTRecord
TXTRecord
SRVRecord
SRVRecord
GenericRecord
GenericRecord
HINFORecord
HINFORecord
NAPTRRecord
NAPTRRecord
Version 8.3.0 | 209
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
RecordWithLink
RecordWithLink
ExternalHostRecord
ExternalHostRecord
StartOfAuthority
StartOfAuthority
IP4Block
IP4Block
IP4Network
IP4Network
IP6Block
IP6Block
IP6Network
IP6Network
IP6Address
IP6Address
IP4NetworkTemplate
IP4NetworkTemplate
DHCP4Range
DHCP4Range
DHCP6Range
DHCP6Range
IP4Address
IP4Address
MACPool
MACPool
DenyMACPool
DenyMACPool
MACAddress
MACAddress
TagGroup
TagGroup
Tag
Tag
User
User
UserGroup
UserGroup
Server
Server
ServerGroup
ServerGroup
NetworkServerInterface
NetworkServerInterface
PublishedServerInterface
PublishedServerInterface
NetworkInterface
NetworkInterface
VirtualInterface
VirtualInterface
LDAP
LDAP
Kerberos
Kerberos
KerberosRealm
KerberosRealm
Radius
Radius
TFTPGroup
TFTPGroup
TFTPFolder
TFTPFolder
TFTPFile
TFTPFile
TFTPDeploymentRole
TFTPDeploymentRole
DNSDeploymentRole
DNSDeploymentRole
210 | Address Manager API Guide
Option Types
Property Key
Property Value
DHCPDeploymentRole
DHCPDeploymentRole
DNSOption
DNSOption
DHCPV4ClientOption
DHCPV4ClientOption
DHCPServiceOption
DHCPServiceOption
DHCPRawOption
DHCPRawOption
DNSRawOption
DNSRawOption
DHCPV6ClientOption
DHCPV6ClientOption
DHCPV6ServiceOption
DHCPV6ServiceOption
DHCPV6RawOption
DHCPV6RawOption
VendorProfile
VendorProfile
VendorOptionDef
VendorOptionDef
VendorClientOption
VendorClientOption
CustomOptionDef
CustomOptionDef
DHCPMatchClass
DHCPMatchClass
DHCPSubClass
DHCPSubClass
Device
Device
DeviceType
DeviceType
DeviceSubtype
DeviceSubtype
DeploymentScheduler
DeploymentScheduler
IP4ReconciliationPolicy
IP4ReconciliationPolicy
DNSSECSigningPolicy
DNSSECSigningPolicy
IP4IPGroup
IP4IPGroup
ResponsePolicy
ResponsePolicy
TSIGKey
TSIGKey
RPZone
RPZone
Location
Location
InterfaceID
InterfaceID
Option Types
Constants used in the Option Types.
Property Key
Property Value
DNS_RAW
DNS_RAW
DHCP_RAW
DHCP_RAW
DHCPV6_RAW
DHCPV6_RAW
Version 8.3.0 | 211
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
DNS
DNS
DHCPClient
DHCPClient
DHCPVendorClient
DHCPVendorClient
DHCPService
DHCPService
DHCP6Client
DHCP6Client
DHCP6VendorClient
DHCP6VendorClient
DHCP6Service
DHCP6Service
START_OF_AUTHORITY
START_OF_AUTHORITY
PositionRangeBy
Constants used in the PositionRangeBy API.
Property Key
Property Value
START_OFFSET
START_OFFSET
END_OFFSET
END_OFFSET
START_ADDRESS
START_ADDRESS
Response Policy Type
Constants used in the Response Policy Type.
Property Key
Property Value
BLACKLIST
BLACKLIST
BLACKHOLE
BLACKHOLE
WHITELIST
WHITELIST
REDIRECT
REDIRECT
Response Policy Search Scopes
Constants used in the Response Policy Search.
Property Key
Property Value
RPItemSearchScope.LOCAL
Local
RPItemSearchScope.FEED
Feed
RPItemSearchScope.ALL
All
Reverse Zone Format Type
Constants used in the reverse zone format type.
212 | Address Manager API Guide
Server Capability Profiles
Property Key
Property Value
STARTIP_NETMASK_NET
"[start-ip]-[net-mask].[net].in-addr.arpa"
STARTIP_ENDIP_NET
"[start-ip]-[end-ip].[net].in-addr.arpa"
STARTIP_SLASH_NETMASK_NET
"[start-ip]/[net-mask].[net].in-addr.arpa"
STARTIP_SLASH_ENDIP_NET
"[start-ip]/[end-ip].[net].in-addr.arpa"
CUSTOM
“custom”
Server Capability Profiles
Constants used in the Server Capability Profiles.
Property Key
Property Value
ADONIS_800
ADONIS_800
ADONIS_1200
ADONIS_1200
ADONIS_1900
ADONIS_1900
ADONIS_1950
ADONIS_1950
ADONIS_XMB2
ADONIS_XMB2
ADONIS_XMB3
ADONIS_XMB3
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_20
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_20
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_45
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_45
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_60
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_60
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_100
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_100
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_100_D
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_100_D
AFILIAS_DNS_SERVER
AFILIAS_DNS_SERVER
OTHER_DNS_SERVER
OTHER_DNS_SERVER
PROTEUS_DDW
PROTEUS_DDW
WINDOWS_SERVER
WINDOWS_SERVER
Service Types
Constants used in the Service Types.
Property Key
Property Value
DNS
DNS
DHCP
DHCP
SNMP Version
Constants used in the SNMP Version.
Version 8.3.0 | 213
Chapter 5: API Constants
Property Key
Property Value
V1
v1
V2C
v2c
V3
v3
SNMP Security Levels
Constants used in the SNMP Security Levels.
Property Key
Property Value
AUTH_PRIV
AUTH_PRIV
AUTH_NOPRIV
AUTH_NOPRIV
NOAUTH_NOPRIV
NOAUTH_NOPRIV
SNMP Authentication Type
Constants used in the SNMP Authentication Type.
Property Key
Property Value
MD5
MD5
SHA
SHA
SNMP Privacy Type
Constants used in the SNMP Privacy Type.
Property Key
Property Value
DES
DES
AES128
AES128
AES192
AES192
AES256
AES256
Traversal Methodology
Constants used in the Traversal Methodology.
Property Key
Property Value
TraversalMethodology.NO_TRAVERSAL
NO_TRAVERSAL
TraversalMethodology.DEPTH_FIRST
DEPTH_FIRST
TraversalMethodology.BREADTH_FIRST
BREADTH_FIRST
214 | Address Manager API Guide
User Access Type
User Access Type
Constants used in the User Access Type.
Property Key
Property Value
GUI
GUI
API
API
GUI_AND_API
GUI_AND_API
User-defined Field Type
Constants used in the User-defined Field Type.
Property Key
Property Value
TEXT
TEXT
DATE
DATE
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
INTEGER
INTEGER
LONG
LONG
EMAIL
EMAIL
URL
URL
User-defined Field Validator Properties
Constants used in the User-defined Field Validator Properties.
Property Key
Property Value
MIN
min
MAX
max
MIN_LENGTH
minLength
MAX_LENGTH
maxLength
PATTERN
pattern
User History Privileges
Constants used in the User History Privileges.
Property Key
Property Value
HIDE
HIDE
VIEW_HISTORY_LIST
VIEW_HISTORY_LIST
Version 8.3.0 | 215
Chapter 5: API Constants
User Security Privileges
Constants used in the User Security Privileges.
Property Key
Property Value
NO_ACCESS
NO_ACCESS
VIEW_MY_ACCESS_RIGHTS
VIEW_MY_ACCESS_RIGHTS
VIEW_OTHERS_ACCESS_RIGHTS
VIEW_OTHERS_ACCESS_RIGHTS
CHANGE_ACCESS_RIGHTS
CHANGE_ACCESS_RIGHTS
ADD_ACCESS_RIGHTS
ADD_ACCESS_RIGHTS
DELETE_ACCESS_RIGHTS
DELETE_ACCESS_RIGHTS
User Type
Constants used in the User Type.
Property Key
Property Value
ADMIN
ADMIN
REGULAR
REGULAR
Vendor Profile Option Types
Constants used in the Vendor Profile Option Types.
Property Key
Property Value
IP4
IP4
TEXT
TEXT
UNSIGNED_INT_8
UNSIGNED_INT_8
UNSIGNED_INT_16
UNSIGNED_INT_16
UNSIGNED_INT_32
UNSIGNED_INT_32
UNSIGNED_INT_64
UNSIGNED_INT_64
SIGNED_INT_8
SIGNED_INT_8
SIGNED_INT_16
SIGNED_INT_16
SIGNED_INT_32
SIGNED_INT_32
BOOLEAN
BOOLEAN
IP4_MASK
IP4_MASK
STRING
STRING
BINARY
BINARY
ENCAPSULATED
ENCAPSULATED
216 | Address Manager API Guide
Workflow Levels
Workflow Levels
Constants used in the Workflow Levels.
Property Key
Property Value
None
NONE
Recommend
RECOMMEND
Approve
APPROVE
Defined Probe Values
Constants used in the Data collection process.
Property Key
Property Value
LEASE_COUNT_PER_DATE
LEASE_COUNT_PER_DATE
NETWORK_BLOOM
NETWORK_BLOOM
Probe Status Values
Constants used to check the status of the Data collection process.
Property Key
Property Value
INIT
0
INQUEUE
1
PROCESSING
2
COMPLETED
3
Version 8.3.0 | 217
Chapter 6
API Method Reference
Topics:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
This chapter provides the reference table for all methods available in
the Address Manager API.
API Sessions
Generic Methods
User-defined Fields
IPAM
DHCP
DNS
Deployment Options
TFTP
Servers and Deployment
Crossover High Availability
(XHA)
Address Manager Objects
219
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
API Sessions
Log in and Log out
login (String name, String password), logout()
System Information
String getSystemInfo()
Generic Methods
Updating Objects
void update ( APIEntity entity )
All extensions of this method in this table list only
mutable parameters.
Update with Options
void updateWithOptions ( APIEntity entity, String
options )
Deleting Objects
void delete ( long ObjectId )
Delete with Options
void deleteWithOptions ( long objectId, String
options )
Get Entity by Name
APIEntity getEntityByName ( long parentId, String
name, String type )
Get Entity by ID
APIEntity getEntityById ( long id )
Get Entities
APIEntity[] getEntities ( long parentId, String type,
int start, int count )
Get Parent
APIEntity[] getParent( long entityId )
Get Entities by Name
APIEntity[] getEntitiesByName ( long parentId,
String name, String type, int start ,int count )
Get Entities by Name Using Options
APIEntity[] getEntitiesByNameUsingOptions ( long
parentId, String name, String type, int start ,int
count, String options )
Get MAC Address
APIEntity[] getMACAddress ( long configurationId,
String macAddress )
Get Linked Entities
APPIEntity[] getLinkedEntities ( long entityId, String
type, int start, int count )
Custom Search
APIEntity[] customSearch ( String[] filters, String
type, String[] options, Integer start, Integer count )
Search by Category
APIEntity[] searchByCategory ( String keyword,
String category, int start, int count )
Search by Object Types
APIEntity[] searchByObjectTypes ( String keyword,
String types, int start, int count )
Linked Entities
Link Entities
220 | Address Manager API Guide
void linkEntities ( long entity1Id, long entity2Id,
String properties )
User-defined Fields
Unlink Entities
void unlinkEntities ( long entity1Id, long entity2Id,
String properties )
Changing Locale
Log in with Options
void loginWithOptions( String userName, String
password, String options )
User-defined Fields
Get User-defined Field
APIUserDefinedField[] getUserDefinedFields
( String type, boolean requiredFieldsOnly )
Update Bulk User-defined Field
byte[] updateBulkUdf ( byte[] data, String
properties )
IPAM
IPv4 Blocks
Add IPv4 Block by CIDR
long addIP4BlockByCIDR ( long parentId, String
CIDR, String properties )
Add IPv4 Block by Range
long addIP4BlockByRange ( long parentId, String
start, String end, String properties )
Add Parent Block
void addParentBlock ( long[] blockOrNetworkIDs )
Add Parent Block with Properties
long addParentBlockWithProperties ( long[]
blockOrNetworkIDs String properties )
Get IP Range by IP Address
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId,
String type, String address )
Get IPv4 Block by CIDR
APIEntity getEntityByCIDR ( long parentId, String
cidr, String type )
Get IPv4 Block by Range
APIEntity getEntityByRange ( long parentId, String
address1, String address2, String type )
Merge Blocks with Parent
void mergeBlocksWithParent ( long[] blockIDs )
Merge Selected Blocks or Networks
void mergeSelectedBlocksOrNetworks ( long[]
blockOrNetworkIds, long blockOrNetworkToKeep )
Move IPv4 Object
void moveIP4Object ( long objectId, String
address )
Move IP Object
void moveIP4Object ( long objectId, String
address, String options )
Resize Range
void resizeRange ( long objectId, String range,
String options )
Version 8.3.0 | 221
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Update IPv4 Block
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
IPv4 Block Generic Methods
void delete ( long objectId )
IPv4 Networks
Add IPv4 Network
long addIP4Network ( long blockId, String CIDR,
String properties )
Get IPv4 Range by IP Address
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP ( long containerId,
String type, String address )
Get IPv4 Network by CIDR
APIEntity getEntityByCIDR ( long parentId, String
cidr, String type )
Get IPv4 Network by Hint
APIEntity[] getIP4NetworksByHint ( long
containerId, int start, int count, String options )
Get IPv4 Network by Range
APIEntity getEntityByRange ( long parentId, String
address1, String address2, String type )
Get Next Available Network
long getNextAvailableIP4Network ( long parentId,
long size, boolean isLargerAllowed, boolean
autoCreate )
Get Next Available IP Range
APIEntity getNextAvailableIPRange ( long
parentId, long size, String type, String properties )
Get Next Available IP Ranges
APIEntity[] getNextAvailableIPRanges ( long
parentId, long size, String type, int count, String
properties )
Split IPv4 Network
APIEntity[] splitIP4Network ( long networkId, int
numberOfParts, String options )
Merge Selected Blocks or Networks
void mergeSelectedBlocksOrNetworks (long[]
blockOrNetworkIds, long blockOrNetworkToKeep )
Move IPv4 Object
void moveIP4Object ( long objectId, String
address )
Move IP Object
void moveIP4Object ( long objectId, String
address, String options )
Resize Range
void resizeRange ( long objectId, String range
String options )
Update IPv4 Network
void update (APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
IPv4 Network Generic Methods
222 | Address Manager API Guide
void delete ( long objectId )
IPAM
IPv4 Network Templates
Update IPv4 Network Template Name
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
IPv4 Network Template Generic Methods
get()
void delete( long objectId )
Add IPv4 Network Template
long addIP4NetworkTemplate ( long
configurationId, String name, String properties )
Assign or Update Template
void assignOrUpdateTemplate ( long entityId, long
templateId, String properties )
Re-apply Template
void reapplyTemplate ( long templateId, String
properties )
IPv4 Addresses
Assign IPv4 Address
long assignIP4Address ( long configurationId,
String ip4Address, String macAddress, String
hostInfo, String action, String properties )
Assign Next Available IPv4 Address
APIEntity assignNextAvailableIP4Address ( long
configurationId, long parentId, String macAddress,
String hostInfo, String action, String properties )
Get IPv4 Address
APIEntity getIP4Address ( long containerId, String
address )
Get Next IPv4 Address
String getNextIP4Address ( long parentId, String
properties )
Check Allocation for IPv4 Address
boolean isAddressAllocated ( long configurationId,
String ipAddress, String macAddress )
Get Next Available Address
String getNextAvailableIP4Address ( long
parentId )
Update IPv4 Address
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
IPv4 Address Generic Methods
void delete ( long objectId )
Change IPv4 Address State
void changeStateIP4Address ( long addressId,
String targetState, String macAddress )
IPv4 Objects
Move IPv4 Object
void moveIP4Object(long objectId, String address)
Version 8.3.0 | 223
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Move IP Object
void moveIP4Object(long objectId, String address,
String options)
Resize Range
void resizeRange(long objectId, String range,
String options)
IPv4 Group
Add IPv4 IP Group by Range
long addIP4IPGroupByRange( long parentId,
String start, String end, String properties )
Add IPv4 IP Group by Size
long addIP4IPGroupBySize(long parentId, String
name, int size, String positionRangeBy, String
positionValue, String properties)
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation
Add IPv4 Reconciliation Policy
long addIP4ReconciliationPolicy ( long parentId,
String name, String properties )
Get Discovered Devices
APIEntity[] getDiscoveredDevices ( long policyId )
Get Discovered Device
APIEntity getDiscoveredDevice ( long policyId, long
deviceId )
Get Discovered Device Interfaces
APIEntity getDiscoveredDeviceInterfaces ( long
policyId, long deviceId )
Get Discovered Device Networks
APIEntity getDiscoveredDeviceNetworks ( long
policyId, long deviceId )
Get Discovered Device Hosts
APIEntity getDiscoveredDeviceHosts ( long
policyId, long deviceId )
Get Discovered Device Vlans
APIEntity getDiscoveredDeviceVlans ( long
policyId, long deviceId )
Get Discovered Device ARP Entries
APIEntity getDiscoveredDeviceArpEntries ( long
policyId, long deviceId )
Get Discovered Device MAC Address Entries
APIEntity getDiscoveredDeviceMacAddressEntries
( long policyId, long deviceId )
IPv6 Objects
Add IPv6 Address
long addIP6Address(long containerId, String
address, String type, String name, String
properties)
Add IPv6 Block by MAC Address
long addIP6BlockByMACAddress(long parentId,
String macAddress, String name, String properties)
Add IPv6 Block by Prefix
long addIP6BlockByPrefix(long parentId, String
prefix, String name, String properties)
Add IPv6 Network by Prefix
long addIP6NetworkByPrefix(long parentId, String
prefix, String name, String properties)
224 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Split IPv6 Block or Network
APIEntity[] splitIP6Range (long rangeID, int
numberOfParts, String options)
Get IPv6 Range by IP Address
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP(long containerId,
String type, String address)
Get IPv6 Network by Hint
APIEntity getIP6ObjectsByHint ( long containerId,
String objectType, int start, int count, String
options )
Assign IPv6 Address
boolean assignIP6Address(long containerId, String
address, String action, String macAddress, String
hostInfo, String properties)
Clear IPv6 Address
boolean clearIP6Address(long addressId)
Get Entity by Prefix
APPIEntity getEntityByPrefix(long containerId,
String prefix, String type)
Get IPv6 Address
APPIEntity getIP6Address(long containerId, String
address)
Reassign IPv6 Address
long reassignIP6Address(long oldAddressId, String
destination, String properties)
Provision Devices
Add Device Instance
String addDeviceInstance ( String configName,
String deviceName, String ipAddressMode, String
ipEntity, String viewName, String zoneName,
String recordName, String macAddressMode,
String macEntity, String options )
Delete Device Instance
void deleteDeviceInstance ( String configName,
String identifier, String options )
DHCP
IPv4 DHCP Ranges
Add IPv4 DHCP Range
long addDHCP4Range(long networkId, String start,
String end, String properties)
Add IPv4 DHCP Range By Size
long addDHCP4RangeBySize(long networkId,
String offset, String size, String properties)
Get IPv4 Range by IP Address
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP(long containerId,
String type, String address)
Get IPv4 DHCP Range
APIEntity getEntityByRange(long parentId, String
address1, String address2, String type)
Get IPv4 DHCP Ranges
APIEntity[] getEntities(long parentId, String type, int
start, int count)
Get Max Allowed Range
String[] getMaxAllowedRange(long rangeId)
Version 8.3.0 | 225
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Update IPv4 DHCP Range
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
IPv4 DHCP Range Generic Methods
void delete( long objectId )
IPv6 DHCP Ranges
Add IPv6 DHCP Range
long addDHCP6Range( long networkId, String
start, String end, String properties )
Add IPv6 DHCP Range by Size
long addDHCP6RangeBySize( long networkId,
String start, String size, String properties )
Get IPv6 Range by IP Address
APIEntity getIPRangedByIP(long containerId,
String type, String address)
Get IPv6 DHCP Range
APIEntity getEntityByRange(long parentId, String
address1, String address2, String type)
Get Multiple IPv6 DHCP Ranges
APIEntity[] getEntities(long parentId, String type, int
start, int count)
Update IPv6 DHCP Range
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
IPv6 DHCP Range Generic Methods
void delete( long objectId )
DHCP Client Options
Add DHCP Client Option
long addDHCPClientDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, String value, String
properties)
Get DHCP Client Option
APIDeploymentOption
getDHCPClientDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, long serverId)
Update DHCP Client Option
void updateDHCPClientDeploymentOption
(APIDeploymentOption option)
Delete DHCP Client Option
void deleteDHCPClientDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, long serverId)
DHCP6 Client Options
Add DHCP6 Client Option
long addDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, String value, String
properties)
Get DHCP6 Client Option
APIDeploymentOption
getDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, long serverId)
Update DHCP6 Client Option
void updateDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption
(APIDeploymentOption option)
226 | Address Manager API Guide
DHCP
Delete DHCP6 Client Option
void deleteDHCP6ClientDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, long serverId)
DHCP Custom Options
Add Custom Deployment Option
long addCustomOptionDefinition(long
configurationId, String name, long optionId,
String optionType, boolean allowMultiple, String
properties)
DHCP Service Options
Add DHCP Service Option
long addDHCPServiceDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, String value, String
properties)
Get DHCP Service Option
APIDeploymentOption
getDHCPServiceDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, long serverId)
Update DHCP Service Option
void updateDHCPServiceDeploymentOption
(APIDeploymentOption option)
Delete DHCP Service Option
void deleteDHCPServiceDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, long serverId)
DHCP6 Service Options
Add DHCP6 Service Option
long addDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, String value, String
properties)
Get DHCP6 Service Option
APIDeploymentOption
getDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, long serverId)
Update DHCP6 Service Option
void updateDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption
(APIDeploymentOption option)
Delete DHCP6 Service Option
void deleteDHCP6ServiceDeploymentOption(long
entityId, String name, long serverId)
DHCP Vendor Options
Add DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
long addDHCPVendorDeploymentOption(long
parentId, long optionId, String value, String
properties)
Add Vendor Option Definition
long addVendorOptionDefinition(long
vendorProfileId, long optionId, String name,
String optionType, String description, boolean
allowMultiple, String properties)
Version 8.3.0 | 227
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Add Vendor Profile
long addVendorProfile(String identifier, String
name, String description, String properties)
Delete DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
void deleteDHCPVendorDeploymentOption(long
entityId, long optionId, long serverId)
Get DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
APIDeploymentOption
getDHCPVendorDeploymentOption(long entityId,
long optionId, long serverId)
Update DHCP Vendor Deployment Option
void updateDHCPVendorDeploymentOption
(APIDeploymentOption option)
DHCP Match Classes
Add DHCP Match Classes
long addDHCPMatchClass (long configurationId,
String name, String matchCriteria, String
properties)
Update DHCP Match Classes
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
Delete DHCP Match Classes
void delete ( long objectId )
Add DHCP Sub Classes
long addDHCPSubClass ( long matchClassId,
String matchValue, String properties )
Update DHCP Sub Classes
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
Delete DHCP Sub Classes
void delete ( long objectId )
Shared Networks
Link a Shared Network Tag
void shareNetwork (long networkId, long tagId )
Unlink a Shared Network Tag
void unshareNetwork (long networkId )
Get Shared Networks
APIEntity[] getSharedNetworks (long tagId )
DNS
DNS Views
Add DNS View
long addView(long configurationId, String name,
String properties)
Update DNS View
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
DNS View Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
228 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Add Access Control List (ACL)
long addACL(long configurationId, String name,
String properties)
Update Access Control List (ACL)
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see Updating Objects on page 52.
DNS Zones
Add Entity for DNS Zones
long addEntity(long parentId, APIEntity entity)
Add Zone
long addZone(long parentId, String absoluteName,
String properties)
Get Zones by Hint
APIEntity[] getZonesByHint( long containerId, int
start, int count, String options )
Update Zone
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
Zone Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Get Key Signing Key
String[] getKSK ( long entityId, String format )
DNS Zone Templates
Add Zone Template
long addZoneTemplate(long parentId, String name,
String properties)
Assign or Update Template
void assignOrUpdateTemplate( long entityId, long
templatedId, String properties )
Update Zone Template
void update(APIEntity entity) For more information,
see generic update() method.
Zone Template Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Add Records to DNS Zone Template
addEntity()
ENUM Zones
Add ENUM Zone
long addEnumZone(long parentId, long prefix,
String properties)
Update ENUM Zone
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
ENUM Zone Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
ENUM Numbers
Add ENUM Number
long addEnumNumber(long parentId, int number,
String properties)
Update ENUM Number
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
Version 8.3.0 | 229
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
ENUM Number Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Generic Resource Records
Add Resource Record
long addResourceRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, String type, String rdata, long ttl,
String properties)
Add Entity for Resource Records
long addEntity(long parentId, APIEntity entity)
Move Resource Records
void moveResourceRecord(long
resourceRecordId, String destinationZone)
NAPTR Records
Add NAPTR Record
long addNAPTRRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, int order, int preference, String
service, String regexp, String replacement, String
flags, long ttl, String properties)
Update NAPTR Record
update(int order, int preference, String service,
String regexp, String replacement, long ttl)For
more information, see generic update() method.
NAPTR Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
External Host Records
Add External Host Record
long addExternalHostRecord(long viewId, String
name, String properties)
Update External Host Record
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
External Host Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Host Records
Add Host Record
long addHostRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, String addresses, long ttl, String
properties)
Add Bulk Host Records
APIEntity[] addBulkHostRecord ( long viewId,
String absoluteName, long ttl, long networkId,
String startAddress, int numberOfAddresses, String
properties )
Get Host Record by Hint
APIEntity[] getHostRecordsByHint ( int start, int
count, String options )
Get IP Address with Host Records
APIEntity[] getNetworkLinkedProperties( long
networkId )
230 | Address Manager API Guide
DNS
Get Dependent Records
APIEntity[] getDependentRecords( long entityId, int
start, int count )
Update Host Record
void update(String addresses, long ttl, String
comment)For more information, see generic
update() method.
Host Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Alias Records
Add Alias Record
long addAliasRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, String linkedRecordName, long ttl,
String properties)
Get Aliases by Hint
APIEntity[] getAliasesByHint ( int start, int count,
String options )
Update Alias Record
void update(String linkedRecordName, long ttl,
String comment)For more information, see generic
update() method.
Alias Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Text Records
Add Text Record
long addTXTRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, String txt, long ttl, String properties)
Update Text Record
void update(long ttl, String comment String txt)For
more information, see generic update() method.
Text Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
HINFO Records
Add HINFO Record
long addHINFORecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, String cpu, String os, long ttl, String
properties)
Update HINFO Record
void update(long ttl, String comment String cpu,
String os)For more information, see generic
update() method.
HINFO Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
MX Records
Add MX Record
long addMXRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, int priority, String
linkedRecordName, long ttl, String properties)
Version 8.3.0 | 231
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Update MX Record
void update(String linkedRecordName, long ttl, int
priority, String comment)For more information, see
generic update() method.
MX Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
SRV Records
Add SRV Record
long addSRVRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, int priority, int port, int weight,
String linkedRecordName, long ttl, String
properties)
Update SRV Record
void update(String linkedRecordName, long ttl, int
priority, int port, int weight, String comment)For
more information, see generic update() method.
SRV Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Start of Authority Records
Add Start of Authority Record
long addStartOfAuthority(long parentId, String
email, long refresh, long retry, long expire, long
minimum, String properties)
Update Start of Authority Record
void update(String email, long refresh, long retry,
long expire, long minimum)For more information,
see generic update() method.
Start of Authority Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Generic Records
Add Generic Record
long addGenericRecord(long viewId, String
absoluteName, String type, String rdata, long ttl,
String properties)
Update Generic Record
void update(String type, String rdata, long ttl,
String comment)For more information, see generic
update() method.
Generic Record Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
DNS Options
Add DNS Option
long addDNSDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, String value, String properties)
Get DNS Option
APIDeploymentOption
getDNSDeploymentOption(long entityId, String
name, long serverId)
232 | Address Manager API Guide
Deployment Options
Update DNS Option
void
updateDNSDeploymentOption(APIDeploymentOption
option)
Delete DNS Option
void deleteDNSDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, long serverId)
DNS Response Policies
Add Response Policy
long addResponsePolicy(long configurationId,
String name, String responsePolicyType, long ttl,
String properties)
Upload Response Policy Item
void uploadResponsePolicyItems(long parentId,
byte[] policyItemsData)
Search Response Policies
ResponsePolicySearchResult[]
searchResponsePolicyItems( String keyword,
String scope, int start, int count, String properties )
Reverse Zone Name Format
Add Reverse Zone Name Format
long addDNSDeploymentOption(long entityId,
String name, String value, String properties)
Deployment Options
Get Deployment Options
APIDeploymentOption[]
getDeploymentOptions(long entityId, String
optionTypes, long serverId)
Add Raw Deployment Option
long addRawDeploymentOption (long parentId,
String optionType, String rawData, String
properties)
Update Raw Deployment Option
void updateRawDeploymentOption
(APIDeploymentOption option)
TFTP
TFTP Groups
Add TFTP Group
long addTFTPGroup(long configurationId, String
name, String properties)
Update TFTP Group
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
TFTP Group Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Version 8.3.0 | 233
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
TFTP Folders
Add TFTP Folder
long addTFTPFolder(long parentId, String name,
String properties)
Update TFTP Folder
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
TFTP Folder Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
TFTP Files
Add TFTP File
long addTFTPFile(long parentId, String name,
String version, byte[] data, String properties)
Update TFTP File
void update(String name, String version, byte[]
data, String description)For more information, see
generic update() method.
TFTP File Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Servers and Deployment
Servers
Add Server
long addServer(long configurationId, string
name, string defaultInterfaceAddress, string
fullHostName, string profile, string properties)
Import Server
void importServer( long serverId, boolean
importDns, boolean importDhcp, string properties )
Replace Server
void replaceServer( long serverId, string name,
string defaultInterface, string hostName, string
password, boolean upgrade, string properties)
Deploy Server
void deployServer(long serverId)
Deploy Server Configuration
void deployServerConfig ( long serverID, String
properties )
Deploy Server Services
void deployServerServices( long serverId, String
services )
Quick Deployment
void quickDeploy( long zoneId, String properties )
Deployment Status
int getServerDeploymentStatus( long serverId,
String properties )
Server Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
234 | Address Manager API Guide
Servers and Deployment
Server Group
Add Server Group
long addEntity(long parentId, APIEntity entity)
Update Server Group
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, refer to generic
update() method.
Server Group Generic Methods
getEntity()
void delete( long objectId )
For more information, refer to Getting Objects
on page 44 and Deleting Objects on page 52.
Add Server to Server Group
void linkEntities ( long entity1Id, long entity2Id,
String properties )
For more information, refer to Link Entities on
page 53.
Remove Server from Server Group
void unlinkEntities ( long entity1Id, long
entity2Id, String properties )
For more information, refer to Unlink Entities
on page 54.
DNS and DHCP Deployment Roles
Get Servers Associated with a Deployment Role
APIEntity getServerForRole ( long roleId )
Get Server’s Associated Deployment Roles
APIDeploymentRole[] getServerDeploymentRoles
( long serverId )
Get Deployment Roles for DNS and IP Address
Space Objects
APIDeploymentRole[] getDeploymentRoles ( long
entityId )
Move Deployment Roles
moveDeploymentRoles ( long sourceServerId, long
targetServerInterfaceId, boolean moveDnsRoles,
boolean moveDhcpRoles, String options )
DHCP Deployment Roles
Add DHCP Deployment Role
long addDHCPDeploymentRole(long entityId, long
serverInterfaceId, String type, String properties)
Get DHCP Deployment Role
APIDeploymentRole
getDHCPDeploymentRole(long entityId, long
serverInterfaceId)
Update DHCP Deployment Role
void
updateDHCPDeploymentRole(APIDeploymentRole
role)
Delete DHCP Deployment Role
void deleteDHCPDeploymentRole(long entityId,
long serverInterfaceId)
Version 8.3.0 | 235
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
DNS Deployment Roles
Add DNS Deployment Role
long addDNSDeploymentRole(long entityId, long
serverInterfaceId, String type, String properties)
Get DNS Deployment Role
APIDeploymentRole getDNSDeploymentRole(long
entityId, long serverInterfaceId)
Get DNS Deployment Role for View
APIDeploymentRole
getDNSDeploymentRoleForView(long entityId, long
serverInterfaceId, long viewId)
Update DNS Deployment Role
void
updateDNSDeploymentRole(APIDeploymentRole
role)
Delete DNS Deployment Role
void deleteDNSDeploymentRole(long entityId, long
serverInterfaceId)
Delete DNS Deployment Role for View
void deleteDNSDeploymentRoleForView(long
entityId, long serverInterfaceId, long viewId)
TFTP Deployment Roles
Add TFTP Deployment Role
long addTFTPDeploymentRole(long entityId, long
serverId, String properties)
Update TFTP Deployment Role
Not supported
TFTP Deployment Role Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Crossover High Availability (XHA)
Create XHA
long createXHAPair(long configurationId, long
activeServerId, long passiveServerId, String
activeServerNewIPv4Address, String properties)
Edit XHA
void editXHAPair(long xHAServerId, String name,
String properties)
Failover XHA
void failoverXHA(long xHAServerId)
Break XHA
void breakXHAPair(long xHAServerId, boolean
breakInProteusOnly)
Address Manager Objects
Configurations
Add Configuration
long addEntity(long parentId, APIEntity entity)
Update Configuration
void update(String name, String properties)
236 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
For more information, see generic update()
method.
Configuration Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Get Configuration Setting
String getConfigurationSetting( long
configurationId, String settingName)
Update Configuration Setting
void updateConfigurationSetting( long
configurationId, String settingName, String
properties)
Groups and Users
Add Group
long addUserGroup(String name, String properties)
Update Group
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
Group Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Add User
long addUser(String username, String password,
String properties)
Update User
void update(properties =
"securityPrivilege=|
historyPrivilege=")For more information,
see generic update() method.
Update User Password
void updateUserPassword( long userId, String
newPassword, String[] options )
User Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Authenticators
Update Authenticator
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
Authenticator Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Access Rights
Add Access Right
long addAccessRight(long entityId, long userId,
String value, String overrides)
Get Access Right
APIAccessRight getAccessRight(long entityId, long
userId)
Get Access Rights for Entity
APIAccessRight[] getAccessRightsForEntity(long
entityId, int start, int count)
Get Access Rights for User
APIAccessRight[] getAccessRightsForUser(long
userId, int start, int count)
Update Access Rights
void updateAccessRight(long entityId, long userId,
String value String overrides)
Version 8.3.0 | 237
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Delete Access Rights
void deleteAccessRight(long entityId, long userId)
Devices
Add Device
long addDevice(long configurationId, String
name, long deviceTypeId, long deviceSubtypeId,
String ip4Addresses, String ip6Addresses, String
properties)
Add Device Subtype
long addDeviceSubtype(long parentId, String
name, String properties)
Add Device Type
long addDeviceType(String name, String
properties)
Object Tag Groups
Add Object Tag Group
long addTagGroup(String name, String properties)
Update Object Tag Group
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
Object Tag Group Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Object Tags
Add Object Tag
long addTag ( long parentid, String name, String
properties )
Assign Object Tag
This method is deprecated. Using this method now
returns an error message. Use the linkEntities()
method instead. For more information, see Link
Entities on page 50.
Remove Object Tag
This method is deprecated. Using this method now
returns an error message. Use the unlinkEntities()
method instead. For more information, see Unlink
Entities on page 51.
Update Object Tag
void update ( APIEntity entity )
For more information, see generic update()
method.
Object Tag Generic Methods
getEntity()
void delete ( long objectId )
Locations
Add a Location
long addLocation ( String name, long parentId,
String properties )
Get Location By Code
APIEntity[] getLocations ( long parentId )
238 | Address Manager API Guide
Address Manager Objects
Get All Used Locations
APIEntity getLocationByCode ( String code )
Database Management
Configure Replication
void configureReplication ( String
standbyServer, boolean compressReplication,
long replicationQueueThreshold, long
replicationBreakThreshold, String properties )
Purge History
int purgeHistoryNow( String untilWhenTimestamp,
int numberOfDaysToKeep, int
numberOfMonthsToKeep, boolean waitOption )
MAC Pools
Get MAC Addresses in Pool
This method is deprecated. Using this method
now returns an error message. Use the
getLinkedEntities() method instead. For more
information, see Get Linked Entities on page 49.
Add MAC Pool
long addEntity(long parentID, APIEntity entity)
Update MAC Pool
void update(APIEntity entity)For more information,
see generic update() method.
MAC Pool Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
MAC Addresses
Add MAC Address
long addMACAddress(long configurationId, String
macAddress, String properties)
Associate MAC Address
void associateMACAddressWithPool(long
configurationId, String macAddress, long poolId )
Deny MAC Address
void denyMACAddress(long configurationId, String
macAddress)
Is Address Allocated?
boolean isAddressAllocated(long configurationId,
String ipAddress, String macAddress)
Update MAC Address
void update(String name, String macpoolId)For
more information, see generic update() method.
MAC Address Generic Methods
getEntity()void delete( long objectId )
Get MAC Address
APIEntity getMACAddress(long configurationId,
String macAddress)
Workflow Change Requests
Workflow Change Requests
For more information, see Access Rights on page
195.
Version 8.3.0 | 239
Chapter 6: API Method Reference
Migration
Migrate a File
void migrateFile(String filename)
Migration Status
boolean isMigrationRunning(String filename)
Collecting Data
Start Probe
void startProbe ( String definedProbe, String
properties )
Get Probe Status
int getProbeStatus ( String definedProbe )
Get Probe Data
APIData getProbeData ( String definedProbe,
String properties )
240 | Address Manager API Guide
Chapter 7
Property Options Reference
Topics:
•
•
This chapter provides the lists of available properties and IP address
states.
Property Options
IP Address States
241
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference
Property Options
This chapter provides the reference table for the available properties that can be updatable or read-only
when using the get, add or update API methods. The properties marked with read-only cannot be updated
when committing add or update methods. Refer to these tables to find what value of properties will be
returned and what values can be updated.
Configuration
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/Updatable
Configuration
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/Updatable
View
None
None
Zone
deployable
Both
Zone Template
None
None
EnumZone
deployable
Both
Response Policy
None
None
EnumNumber
name
Both
data
Both
Views and Zones
Resource Records
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
Host Record
ttl=time-to-live value
Both
absolutName=the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
addresses=a list of comma-separated IP addresses (For example:
10.0.0.5,130.4.5.2)
Both
reverseRecord
Both
ttl=time-to-live value
Both
absolutName=the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
Alias Record
linkedRecordName=the name of the record to which this alias will link. Both
External Host
addresses=a list of comma-separated IP addresses.
242 | Address Manager API Guide
Note: The External Host Record API entity returns the
addresses property only when it is linked with an IP address. If
there is no linked IP address, it will return null.
Read-only
Property Options
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
Generic Record
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
absolutName = the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
type = Resource record type (For example: A/AAAA/PTR/SRV/MX)
Read-only
rdata = Resource record data (comma-separated values as per the
record type)
Both
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
absolutName = the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
os = a string providing operation system information
Both
cpu = a string providing central processing unit information
Both
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
absolutName = the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
linkedRecordName = the FQDN of the host record to which this MX
record is linked
Both
priority = specifies which mail server to send clients to first when
multiple matching MX records are present. Multiple MX records with
equal priority values are referred to in a round-robin fashion.
Both
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
absolutName = the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
order = specifies the order in which NAPTR records are read, if
several records are present and are possible matches. The lower
order value takes precedence.
Both
preference = specifies the order in which NAPTR records are read
if the order values are the same in multiple records. The lower
preference value takes precedence.
Both
service = specifies the service used for the NAPTR record
Both
regexp = a regular expression, enclosed in double quotation marks,
used to transform the client data. If a regular expression is not
specified, a domain name must be specified in the replacement
parameter.
Both
replacement = specifies a domain name as an alternative to the
regexp. This parameter replaces client data with a domain name
Both
flags = an optional parameter used to set flag values for the record.
Both
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
absolutName = the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
linkedRecordName = the FQDN of the host record to which this
service record is linked.
Both
port = the TCP/UDP port on which the service is available.
Both
Host Info Record
Mail Exchanger
Record
Naming Authority
Pointer
Service Record
Version 8.3.0 | 243
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
priority = specifies which SRV record to use when multiple matching
SRV records are present. The record with the lowest value takes
precedence
Both
weight = if two matching SRV records within a zone have equal
priority, the weight value is checked. If the weight value for one object
is higher than the other, the record with the highest weight has its
resource records returned first.
Both
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
absolutName = the FQDN for the host record
Read-only
txt
Both
ttl = time-to-live value
Both
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
User
userType
Read-only
securityPrivilege
Both
historyPrivilege
Both
email
Both
phoneNumber
Both
authenticator
Both
userAccessType
Both
UserGroup
None
None
Authenticator
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
Tag
None
None
TagGroup
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
VendorProfile
identifier = the Vendor Class Identifier
Both
Text Record
Start of Authority
Records
Admin
Tags
Vendor Profiles
244 | Address Manager API Guide
Property Options
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
VendorProfileOptionoptonId = DNS Vendor Option ID
Read-only
optionType = a data type for the option
Read-only
optionDescription = a description of the information passed by the
option
Both
displayName = display name or screen name for the option.
Both
optionAllowMultiple = allow the option to accept multiple values.
Read-only
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
DNSSEC Signing
Policies
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
TFTPGroup
None
None
TFTPFolder
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
MACAddress
address = String representing the mac address
Both
macPool = Associated mac pool’s name
Both
macVendor = the IEEE MAC vendor of the MAC address. If not
specified or found, Not Found is displayed.
Read-only
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
DeviceType
None
None
DeviceSubtype
None
None
Device
deviceTypeId = Id of associated DeviceType. If Device is associated
with DeviceSubType, it will list the ID of the device type of the
associated DevicesSubType.
Both
DNSSEC
TFTP Objects
MAC Pool Objects
MACPool
Device
Version 8.3.0 | 245
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
deviceSubtypeId = Id of associated DeviceSubType (This property is
available only if Device is associated with DeviceSubType.)
Both
ip4Addresses = Comma delimited list of associated IP4Addresses.
Both
ip6Addresses = Comma delimited list of associated IP6Addresses.
Both
None
None
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
Location
code = The hierarchical location code consists of a set of 1 to 3
alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two characters
indicate a country, followed by next three characters which indicate
a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom locations created under a UN/
LOCODE city are appended to the end of the hierarchy. For example,
CA TOR OF1 indicates:
Both
TSIGKey
Location
•
•
•
CA—Canada
TOR—Toronto
OF1—Office 1
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER
CASE letters.
The county code and child location code should be
alphanumeric strings.
country = The 2-digit country code. This property is only supported for Both
get location methods.
246 | Address Manager API Guide
description = The description of the location.
Both
localizedname = The name of the location in your local language. For
example, for Tokyo Office 1 in Japan, you can enter 東京オフィス1
in Japanese. If your location name contains diacritic marks, you can
enter the name with diacritic marks in this field as well. For example,
Montréal.
Both
subDivision = The ISO 1-3 character alphabetic and/or numeric code
for the administrative division of the country.
Both
latitude = The geographical coordinate showing the north-south
position of the location.
Both
longitude = The geographical coordinate showing the east-west
position of the location.
Both
Property Options
Kerberos Realms
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
KerberosRealm
None
None
KDC
None
None
ServicePrincipal
None
None
Server
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
SingleServer
defaultInterfaceAddress = IP address of Server
Both
fullHostName = Host name of Server
Both
profile - Profile of server. Possible values are ADONIS_XMB2,
ADONIS_XMB3, ADONIS_1950, ADONIS_1900,
ADONIS_1200, ADONIS_800, DNS_DHCP_SERVER_20,
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_45, DNS_DHCP_SERVER_60,
DNS_DHCP_SERVER_100, DNS_DHCP_SERVER_100_D,
WINDOWS_SERVER, OTHER_DNS_SERVER,
PROTEUS_DDW, AFILIAS_DNS_SERVER.
Both
activeNodeId = active server object IDpassiveNodeId = passive
server object IDactiveNodePhysicalAddress = active server
IP addresspassiveNodePhysicalAddress = passive server IP
addressNote: For xHA Server type only. If the server is not in
xHA, this property is not available.
Read-only
importViewName = name of the Windows view. Applicable only
for Windows servers.
Both
enableDNS = True if DNS is enabled, else false. This property will Both
be present only if Server is a Windows server.
enableDHCP = True if DHCP is enabled, else false. This property Both
will be present only if Server is windows server.
readOnly = True if Windows is added in read-only mode, else
false. This property will be present only if Server is a Windows
server.
Both
authenticationCredentialUsername = Username for server. This
property will be present only if Server is Windows and pmm
server.
Both
authenticationCredentialPassword - User password for server.
This property will be updated only for Window server and PMM
server.
Write-only
authenticationCredentialDomain = Domain for server. This
property will be present only if Server is Windows and pmm
server.
Both
ScheduledDeployment None
None
Version 8.3.0 | 247
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference
IPv4Objects
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
IP4Block
CIDR = CIDR value of the block. (if it forms a valid CIDR.)
Read-only
name = name of the block
Both
defaultDomains = Comma separated IDs of the default domains.
Both
start = Start of the block. (if it does not form a valid CIDR)
Read-only
end = End of the block. (if it does not form a valid CIDR)
Read-only
defaultView = ID of the default View for the block.
Both
dnsRestrictions = Comma separated IDs of the DNS zones or
Views to restrict the IPv4 blocks to be used in.
Both
allowDuplicateHost = Duplicate host names check option property.
The possible values are Enable or Disable.
Both
pingBeforeAssign = Ping check option property. The possible
values are Enable or Disable.
Both
inheritAllowDuplicateHost = Duplicate host names inheritance
check option property. The possible values are True or False.
If True, the AllowDuplicateHost option set at the parent object
level will be used. If False, the allowDuplicateHost option must be
specified and the value specified will be used.
Both
inheritPingBeforeAssign = PingBeforeAssign option inheritance
Both
check option property. The possible values are True or False. If
True, the PingBeforeAssign option set at the parent object level will
be used. If False, the PingBeforeAssign option must be specified
and the value specified will be used.
inheritDNSRestrictions = The possible values are True or False. If
True, the IDs of the DNS zone or View to restrict the IPv4 blocks
to be used in will be inherited from the parent object. If False, the
DNSRestrictions option must be specified and the value specified
will be used.
Both
inheritDefaultDomains = The possible values are True or False. If
Both
True, the IDs of the default domain will be inherited from the parent
object. If False, the DefaultDomains option must be specified and
the value specified will be used.
inheritDefaultView = The possible values are True or False. If True, Both
the ID of the default View for the block will be inherited from the
parent object. If False, the DefaultView option must be specified
and the value specified will be used.
locationCode = The hierarchical location code consists of a set of
1 to 3 alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two
characters indicate a country, followed by next three characters
which indicate a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom locations
created under a UN/LOCODE city are appended to the end of the
hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates: CA= Canada
TOR=Toronto OF1=Office 1.
248 | Address Manager API Guide
Both
Property Options
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER
CASE letters. The country code and child location code
should be alphanumeric strings.
locationInherited = This defines if the location property was defined Read-only
directly on the object level or was inherited from the parent object.
IP4Network
CIDR = CIDR value of the block. (if it forms a valid CIDR.)
Read-only
template = ID of the linked template.
Read-only
gateway = Gateway of the network.
Both
defaultDomains = Comma separated IDs of the default domains.
Both
defaultView = ID of the default view for the block.
Both
dnsRestrictions = Comma separated IDs of the DNS zones or
views to restrict the IPv4 networks to be used in.
Both
allowDuplicateHost = Duplicate host names check option property.
The possible values are Enable or Disable.
Both
pingBeforeAssign = Ping check option property. The possible
values are Enable or Disable.
Both
inheritAllowDuplicateHost = Duplicate host names inheritance
check option property. The possible values are True or False.
If True, the AllowDuplicateHost option set at the parent object
level will be used. If False, the allowDuplicateHost option must be
specified and the value specified will be used.
Both
inheritPingBeforeAssign = PingBeforeAssign option inheritance
Both
check option property. The possible values are True or False. If
True, the PingBeforeAssign option set at the parent object level will
be used. If False, the PingBeforeAssign option must be specified
and the value specified will be used.
inheritDNSRestrictions = The possible values are True or False. If
True, the IDs of the DNS zone or View to restrict the IPv4 blocks
to be used in will be inherited from the parent object. If False, the
DNSRestrictions option must be specified and the value specified
will be used.
Both
inheritDefaultDomains = The possible values are True or False. If
Both
True, the IDs of the default domain will be inherited from the parent
object. If False, the DefaultDomains option must be specified and
the value specified will be used.
inheritDefaultView = The possible values are True or False. If True, Both
the ID of the default View for the block will be inherited from the
parent object. If False, the DefaultView option must be specified
and the value specified will be used.
locationCode = The hierarchical location code consists of a set of
1 to 3 alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two
characters indicate a country, followed by next three characters
which indicate a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom locations
created under a UN/LOCODE city are appended to the end of the
Both
Version 8.3.0 | 249
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates: CA= Canada
TOR=Toronto OF1=Office 1.
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER
CASE letters. The country code and child location code
should be alphanumeric strings.
locationInherited = This defines if the location property was defined Read-only
directly on the object level or was inherited from the parent object.
IP4Address
address = Address string.
Read-only
state = state of the address. For possible values, refer to IP
Address States on page 252.
Read-only
macAddress = MAC address of the IP4Address.
Both
routerPortInfo = Connected router port information of the
IPv4Address.
Read-only
switchPortInfo = Connected switch port information of the
IPvAddress.
Read-only
vlanInfo = VLAN information of the IPv4Address.
Read-only
ptrs = a string providing unmanaged external host records with
which the IPv4 address will be associated in the format:
Write-only
viewId,exHostFQDN[, viedId,exHostFQDN,...]
leaseTime = the time when the IP address was leased.
Read-only
expiryTime = the date and time that the DHCP lease expires. This
is only for the DHCP Allocated IP address type.
Read-only
parameterRequestList = the list of parameters the device
requested from the DHCP server.
Read-only
vendorClassIdentifier = an identifier sent by the DHCP client
software running on a device.
Read-only
locationCode = The hierarchical location code consists of a set of
1 to 3 alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two
characters indicate a country, followed by next three characters
which indicate a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom locations
created under a UN/LOCODE city are appended to the end of the
hierarchy. For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates: CA= Canada
TOR=Toronto OF1=Office 1.
Both
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER
CASE letters. The country code and child location code
should be alphanumeric strings.
locationInherited = This defines if the location property was defined Read-only
directly on the object level or was inherited from the parent object.
IP4DHCPRange
250 | Address Manager API Guide
start = Start of the range.
Both
end = End of the range.
Both
Property Options
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
offset = IPv4 address from which the range should begin.
Both
size = the size of the range to be created.
Both
defineRangeBy = the possible values are OFFSET_AND_SIZE and Both
OFFSET_AND_PERCENTAGE.
IP4NetworkTemplate gateway = gateway of the network.
reservedAddress = the list of reserved addresses being set on the
network template.
Both
Both
IPv6Objects
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
IP6Network
prefix = Prefix of the Network
Read-only
locationCode = The hierarchical location code consists of a set of
1 to 3 alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two
characters indicate a country, followed by next three characters
which indicate a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom locations created
under a UN/LOCODE city are appended to the end of the hierarchy.
For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates: CA= Canada TOR=Toronto
OF1=Office 1.
Both
IP6Address
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER
CASE letters. The country code and child location code
should be alphanumeric strings.
locationInherited = This defines if the location property was defined
directly on the object level or was inherited from the parent object.
Read-only
address = Address string
Read-only
macAddress = MAC address of the IP6Address
Read-only
state = State of the address. For possible values, refer to IP Address
States on page 252.
Read-only
ptrs = a string providing unmanaged external host records with which
the IPv6 address will be associated in the format:
Write-only
viewId,exHostFQDN[, viedId,exHostFQDN,...]
locationCode = The hierarchical location code consists of a set of
1 to 3 alpha-numeric strings separated by a space. The first two
characters indicate a country, followed by next three characters
which indicate a city in UN/LOCODE. New custom locations created
under a UN/LOCODE city are appended to the end of the hierarchy.
For example, CA TOR OF1 indicates: CA= Canada TOR=Toronto
OF1=Office 1.
Both
Note: The code is case-sensitive. It must be all UPPER
CASE letters. The country code and child location code
should be alphanumeric strings.
Version 8.3.0 | 251
Chapter 7: Property Options Reference
Object Type
IP6DHCPRange
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
locationInherited = This defines if the location property was defined
directly on the object level or was inherited from the parent object.
Read-only
start = Start of the range
Read-only
end = End of the range
Read-only
size = the size of the range to be created.
Read-only
defineRangeBy = the possible values are AUTOCREATE_BY_SIZE,
OFFSET_AND_SIZE, and START_ADDRESS_AND_SIZE
Read-only
DeploymentRoles
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
DNSDeploymentRole
view
Both
zoneTransServerInterface
Both
inherited
Read-only
DHCPDeploymentRole inherited
Read-only
secondaryServerInterfaceId
Both
Access right
Object Type
Properties
Read-only/
Updatable
Access right
workflowLevel = valid values are None, Recommend, and Approve.
Both
deploymentAllowed = true to perform a full deployment of data to a
managed server, else false.
Both
quickDeploymentAllowed = ture to instantly deploy changed DNS
resource records, else false.
Both
IP Address States
The following tables list the available values of the state parameter of the IP address.
IPv4
State
Description
UNALLOCATED
Available and unassigned IP address for DNS or DHCP.
STATIC
Statically assigned hosts and only used for DNS purposes.
DHCP_ALLOCATED
Dynamically assigned through DHCP to the given MAC address.
DHCP_FREE
Dynamically assigned through DHCP but are now in a free or unallocated state.
252 | Address Manager API Guide
IP Address States
State
Description
DHCP_RESERVED
Represent DHCP reservations, and may yet be assigned to a host. These
addresses can be inside or outside of a DHCP range.
DHCP_LEASED
Used in a DHCP lease.
RESERVED
Reserved for future use. While reserved, the address cannot be assigned a
DNS hot name and cannot be deployed to DHCP.
GATEWAY
Network gateway (router) addresses.
State
Description
UNALLOCATED
Available and unassigned IP address for DNS or DHCP.
STATIC
Statically assigned hosts and only used for DNS purposes.
DHCP_ALLOCATED
Dynamically assigned through DHCP to the given MAC address.
DHCP_FREE
Dynamically assigned through DHCP but are now in a free or unallocated state.
DHCP_RESERVED
Represent DHCP reservations, and may yet be assigned to a host. These
addresses can be inside or outside of a DHCP range.
DHCP_LEASED
Used in a DHCP lease.
RESERVED
Reserved for future use. While reserved, the address cannot be assigned a
DNS hot name and cannot be deployed to DHCP.
GATEWAY
Network gateway (router) addresses.
IPv6
Version 8.3.0 | 253
Index
Index
A
Address Manager API
API Objects
APIEntity Class 25
Java API Examples
Available Java Classes 33
Connecting 28
Logging in 29
Perl API Examples
Adding 35
Connecting 34
Deleting 35
Getting 35
Logging in 34
Updating 35
REST API 35
SOAP ports 24
Web Services API
SOAP Binding Address 24
API Constants
Access Right Values 189
Additional IP Service Type 189
Configuration Setting 189
Defined probe values 217
Deployment Services 189
Deployment Status 189
Device Properties 190
DHCP6 Client Options 194
DHCP6 Service Options 196
DHCP Class Match Criteria 191
DHCP Client Options 191
DHCP Custom Option Types 194
DHCP Deployment Role Types 195
DHCPServiceOptionConstants 196
DHCP Service Options 195
DNS Deployment Role Type 197
DNS Options 197, 198
DNSSEC Key Format 199
DNS Zones Deployment Validation Check 199
Entity Categories 199
ENUM Services 200
IP Assignment Action Values 201
IP discovery type 201
Object Properties 201
Object Types 209
Option Types 211
PositionRangeBy 212
Probe status values 217
Response Policy Search 212
Response Policy Type 212
Reverse Zone Format Type 212
Server Capability Profiles 213
Service Types 213
SNMP authentication type 214
SNMP Privacy type 214
SNMPSecurityLevels 214
SNMP Version 213
Traversal Methodology 214
User Access Type 215
User-defined Field Type 215
User-defined Field Validator Properties 215
User History Privileges 215
User Security Privileges 216
User Type 216
Vendor Profile Option Types 216
Workflow Levels 217
API Method Reference
Address Manager Objects
Access Rights 237
Authenticators 237
Collecting Data 240
Configurations 236
Database Management 239
Devices 238
Groups and Users 237
Location 238
MAC Addresses 239
MAC Pools 239
Migration 240
Object Tag Groups 238
Object Tags 238
Workflow Change Requests 239
API Sessions 220
Crossover High Availability (XHA) 236
Deployment Options 233
DHCP
DHCP6 Client Options 226
DHCP6 Service Options 227
DHCP Client Options 226
DHCP Custom Options 227
DHCP Match Classes 228
DHCP Service Options 227
DHCP Vendor Options 227
IPv4 DHCP Ranges 225
IPv6 DHCP Ranges 226
Shared Networks 228
DNS
Alias Records 231
DNS Options 232
DNS Response Policies 233
DNS Views 228
DNS Zones 229
DNS Zone Templates 229
ENUM Numbers 229
ENUM Zones 229
External Host Records 230
Generic Records 232
Generic Resource Records 230
HINFO Records 231
Host Records 230
MX Records 231
NAPTR Records 230
Reverse zone name format 233
SRV Records 232
Start of Authority Records 232
Version 8.3.0 | 255
Index
Text Records 231
Generic Methods
Changing Locale 221
Liked Entities 220
IPAM
IP Discovery and Reconciliation 224
IPv4 Addresses 223
IPv4 Blocks 221
IPv4 Group 224
IPv4 Networks 222
IPv4 Network Templates 223
IPv4 Objects 223
IPv6 Objects 224
Provision Devices 225
Servers and Deployment
DHCP Deployment Roles 235
DNS and DHCP Deployment Roles 235
DNS Deployment Roles 236
Server Group 235
Servers 234
TFTP Deployment Roles 236
TFTP
TFTP Files 234
TFTP Folders 234
TFTP Groups 233
User-defined Fields 221
API Object Methods
Address Manager Objects
Access Rights
Add Access Right 170
Delete Access Rights 173
Get Access Right 171
Get Access Rights for Entity 171
Get Access Rights for User 172
Update Access Rights 172
Authenticators
Authenticator Generic Methods 170
Update Authenticator 170
Configurations
Add Configuration 165
Configuration Generic Methods 166
Get Configuration Setting 166
Update Configuration 166
Update Configuration Setting 166
Database Management
Configure Replication 177
Purge history 177
Devices
Add Device 178
Add Device Subtype 179
Add Device Type 179
Groups and Users
Add Group 167
Add User 167
Group Generic Methods 167
Update Group 167
update password 169
Update User 169
User Generic Methods 169
Location Groups 175
Locations
Add Location 175
256 | Address Manager API Guide
Get Location By Code 176
Get Locations 176
MAC Addresses
Add MAC Address 181
Associate MAC Address 181
Deny MAC Address 181
Is Address Allocated? 182
MAC Address Generic Methods 182
Update MAC Address 182
MAC Pools
Add MAC Pool 180
Get MAC Addresses in Pool 180
MAC Pool Generic Methods 180
Update MAC Pool 180
Object Tag Groups
Add Object Tag Group 173
Object Tag Group Generic Methods 174
Update Object Tag Group 174
Object Tags
Add Object Tag 174
Assign Object Tag 174
Object Tag Generic Methods 175
Remove Object Tag 175
Update Object Tag 175
Workflow Change Requests 182
Changing Locale
Log in with Options 55
Crossover High Availability (xHA)
Breaking an xHA
Break xHA 164
Creating an xHA
Create xHA 161
Edit xHA 162
Requirements for creating an xHA pair 161
xHA Failover
Failover xHA 165
Data collection
Get probe data 184
Get probe status 184
Start probe 184
Deployment options
Add Raw Deployment Option 144
Get Deployment Options 143
Getting deployment options 143
Raw deployment options 144
Update Raw Deployment Option 145
DHCP
DHCP6 Client Options 100
DHCP6 Service Options 105
DHCP Client Options 99
DHCP Custom Options 102
DHCP Match Classes
Add DHCP Match Classes 110
Add DHCP Sub Classes 111
Delete DHCP Match Classes 111
Delete DHCP Sub Classes 112
Update DHCP Match Classes 111
Update DHCP Sub Classes 111
DHCP Raw Options 112
DHCP Service Options 103
DHCP Vendor Profiles and Options 106
IPv4 DHCP Ranges 93
Index
IPv6 DHCP Ranges 96
Shared Networks
Get Shared Networks 113
Link a Shared Network Tag 113
Unlink a Shared Network Tag 113
DNS
DNS Options
Add DNS Option 137
Delete DNS Option 138
DNS Option value formats 138
Get DNS Option 137
Update DNS Option 138
DNS Raw Option 139
DNS Resource Records
Alias Records
Add Alias Record 130
Alias Record Generic Methods 131
Get Aliases by Hint 130
Update Alias Record 131
Dotted resource records 122
External Host Records
Add External Host Record 125
External Host Record Generic Methods
126
Get IP address with External Host records
126
Update External Host Record 126
Generic Records
Add Generic Record 136
Generic Record Generic Methods 136
Update Generic Record 136
Generic Resource Records
Add Entity for Resource Records 124
Add Resource Records 123
Move Resource Records 124
HINFO Records
Add HINFO Record 132
HINFO Record Generic Methods 132
Update HINFO Record 132
Update MX Record 133
Host Records
Add Bulk Host Records 127
Add Host Record 127
Get Dependent Records 129
Get Host Record by Hint 128
Get IP Address with Host Records 129
Host Record Generic Methods 129
Update Host Record 129
MX Records
Add MX Record 133
MX Record Generic Methods 133
NAPTR Records
Add NAPTR Record 124
NAPTR Record Generic Methods 125
Update NAPTR Record 125
SRV Records
Add SRV Record 134
SRV Record Generic Methods 134
Update SRV Record 134
Start of Authority Records
Add Start of Authority Records 134
Start of Authority Record Generic
Methods 135
Update Start of Authority Record 135
Text Records
Add Text Record 131
Text Record Generic Methods 132
Update Text Record 132
DNS Response Policies
Add Response Policy 140
Response Policy Generic Methods 141
Search Response Policy 141
Update Response Policy 140
Upload Response Policy Item 141
ENUM Numbers
Add ENUM Number 121
ENUM Number Generic Methods 121
Update ENUM Number 121
ENUM Zones
Add ENUM Zone 120
ENUM Zone Generic Methods 121
Update ENUM Zone 121
Reverse zone name format
Add Reverse Zone Name Format 142
Zones
Add Entity for DNS Zones 115
Add Zone 116
Get Key Signing Key 117
Get Zones by Hint 116
Update Zone 117
Zone Generic Methods 82, 117
Zone templates
Add Records to DNS Zone Template 120
Add Zone Template 118
Assign or Update Template 118
Update Zone Template 120
Zone Template Generic Methods 120
DNS Views
Add Access Control List (ACL) 115
Add DNS View 114
DNS View Generic Methods 115
Update Access Control List (ACL) 115
Update DNS View 114
Generic Methods
Deleting Objects
Delete 52
Delete with Options 52
getting objects
Get Entities 44
Get Entity by ID 44
Get Entity by Name 44
Get Parent 45
Linked Entities
Get Linked Entities 53
Link Entities 53
Unlink Entities 54
search and retrieve entities
Custom search 46
Get Entities by Name 49
Get Entities by Name Using Options 49
Get MAC Address 50
Search by Category 48
Search by Object Types 48
Version 8.3.0 | 257
Index
update objects
examples 51
Update 50, 51
Update with Options 51
IPAM
Additional IP Addresses 76
IP Discovery and Reconciliation
Add IPv4 Reconciliation Policy 80
Get Discovered Device 83
Get Discovered Device ARP Entries 84
Get Discovered Device Hosts 84
Get Discovered Device Interfaces 83
Get Discovered Device MAC Address Entries
85
Get Discovered Device Networks 83
Get Discovered Devices 83
Get Discovered Device Vlans 84
IPv4 addresses 71
IPv4 Blocks
Add IPv4 Block by CIDR 58
Add IPv4 Block by Range 58
Add Parent Block 59
IPv4 Discovery and Reconciliation 80
IPv4 Group 77
IPv4 networks
Add IPv4 Network 62
IPv4 network templates 67
IPv4 objects 78
IPv6 objects 85
Provision devices 91
Migration
Migrate a File 183
Migration Status 183
Servers and Deployment
DNS and DHCP Deployment Roles
DHCP Deployment Roles
Add DHCP Deployment Role 156
Delete DHCP Deployment Role 157
Get DHCP Deployment Role 156
Update DHCP Deployment Role 157
DNS Deployment Roles
Add DNS Deployment Role 158
Delete DNS Deployment Role 159
Delete DNS Deployment Role for View
159
Get DNS Deployment Role 158
Get DNS Deployment Role for View 159
Update DNS Deployment Role 159
Get Deployment Roles for DNS and IP
Address Space Objects 155
Get Servers Associated with a Deployment
Role 154
Get Server’s Associated Deployment Roles
155
Move Deployment Roles 155
TFTP Deployment Roles
Add TFTP Deployment Role 160
TFTP Deployment Role Generic Methods
160
Update TFTP Deployment Role 160
Server Group
Add Server Group 154
258 | Address Manager API Guide
Generic methods 154
Link server to server group 154
Unlink server from server group 154
update 154
Servers
Add Server 148
Deployment Status 153
Deploy Server 151
Deploy Server Configuration 151
Deploy Server Services 152
Get Published Interface 153
Import Server 149
Quick Deployment 152
Replace Server 150
Server Generic Methods 153
TFTP
TFTP Files
Add TFTP File 146
TFTP File Generic Methods 147
Update TFTP File 147
TFTP Folders
Add TFTP Folder 146
TFTP Folder Generic Methods 146
Update TFTP Folder 146
TFTP Groups
Add TFTP Group 145
TFTP Group Generic Methods 145
Update TFTP Group 145
User-defined Fields
Getting User-defined fields
Get User-defined Field 57
Update Bulk User-defined Field 57
Java API Examples 56
Perl API Examples 56
API Objects
APIAccessRight Class 25
APIDeploymentOption Class 26
APIDeploymentRole Class 25
APIUserDefinedField Class 26
ResponsePolicySearchResult Class 27
API Sessions
connect to Address Manager 27
D
delete objects 31
DHCP
DHCP6 Client Options
Add DHCP6 Client Option 100
Delete DHCP6 Client Option 101
Get DHCP6 Client Option 101
Update DHCP6 Client Option 101
DHCP6 Service Options
Add DHCP6 Service Option 105
Delete DHCP6 Service Option 106
Get DHCP6 Service Option 105
Update DHCP6 Service Option 106
DHCP Client Options
Add DHCP Client Option 99
Delete DHCP Client Option 100
Get DHCP Client Option 99
Update DHCP Client Option 100
Index
DHCP Custom Options
Add Custom Deployment Option 102
DHCP Service Options
Add DHCP Service Option 103
Delete DHCP Service Option 104
Get DHCP Service Option 104
Update DHCP Service Option 104
DHCP Vendor Profiles and Options
Add DHCP Vendor Deployment Option 107
Add Vendor Option Definition 107
Add Vendor Profile 108
Delete DHCP Vendor Deployment Option 108
Get DHCP Vendor Deployment Option 109
Update DHCP Vendor Deployment Option 109
Get IPv4 DHCP Ranges 95
Get Max Allowed Range 96
IPv4 DHCP Range Generic Methods 96
IPv6 DHCP Ranges
Add IPv6 DHCP Range 96
Get IPv6 DHCP Range 98
Get IPv6 Range by IP Address 97
Get Multiple IPv6 DHCP Ranges 98
IPv6 DHCP Range Generic Methods 99
Update IPv6 DHCP Range 99
Update IPv4 DHCP Range 96
Get IPv4 Network by Hint 63
Get IPv4 Network by Range 64
Get IPv4 Range by IP Address 62
Get Next Available IP Range 65
Get Next Available IP Ranges 65
Get Next Available Network 64
IPv4 Network Generic Methods 67
IPv4 Network Template Generic Methods 71
Re-apply Template 69
Split IPv4 Network 66
Update IPv4 Network 67
Update IPv4 Network Template Name 70
IPv4 objects
Move IP object 79
Move IPv4 object 78
Resize Range 79
IPv6 objects
Add Device Instance 91
Add IPv6 Address 85
Add IPv6 Block by MAC Address 86
Add IPv6 Block by Prefix 86
Add IPv6 Network by Prefix 86
Assign IPv6 Address 88
Clear IPv6 Address 90
Get Entity by Prefix 90
Get IPv6 Address 90
Get IPv6 objects by Hint 87
Get IPv6 Range by IP Address 87
Reassign IPv6 Address 91
Split IPv6 Block 87
Split IPv6 Network 87
Provision devices 93
I
IPAM
Additional IP Addresses
Add Additional IP Addresses 76
Get Additional IP Addresses 77
Remove Additional IP Addresses 76
Delete Device Instance 93
DHCP
Add IPv4 DHCP Range 94
Add IPv4 DHCP Range by size 94, 97
Get IPv4 DHCP Range 95
Get IPv4 Range by IP Address 94
IPv4 addresses
assign IPv4 addresses 71
Assign Next Available IPv4 Address 72
Change IPv4 Address State 75
Check Allocation for IPv4 Address 74
Get IPv4 Address 73
Get Next Available Address 75
Get Next IPv4 Address 74
IPv4 Address Generic Methods 75
Update IPv4 Address 75
IPv4 Blocks
add parent block with properties 59
get IP range by IP address 59
get IPv4 Block by CIDR 60
get IPv4 Block by Range 60
Merge blocks with parent 61
Merge selected blocks or networks 61, 61, 61
IPv4 Group
Add IPv4 IP Group by Range 77
Add IPv4 IP Group by Size 78
IPv4 Networks
Add IPv4 Network Template 67, 68
Get IPv4 network by CIDR 62
O
Objects 18
P
Property Options Reference
IP Address States 252
Property options
Access right 252
Admin 244
Configuration 242
DeploymentRoles 252
Device 245
DNSSEC 245
IPv4 252
IPv4Objects 248
IPv6 253
IPv6Objects 251
Kerberos Realms 247
Location 246
MAC Pool Objects 245
Resource Records 242
Server 247
Tags 244
TFTP Objects 245
Vendor Profiles 244
Views and Zones 242
Version 8.3.0 | 259
Index
S
SOAP Binding Address 24
SSL 21
W
What's New 13
260 | Address Manager API Guide
BlueCat Networks (USA) Inc. and its affiliates.
www.bluecatnetworks.com
Toll Free: 1.866.895.6931
Document #: BAM_API_v8.3.0-R1
Published in Canada
Date: November 2017
Source Exif Data:
File Type : PDF File Type Extension : pdf MIME Type : application/pdf Linearized : Yes XMP Toolkit : Adobe XMP Core 5.6-c015 84.159810, 2016/09/10-02:41:30 Format : application/pdf Title : Address Manager Language : en Date : 2017:10:25 16:30:37-04:00 Producer : Apache FOP Version 2.1 PDF Version : 1.4 Creator Tool : DITA Open Toolkit Metadata Date : 2017:10:25 16:32:24-04:00 Create Date : 2017:10:25 16:30:37-04:00 Modify Date : 2017:10:25 16:32:24-04:00 Document ID : uuid:9143c77a-1d30-9043-831a-a60394281b9c Instance ID : uuid:bd067a2d-1f23-7e41-b6ea-02256c8f53ba Page Mode : UseOutlines Page Count : 261 Profile CMM Type : Unknown (lcms) Profile Version : 2.1.0 Profile Class : Display Device Profile Color Space Data : RGB Profile Connection Space : XYZ Profile Date Time : 1998:02:09 06:49:00 Profile File Signature : acsp Primary Platform : Apple Computer Inc. CMM Flags : Not Embedded, Independent Device Manufacturer : Hewlett-Packard Device Model : sRGB Device Attributes : Reflective, Glossy, Positive, Color Rendering Intent : Perceptual Connection Space Illuminant : 0.9642 1 0.82491 Profile Creator : Unknown (lcms) Profile ID : 0 Profile Copyright : Copyright (c) 1998 Hewlett-Packard Company Profile Description : sRGB IEC61966-2.1 Media White Point : 0.95045 1 1.08905 Media Black Point : 0 0 0 Red Matrix Column : 0.43607 0.22249 0.01392 Green Matrix Column : 0.38515 0.71687 0.09708 Blue Matrix Column : 0.14307 0.06061 0.7141 Device Mfg Desc : IEC http://www.iec.ch Device Model Desc : IEC 61966-2.1 Default RGB colour space - sRGB Viewing Cond Desc : Reference Viewing Condition in IEC61966-2.1 Viewing Cond Illuminant : 19.6445 20.3718 16.8089 Viewing Cond Surround : 3.92889 4.07439 3.36179 Viewing Cond Illuminant Type : D50 Luminance : 76.03647 80 87.12462 Measurement Observer : CIE 1931 Measurement Backing : 0 0 0 Measurement Geometry : Unknown Measurement Flare : 0.999% Measurement Illuminant : D65 Technology : Cathode Ray Tube Display Red Tone Reproduction Curve : (Binary data 2060 bytes, use -b option to extract) Green Tone Reproduction Curve : (Binary data 2060 bytes, use -b option to extract) Blue Tone Reproduction Curve : (Binary data 2060 bytes, use -b option to extract) Creator : DITA Open ToolkitEXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools